Home

NEC NEAX 2000 User's Manual

1. ISSUE No ISSUE No PAGE No PAGE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 4 5 6 7 8 137 1 175 1 138 1 176 1 139 1 177 1 140 1 178 1 141 1 179 1 142 1 180 1 143 1 181 1 144 1 182 1 145 1 183 1 146 1 184 1 147 1 185 1 148 1 186 1 149 1 187 1 150 1 188 1 151 1 189 1 152 1 190 1 153 1 191 1 154 1 192 1 155 1 193 1 156 1 194 1 157 1 195 1 158 1 196 1 159 1 197 1 160 1 198 1 161 1 199 1 162 1 200 1 163 1 201 1 164 1 202 1 165 1 203 1 166 1 204 1 167 1 205 1 168 1 206 1 169 1 207 1 170 1 208 1 171 1 209 1 172 1 210 1 173 1 211 1 174 1 212 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE JANUARY 2000 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE DATE DATE DATE NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Revision Sheet 3 5 NDA 24271 ISSUE No ISSUE No PAGE No PAGE No 1 2 4 5 6 7 1 4 5 6 7 8 213 1 251 1 214 1 252 1 215 1 253 1 216 1 254 1 217 1 255 1 218 1 256 1 219 1 257 1 220 1 258 1 221 1 259 1 222 1 260 1 223 1 261 1 224 1 262 1 225 1 263 1 226 1 264 1 227 1 265 1 228 1 266 1 229 1 267 1 230 1 268 1 231 1 269 1 232 1 270 1 233 1 271 1 234 1 272 1 235 1 273 1 236 1 274
2. RTOO RTO1 RTO2 Trunk Access Code RT04 RTOS RT06 RTO7 Individual Trunk Access Set Trunk Queueing Outgoing Call Back ancel Camp On by station Transfer method Camp On by station Call Waiting method Executive Override NEAX2000 IVS2 Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 273 RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM Numbering Plan Continued Access Code Setting Data Service Features Entry Call Forwarding All Calls Cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Busy Entry Line Cancel o Entry Call Forwarding Destination Cancel Set Do Not Disturb Cancel Set MW Lamp Reset Last Number Redial Account Code Entry Station Speed Dialing Origination System Speed Dialing Origination Note Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters feature for default data relating to timeouts Page 274 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY General Description This feature permits any station user to register his her Return Schedule from his her phone when he she leaves his her desk or the premises and have the Return Schedule displayed on a calling Multiline Terminal with an LCD during his her absence Station Application All statio
3. NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 77 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding Busy Line From a Single Line Telephone To set Call Forwarding Busy Line L 2 3 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To set Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside AER AS Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number Wait until the service set tone is received Replace the handset To cancel Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 2 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line cancellation code and receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 There is no limit to the number of stations that can set Call Forwarding Busy Line at one time Extensions can be allowed or denied this feature by Class of Service in system programming Call Forwarding Busy Line can be provided on a system or an individual basis Call Forwarding Busy Line on a system basis allows any incoming Direct Inward Dial DID Direct In ward Termination DIT Tie line Transfer and internal calls which encoun
4. NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 74 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding All Calls To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive special dial tone The LCD displays CF CALL XXXX Target Station 3 Press the key and receive service set tone The LED of the associated feature key will go out The LCD displays CANCEL 4 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key From a Single Line Telephone e To set Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To set Call Forwarding All Calls Outside Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the trunk access code and desired telephone number Wait until service set tone is received unless programming CM08 222 0 A RAS Replace the handset To monitor Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset 2 When Call Forwarding All Calls has been set special dial tone is heard 3 Replace the handset To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2
5. Call Queuing Call Splitting Call Waiting Display Common Route Indial Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Incoming Call Identification Individual Trunk Access Multi Function Key Multiple Console Operation Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only Serial Call XI X X X OK OK OK X OK OK X X OK OK X OK X X OK X OK X OK X X OK OK X XxX OK OK X x x x Xx abe ded Pel be LILL dodo de de de mf dolido dedo rd dad dd dd NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page ix TABLE OF FEATURES X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 FEATURE NEAX2000 IVS x y Time Display Trunk Group Busy Display Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant Attendant Delay Announcement Attendant Lockout Attendant Overflow Attendant Override Authorization Code Automated Attendant Automatic Call Distribution ACD Busy In Busy Out ACD Call Waiting Indication ACD Delay Announcement ACD Hunt Past No Answer ACD Immediate Overflow ACD Priority Queuing ACD Queue Size Control ACD Silent Monitor ACD Automatic Call Distribution with Management Information System Automatic Camp On Automatic Number Identifi
6. Caller ID Display Camp On Centrex Compatibility Check In Check Out Class of Service Code Restriction Conference Three Four Party Conference Six Ten Party Consecutive Speed Dialing Consultation Hold Customer Administration Terminal CAT ld pd dl md dd dd tel dd ld dl bd dd Data Hotline Data Hunting Data Interface Automatic Answer Data Line Security Delayed Ringing Diagnostics X X X X X X OK X OK OK OK OK OK KL OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK x x Xx Dial by Name Dial Conversion Direct Data Entry NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page xi TABLE OF FEATURES X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 FEATURE NEAX2000 IVS x y Direct Digital Interface Direct Inward Dialing DID DID Call Waiting DID Digit Conversion Direct Inward System Access DISA Direct Inward Termination DIT Direct Outward Dialing DOD Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Console Busy Out Status Console Do Not Disturb Console Message Waiting Console Room Cutoff Console Wake Up No Answer Console Distinctive Ringing Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel Do Not Di
7. Confirmation of service set SET SET Confirmation of service cancel CANCEL CNCL Attendant Night Transfer N TRF NXF Station 3000 was forwarded from attendant in night mode Automatic Recall Transfer Recall RECALL RCL 3000 Recall for transferred call to station 3000 to station 2000 Automatic Wake up Timed Reminder TIME TIME Background Music PROGRAM PROGRAM 1 Background Music program number Call Back CALL BACK CB Recall for call back when sta tion 3000 goes idle Call Forwarding All Calls Calling station CF ALL FDA Call was forwarded to station 3000 Call Forwarding All Calls Called station CF ALL FDA 3020 Station 3010 was forwarded from station 3020 Call Forwarding Busy Line Calling station CF BUSY FDB Call was forwarded to station 3000 Call Forwarding Busy Line Called station CF BUSY FDB 3020 Station 3010 was forwarded from station 3020 Call Forwarding No Answer Calling station CF NANS FDN Call was forwarded to station 3000 Call Forwarding No Answer Called station CF NANS FDN 3020 Station 3010 was forwarded from station 3020 Call Pickup Station answering via Call Pickup PICK UP PCK 3020 Station 3010 called station 3020 Call Pickup Calling party PICK UP PCK 3020 Station 3000 picked up call directed to station 3020 Called S
8. NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 163 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE General Description This feature allows selected users to override a busy condition on a called station A warning tone is transmitted to both stations in the busy call before the busy condition is overriden and a three party Conference is then es tablished Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal 1 When busy tone is heard press the key assigned for Executive Override The associated LED lights and a warning tone is transmitted to both parties 2 The Multiline Terminal is now bridged into a three party Conference From a Single Line Telephone 1 When busy tone is heard press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone Dial the Executive Override feature access code A warning tone is transmitted to both parties 3 The station is now bridged into a three party Conference Service Conditions 1 Two burst tones of 0 8 seconds each are transmitted upon activation to alert the connected parties that an Executive Override will occur On a system wide basis the tones transmitted to the C O line may be denied The station will still receive alert tones 2 When a three party Conference is established and one party hangs up the remaining two parties are still connected 3 The Executive Override access code is
9. If the incoming call returns to one of the stations that has taken party in the process of multiple call forward ing the Call Forwarding Busy Line from that station will not be performed If all the stations are busy in a multiple call forwarding sequence a calling internal station may then activate Call Back Message Reminder Camp On or Executive Override to the called station If the station is a Direct In Termination call Call Forwarding Busy Line is not activated The calling party may be forwarded to the Attendant Console to Trunk Answer any Station put in Automatic Camp On or can receive ringback until the station becomes idle If the called station is set as the forwarded destination in a multiple call forwarding scheme Call Forwarding Busy Line at that point will not take place If the called station is set to Call Forwarding Busy Line to another station in a different tenant and that station is set to Call Forwarding Busy Line to the Attendant Console the calling station will be connected to the calling station s Attendant Console For Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line the display of a Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the called station number and the final forwarded station number for the calling party For the final forwarded to station the display of the Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the called number and the calling party station or trunk Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer
10. Save and Repeat X X X X X X X x x x Xx Security Alarm x lt x miii ii LAIALI Set Relocation Simultaneous Voice and Data Transmission Single Digit Dialing Software Line Appearance Virtual Extensions Stack Dial Station Hunting Station Hunting Circular Station Hunting Terminal Station Hunting Secretarial Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Station Speed Dialing Step Call Supervisory Control of Peripheral Equipment miJ mimi J J i limi Synchronous Data Switching System Speed Dialing System Traffic Lim J Tenant Service Terminal Attribute Data Assignment Tie Lines Tie Line Tandem Switching Timed Queue Timed Reminder Trunk Direct Appearances Trunk Queuing Outgoing X X X X X OK OK X X X X X X X X X X X X OK OK X x Xx biLibjmjljlyl Trunk to Trunk Connection NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page xv TABLE OF FEATURES X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 FEATURE NEAX2000 IVS Uniform Call Distribution UCD Busy In Busy Out UCD Call Waiting Indication UCD Delay Announcement UCD Hunt Past No Answer UCD Immediate Overflow UCD Priority Queuing UCD Queue Size Control UCD Si
11. Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 1 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 2 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 5 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Target station for Call Forwarding No Answer No Station Speed Dialing 4 Replace the handset To cancel Split Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the specific Split Call Forwarding No Answer cancellation code and receive service set tone 3 Replace the handset Service Conditions 1 This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for Call Forwarding No Answer the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding No Answer The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming Either Call Forwarding No Answer or Split Call Forwarding No Answer can be selected for the feature available per tenant in system programming depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal call attendant assisted call a Tie Line call or a C O
12. 2 In SN716 DESKCON the UP T DOWN J key located on the right side of the console provides audible indication control headset handset receiver volume and LCD contrast adjustment Call Processing Indication General Description This feature provides visual indications of all calls being processed or awaiting processing at the Attendant Con sole NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 32 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Call Queuing Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Each Attendant Console is provided with 6 dedicated switching loop keys Each loop key is associated with an LED to display the status of the call on that loop The indicators may be on off or flashing and green or red When the Attendant Loop Release feature is activated the status of the call is removed from the console until recalled by the Automatic Recall feature When the Attendant Console is calling a station the LCD display shows the called stations status BSY RST PCK FDA FDN FDB Call Queuing General Description This feature provides the Attendant the ability to handle a series of exchange network calls in the order of their arrival first in first out thereby eliminating unnecessary delays Operating Procedure Press the Attendant Console Answer key to receive calls in the order of their queue position Service Conditions 1 Incoming calls a
13. Lift handset or press Speaker key and receive dial tone Press the Call Forwarding No Answer feature access key and receive special dial tone Press the key the associated LED goes out and service set tone is received The LCD displays CANCEL From a Single Line Telephone To set Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Ze 3 Lift handset and receive dial tone Dial Call Forwarding No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To set Call Forwarding No Answer Outside E e Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone Dial Call Forwarding No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number Wait until service set tone is received Replace the handset To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer 1 2 Lift handset and receive dial tone Dial specific Call Forwarding No Answer cancellation code and receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 An unlimited number of stations can set Call Forwarding No Answer at one time Stations are allowed disallowed this feature by Class Of Service in system programming Call Forwarding No Answer can be provided on a system and an individual basis Call Forwarding on a system basis allows Direct Inward Dial DID calls or Tie Line calls which encounter a no answer condition to be forward
14. Press the SET key Dial the desired wake up time in military format in one minute increments Press the SET key Steps 2 through 5 can be repeated for additional stations Press the RLS key To cancel Automatic Wake Up 1 2 3 4 Press WK UP key Dial station number Press RESET key Steps 2 and 3 can be repeated for additional stations Press RLS key To activate Automatic Wake Up while engaged in conversation with station 1 2 3 4 Press the WK UP key Dial the Wake up time in military format in one minute increments Press the SET key Press the RLS key To cancel Automatic Wake Up while engaged in conversation with station 1 2 3 Press the WK UP key Press the RESET key Press the RLS key To activate Check In Check Out 1 Ze 3 Press the Check In Check Out function button Dial the desired station number Press the SET key to set Check In OR Press the RESET key to set Check Out NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 187 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT To activate Room Status 1 2 3 4 Press the Room Status function button Dial the desired station number Press the SET key The features that are activated at the station will be indicated by the LED lighting at the applicable feature function button and the LCD will display unless Automatic Wake Up is set in which case the set time w
15. This feature provides a visual indication to the Attendant when one or more calls are waiting to be answered Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 When there are any incoming calls to the Attendant Console that have not yet been answered the CW Call Waiting will show on the LCD display without flashing A value of from 1 to 48 the default is 6 waiting calls can be set to start the CW flashing on a per system basis The number of waiting calls 1 to 96 calls will show besides CW on the LCD 2 When multiple consoles are installed the CW will show on all consoles display which are assigned to the same tenant group Other tenant group consoles will reflect the call waiting status for their tenant group only 3 The following types of unanswered incoming calls to an Attendant Console are counted as calls waiting LDN ATND RCL FX WATS TIE BUSY NANS TF ICPT ALL CCSA Listed Directory Number Calls Attendant Dial 0 Calls Attendant Recall Calls Foreign Exchange Calls Wide Area Telephone Service Calls Tie Line Calls Call Forwarding Busy Calls to Attendant Call Forwarding No Answer Calls to Attendant Interposition Transfer Calling Calls between Attendants Call Forwarding Intercept Calls Call Forwarding All Calls to Attendant Common Channel Signaling Arrangement Calls 4 An audible indication will be provided when the CW is shown
16. To set split Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone Number Destination Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 0 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 1 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 2 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 5 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 7 Target station for Call Forwarding All Calls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No Station Speed Dialing The associated LED lights and the LCD displays SET XXXX or SET OPR Target Station Operator The LED of the associated feature button lights 4 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To monitor Split Call Forwarding All Calls Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or special dial tone when lifting the handset 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key The LCD displays CF ALL XXXX Target station 3 Replace th
17. are set canceled from a MAT CAT the lamp indication of the Multiline Ter minal changes as it would if the features were set canceled from the Multiline Terminal A MATI CAT can overwrite or cancel these features marked by which are set by each station and vice versa A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding to outside number can be set simultaneously per system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 72 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Attendant Call Forwarding Set Up and Cancel Attendant Call Forwarding Set Up and Cancel General Description All of the various types of Call Forwarding can be set up or cancelled from the Attendant Console Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Call Forwarding All Calls from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls feature cancellation code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone To set Call Forwarding Busy Line from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line featur
18. restriction Check restriction i class assigned Y No Check 6 digit trunk pattern Y e Allowed Allowed or Reorder tone denied Page 204 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Isa digit addition pattern as signed LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT Check digit addition pattern add digits accordingly Delete area code Delete area code Delete all digits Number o digits to be deleted Seize a trunk in first trunk route Delete digits accordingly Seize a trunk in selected priority trunk route and dial NEAX2000 IVS2 Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 205 LINE LOCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT General Description This feature automatically releases a station from the common equipment if the station remains off hook for longer than a programmed interval before dialing Howler tone may be programmed to be sent to the station in Line Lockout Station Application All stations Operating Procedure For Line Lockout 1 2 3 4 The station user goes off hook and receives dial tone If the user doesn t begin dialing within approximately 12 seconds reorder tone is received After 30 seconds of reorder tone the station is automatically placed into the Lin
19. 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder search access code 3 Dial2 The station which set the message is automatically called 4 Converse when the call is answered OR 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder retrieve access code 3 The station which set the message is automatically called NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 215 MESSAGE REMINDER To clear the message indication without calling the station that set the message from a Single Line Tele phone or a Multiline Terminal 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder search access code 3 Dial3 The message indication is cleared 4 Restore the handset 5 If more than one message has been set repeat the above procedure as required To Search Retrieve Cancel a message from a Multiline Terminal with LCD 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder Search access code the LCD displays MESSAGE XXXX where XXXxX is the station number that set the message and the time the message was sent 3 Three options are now available e Dial 1 to see the next message e Dial 2 to call the displayed station e Dial 3 to clear the message in the display To call the first station that set a message from a Multiline Terminal with a MSG key 1 Lift the handset or press the Spe
20. 240 0 396 4 sec increments Recall timing for Nonexclusive Hold and Call Park 60 64 0 396 4 sec increments Recall timing after station release for Call Transfer 24 28 0 120 4 sec increments Periodic Time Indication Tone interval 180 184 32 724 60 sec increments Automatic cancel time for unanswered external pag ing calls 300 60 900 60 sec increments Reorder tone timeout to enter Line Lockout state and Off Hook Alarm 28 32 4 32 4 sec increments Ringing duration of Automatic Wake Up call Timed Reminder 28 32 0 32 4 sec increments Single digit dialing timer Timing Start 2 8 1 sec increments Maximum Automatic Uniform Call Distribution ACD UCD call waiting time before answer or abandonment for Peg Count 12 136 4 sec increments Automatic recall of Camp On 8 128 8 sec increments NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 327 VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS Parameter Timing before unanswered Automated Attendant call forwards Duration in sec unless otherwise marked Standard Timing 32 36 Variable Timing 0 120 4 sec increments Interval time between attempts for Timed Queue 120 124 44 124 4 sec increments Duration of call by Timed Queue 28 32 16 124 4 sec increments Programma
21. All stations Operating Procedure Calling the Attendant 1 While engaged in a call press the FLASH key on a Single Line Telephone or the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal and receive feature dial tone 2 Dial the operator access code normally 0 The Attendant Console RCL lamp flashes and ringing is heard The station receives ringback tone 3 After the Attendant answers request the transfer and restore the handset Service Conditions This feature is available for incoming and outgoing C O calls and station to station calls 2 When the Attendant Console is in Night Service the transferring station will receive reorder tone Refer to Attendant Night Transfer Features and Specifications for more information 3 The Call Transfer Attendant feature allows a station user while participating in a two party connection to call the Attendant so that the Attendant may transfer the call or provide other assistance as required A two party connection can be comprised of two stations or a station and a trunk 4 The Call Transfer Attendant feature can be used by a fully restricted station The Attendant can transfer a fully restricted station to another station only 5 Any station including Housephones without a dial can transfer a call to the Attendant Some additional sys tem programming may be necessary NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 103 CALLER ID CLASS CA
22. General Description This feature permits a call to an unanswered station the ability to be forwarded multiple times to a predesignated station that does not have Call Forwarding No Answer set or to the Attendant Console Station Application All stations Page 84 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding All Calls Operating Procedure The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding All Calls apply Service Conditions Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer can only be performed for non data calls 2 Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer can be forwarded as many times as desired The call will stop for warding when it terminates to the Attendant Console or to a station not assigned with Call Forwarding No Answer 3 When a station encounters a Call Forwarding No Answer condition and the station it is forwarded to is busy the system will check the status of the forwarded busy station at intervals pre assigned in system pro gramming 4 Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer service can be utilized by the following incoming calls e Intra office e Direct Inward Dialing e Direct In Termination e Night Service e Hot Line 5 Ifa station transfers a call to another station that set Call Forwarding No Answer and releases from the connection recalls will override Call Forwarding No Answer if the call is unanswe
23. General Description This feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns to the station so that the station user can distinguish between internal and external incoming calls This feature also enables the LED associated with the line key of the Mul tiline Terminal to flash in two colors according to the kind of incoming call Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 10 Ringing pattern for incoming internal calls 1 second on 2 seconds off OR 2 seconds on 4 seconds off Ringing pattern for incoming external calls 1 second on 2 seconds off OR 2 seconds on 4 seconds off OR 0 4 seconds on 0 2 seconds off 0 4 seconds on 2 0 seconds off Ringing pattern for Call Back Trunk Queuing Outgoing and Executive Calling 0 5 seconds on 0 5 seconds off 0 5 seconds on 1 5 seconds off All recalls to Multiline Terminals 0 5 seconds on 0 5 seconds off 0 5 seconds on 0 5 seconds off When calling a third station three party Conference Consultation Hold etc the ringing signal sent to the called station is dependent upon the type of call placed on Hold If the call is a trunk call external ringing is provided if the call is an extension call internal ringing is provided Ring frequencies of Multiline Terminals can be assigned in programming through station Class of Service Refer to the Ring Frequency Control Features and Specifications
24. The PIM for Remote Site requires the DAIB card The Wireless System is not available at the Remote Site according to the UTAM regulation Battery Backup Time Using the internal battery kit the Remote PIM equipped with 23 ports can operate up to 100 minutes 1 hour 40 minutes when AC power is lost 9 The resident system programming cannot be set to the Remote Site while the Main Site is set NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 269 RESERVE POWER RESERVE POWER General Description This feature provides backup power from a 24V battery source in the event of a commercial power failure Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Batteries should be installed inside the PIM or separately from the system Sealed lead acid or maintenance free batteries must be locally provided 3 No interruption of system operation should occur during switchover from commercial to battery power However when the system senses the supplied voltage from the batteries has dropped to 20 21 volts the system will automatically shut down to prevent excessive discharge of the Reserve Power batteries 4 Duration of battery operation is a direct function of the capacity of the batteries installed and the quantity and types of cards installed 5 The Reserve Power requirements are dependent on the configuration of each ind
25. This feature allows a DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Do Not Disturb DND Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console DND set status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Ter minal user can set cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND Console Station Application All stations with a DSS BLF Console Operating Procedure To set and cancel Do Not Disturb DND 1 Press the DND key When stations are currently in DND their associated LED will light green 2 Press the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Press the desired DSS key s to set or cancel A lit LED indicates DND is set 4 Press the DND key again to return to DSS BLF mode if desired Service Conditions 1 The DND Console displays the set status for those stations for whom DND was set by the station user of the DND console or by the set station only Indication is not provided when another DND Console the At tendant Console a Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument or a PMS changes the status of a station If the system is initialized reset the Console function mode will return to DSS BLF 3 Refer to the DSS BLF Console and the Do Not Disturb Features and Specifications for more details Message Waiting Console General Description This feature allows a DSS BLF Consol
26. This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD agent The silent monitor function gives no indication as an option to either the agent or the calling party Station Application All ACD group agents can be monitored All ACD group supervisors can monitor Operating Procedure To monitor a conversation to cancel monitoring Supervisor only 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the monitor feature access code or press the MONITOR key 3 Dial the extension number to be monitored 4 Monitor the conversation via the handset or the speaker 5 Restore the handset or press the Speaker key to cancel monitoring CAUTION The use of monitoring recording or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sound activities whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be il legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws Legal advice should be sought prior to imple menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation prior to mon itoring or recording a telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties
27. 1 Press the desired line key 2 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone from outside exchange 3 Dial the desired number To answer an incoming call 1 Press the ringing line key 2 Lift the handset 3 Answer the incoming call To transfer an incoming call using the Trunk Appearance Hold key 1 Press the ringing line key lift the handset and answer the incoming call 2 Press the TAH key Trunk Appearance Hold and receive dial tone TAH key and dial tone no tone are set by system data The Trunk Direct Appearance key blinks in red 3 Dial the target station number for transferring the call by voice call or by ringing Restore handset before the target station answers The line key remains at held state and the ringing to the target station stops The target station can answer the held call by pressing the applicable line key on the Multiline Terminal OR Press Transfer key and restore handset The line key lights in red and the ringing to the target station goes on When the target station answers the ringing the held call is connected to the target station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 310 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TRUNK DIRECT APPEARANCES Service Conditions 1 The Multiline Terminal with 16 line buttons has 15 available line keys which can be assigned as Trunk Direct Appearances The Multiline Terminal with 8 line buttons has 7 available line
28. 2 The station re presses the mute key e The station returns to the original call Service Conditions 1 While a station is muting the associated lamp on the mute key lights 2 Mute status is canceled when the mute key is pressed again or the station user hangs up 3 Mutes handset headset and internal microphone 4 Does note mute external speakerphone or APR devices Off Hook Voice Announcement General Description This feature provides a secondary voice path to the Multiline Terminal with an APR or APA unit This allows the station to receive a voice call through the speaker while on a handset call on the Primary Extension a sec ondary extension or a Direct Trunk Line Appearance The Multiline Terminal with this feature can program two modes e Voice mode allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement e Tone mode allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing Station Application Multiline Terminals with an LCD with APR or APA unit NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 259 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Prime Line Pickup Operating Procedure With a call in progress using handset 1 The terminal receives an incoming extension call directed to the Primary Extension and hears voice page alert tone Respond hands free when MIC LED is lit Press the Answer key to respond with the handset The original call is automatically put on
29. Call Pickup Designated GUD cias cer AAN AREA N EENE RRA 99 COLL REOUIRECGI 1619 rie AAA AAA ANA AAA 100 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page ii NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page CAOL TRANOFER cnr 4 ie 4G 5504 AAA 102 all ransien All alls lt 4 56 9 eek VES s Bane eee ARANA AAA 102 Gall Transier ARENG oon ot ridad da tido ore 103 CALLER DOLAS A ar A EE E a r a EEA EEEE SEE RR 104 CALLER 1D DISPLAY siraan a ie a A 106 e Peres ee ee ee A 108 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY circa irrt HEAR EO rE CoN des AAA 111 ee RES OUT Ss aeee EENEI EEES ARA 113 e OF SERVICE 2 et Bree Sep eade ee 4 Oeste be cbs be bee EE RRA EENEN 114 CODE Ret aca oil ds ps eee 117 CONFERENCE THREEFOUR PARTY ccccicccawegeestaccebiesss darle 118 CONFERENCE tS TEN PART Uji cosa carr rra AE A es 120 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING 4 123 CONSULTATION HOODIA 124 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT nnana cterteeesceeeerbbceeedbtasbaws 126 DATALINE SECURITY e ssr at hee A ERER RENERE A A 127 DELAYED RINGING cura A a e id os 128 a AAA IA IN ON 129 CARL BY NAME bce bo ise eeeas ee IDEADA ee eee Kaos 130 HAL CONVERSION eee er ee ee ere Arda Arde 135 DIRECT DATA ENTRY ious potest Cesar A eels een A A ceed 136 DIRECT DIGITAL nn 139 DIRECT INWARD DIALING TOMO soci Hees ewee eter ebsdetebalweekses sbi bacnes 141 DID Call Walie cera 142 DE DOL CONE Oer 5 046 08s eer den EERDE PEER REEI EREE TEE ER TER ENE 142 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS
30. DO NOT DISTURB Do Not Disturb System 9 Refer to the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Features and Specifications for more information 10 Refer to Do Not Disturb Features and Specifications for the interactions between DND and system features NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 160 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ELAPSED CALL TIMER ELAPSED CALL TIMER General Description This feature provides a display of the elapsed time while a Multiline Terminal with LCD is connected to any trunk Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions The elapsed time is displayed in the seven upper left hand positions of the LCD display 2 The elapsed time can reach a maximum of 9 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds after which the clock resets to zero 3 When acall is placed on Consultation Hold Exclusive Hold and Nonexclusive Hold the elapsed time dis play will disappear The Elapsed Call Timer will not reset to zero when a call is retrieved from Hold Con sultation Hold Exclusive Hold or Nonexclusive Hold by the same station 4 When a call is transferred or parked the time display of the party receiving the transfer begins at zero 5 The elapsed time is not displayed when the station is in a Conference NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 161 ENHANCED 911 ENH
31. One of the last 3 keys can be used as Day Night key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 3 ADD ON MODULE 13 A DLC Card must be provided when using the Add On Module The Add On Module unit uses one port of the card 14 Up to 25 lines and trunks can be assigned for the Add On Module The delayed ringing function is only available for the first 16 lines and trunks assigned 15 For each 24 button D Series IM and 32 button D Series E there will be one less Add On Module available per FP NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 4 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ALARM INDICATIONS ALARM INDICATIONS General Description Faults are indicated by the Major Minor MJ MN lamps located on the AC DC Power Supply and optionally an external alarm display unit Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The following table shows a standard pattern of the faults that can be detected and their alarm indications If required the following alarm indications MJ MN or no indication can be changed on an individual fault basis Refer to the Maintenance Manual for more information Alarm Indications AC DC Power External Alarm Multiline Terminal PZ PW121 Display Alarm Contents of Alarm MJ MN MJ MN MJ System Initialization Number of stack overflows was more th
32. The maximum number of radio paging answer zones is 9 The maximum number of trunk routes that can be assigned radio paging is 9 SOY eR S If the paged party does not answer within 300 seconds the on premises paging answer capability will be cancelled This timing is programmable up to 900 seconds 15 minutes 8 Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service Assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 227 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS Wide Area Telephone Service WATS Access Wide Area Telephone Service WATS Access General Description This feature allows any station user direct dial access to outgoing WATS lines Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Normal call handling procedures apply Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 One circuit on the COT card is required for each WATS line interface Least Cost Routing and Code Restriction can be applied to WATS lines The maximum capacity of all lines including WATS Lines cannot exceed 256 lines Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 228 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION General Description A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function similar to an Attendant position This Att
33. To set Do Not Disturb System from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 Press the DD key 2 Press the GROUP key 3 Press the SET key 4 Press the RLS key To cancel Do Not Disturb System from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 Press the DD key 2 Press the GROUP key 3 Press the RESET key 4 Press the RLS key Service Conditions Stations are assigned to the Do Not Disturb DND Group in Class of Service Calls to extensions whose stations are in Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner AS Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is possible from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument and At tendant Consoles M The ability to set DND is both on a per station basis and a per system for DND group basis 6 Only Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments and Attendant Consoles have the ability to place a group of sta tions in Do Not Disturb There is only one group available and the stations within the group are pro grammed in system data There is no limitation on the number of stations in the group A station included in a DND group retains the ability to place that particular station in DND When the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument places a group in DND an individual station within the group can cancel the DND setting to that station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 159
34. a single hookflash will return to the first trunk If an originating Multiline Terminal user encounters a busy or no answer condition after dialing to confer ence a third party the Recall key can be used to return to feature dial tone to allow making another call or to allow pressing the Transfer key to return to the original party Stations and Attendants can establish a Trunk to Trunk Connection either before or after the distant station answers There is no limitation on the number of Trunk to Trunk Connections in the system Trunk to Trunk Connection can be restricted by Trunk route to Trunk route restriction assignments Recalls will apply to a Trunk to Trunk Connection except where answer supervision is provided i e second trunk is a tie line Pressing the Answer key after the second call is established allows the station user to return to the original line resulting in a Broker s Call Stations cannot re enter a Trunk to Trunk Connection once they have established the connection After a Trunk to Trunk Connection is established both trunks are released when a disconnect signal is re ceived by either trunk If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available The AMP trunk can be connected to tandem connection on trunk route basis in system data programming a maximum of 16 ports per FP 64 ports per system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue
35. call Split Call Forwarding No Answer allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Ter mination DIT Tie Line Transfer and internal calls which encounter a no answer condition to be forward ed to a predetermined location Attendant Console another station or voice mail equipment Split Call Forwarding Busy Line and Split Call Forwarding No Answer must be set to the same desti nation to result in Split Call Forwarding Busy Line No Answer Call Forwarding Override General Description This feature allows the call forward destination station to call the station which set call forward The call forward setting will be ignored Station Application All stations NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 91 CALL FORWARDING Group Diversion Operating Procedure Normal call handling procedures apply Service Conditions This feature is allowed to all stations and the Attendant Console Group Diversion General Description This feature allows all calls terminated to an extension that are not answered within a predetermined time to be forwarded to a predesignated station Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The system provides three methods of Call Forwarding No Answer Set Cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Individual Call Forwarding
36. the parked party will hear ringback tone If the trunk which was placed in Call Park is assigned to any Multiline Terminal as a Trunk Direct Appear ance system programming determines whether or not the Multiline Terminal can retrieve the parked call by pressing the Trunk key Trunk key LED indication is as follows e Possible to retrieve Flashing as Green Red hold e Impossible to retrieve Steady as Red busy When attempting to set Call Park Tenant to a busy Call Park Tenant location Step Call can be used to ac cess an idle location A call cannot be retrieved from feature dial tone If a station other than the station that originally parked the call retrieves the call Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will record a Transfer Parked calls can receive Music On Hold 10 A Call Park Tenant location key 1 8 can be assigned to a Multiline Terminal Page 96 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL PICKUP Call Pickup Direct CALL PICKUP General Description This feature enables a station user to answer any call directed to another station to a station within their own Call Pickup Group or to a station within a different Call Pickup Group Three Call Pickup methods are avail able Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group and Call Pickup Designated Group Call Pickup Direct General Description This method permits a station user to pickup a call to a
37. there may be a decrease in transmission decibel levels 2 When using a 4 wire application an ODT card is required for every Tie Line This card provides attenuation so that the desired transmitting and receiving levels can be maintained providing the overall tandem system with transparency 3 When all Tie Lines are busy the calling station will receive busy tone Incoming trunks may be restricted from outgoing access to other trunks on a trunk route basis 5 Consideration should be given to access code numbering plans to avoid unnecessary loss of access codes and code duplication within the same system 6 There is no limitation on the allowable number of Tie Line Tandem Switching connections 7 Incoming dial repeating Tie Lines can connect to the following types of outgoing trunks e Dial repeating tie lines e C O trunks e FX trunks e WATS trunks e CCSA trunks 8 All trunk routes assigned for no release signal are restricted from tandem connections The Station Message Detail Recording feature applies to incoming Tie Line calls which dial access an out going trunk NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 306 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TIMED QUEUE TIMED QUEUE General Description When a user originates an outgoing trunk call and the called party is busy or does not answer the caller can set the Timed Queue feature When this feature is set the trunk seizure is repeated and the number is r
38. this feature allows the loop of the line circuit concerned to open for a programmable interval and send a release signal to the peripheral equipment when the calling party disconnects Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The duration of the momentary open is flexible and can be programmed from 200 ms to 1000 ms in system programming 2 When the calling party releases the connection a release signal loop open is sent to the peripheral equip ment 3 The calling party can be internal or external A 4LC 8LC card must be installed to provide this feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 301 SYSTEM SPEED DIALING SYSTEM SPEED DIALING General Description This feature provides all users the ability to dial frequently called numbers using an abbreviated call code Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From Multiline Terminals 1 2 3 4 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive extension dial tone Press the System Speed Dialing access feature key one touch key or dial the System Speed Dialing feature access code Dial the abbreviated call code 2 or 3 digits Converse when the party answers From Single Line Telephones 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the System Speed Dialing feature access code Dial th
39. 0 PRIVACY Direct Privacy Release PRIVACY General Description This feature restricts Multiline Terminal users from pressing a busy line button and entering a conversation un less permitted by the Multiline Terminal user currently on that line button or if the line button is assigned for Direct Privacy Release Direct Privacy Release General Description This feature allows a station user with a secondary appearance of another extension in the system to access that extension when it is being used by someone else This feature allows for a simplified method for establishing a conference In addition this feature can be used to emulate PC dialing where a single line extension connected to a PC can appear on a Multiline Terminal and be accessed by the Multiline Terminal user after the PC is com pleted dialing Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Accessing an extension already in use lit steady red by someone else 1 Press the line button associated with the extension to be accessed The associated line button changes to green and the display shows a conference in progress left side of display CONF 2 Inform parties of your presence and converse PC Dialing With desired communication program loaded and ready within the PC 1 Initiate the dialing sequence in the communication program Modem dials out on associated single line ex tension 2 After modem has completed dialing press the li
40. 1 When all stations in a hunt group are busy a method of rerouting the incoming calls to a back up Station Hunting Secretarial hunt group exists For a Terminal Hunt group the pilot number is assigned an extension number of a station within the back up Station Hunting Secretarial group For a Station Hunting Circular group each station because each station can be considered a pilot station is assigned an extension number of a station within the back up Station Hunting Secretarial group When all stations in the Terminal or Cir cular Hunt are found busy the system will reroute incoming calls to that station in the Station Hunting Sec retarial group and station hunting will continue The Station Hunting Secretarial hunt group can be a Circular or Terminal Hunt group 3 A maximum of 31 extensions can be members of the Station Hunting Secretarial group NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 293 STATION HUNTING Station Hunting Secretarial 4 Any number of stations in Station Hunting Terminal groups and Station Hunting Circular groups can have their calls rerouted to a station within the Station Hunting Secretarial group In practice it is best for the pilot number of Station Hunting Terminal groups and every member of Station Hunting Circular groups to be assigned an entry extension into the Station Hunting Secretarial group All Station Hunting Terminal and Statio
41. 1 0 Page 315 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD General Description The Uniform Call Distribution UCD feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of sta tions Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time Stations may log on log off from the UCD group Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents Station Application Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Operating Procedure Refer to individual UCD sub features for details on station operating procedures Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 16 UCD groups may be assigned per system Each UCD group is assigned a pilot number Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that UCD group Up to 60 stations may be programmed per UCD group and up to 512 stations or 256 Multiline Terminals can be used per system if expansion memory is used in MP up to 512 Multiline Terminals can be used Assignment of UCD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Cus tomer Administration Terminal CAT UCD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations Hunting is initiated in a circular fashion and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time If all stations within the UCD group are busy incoming calls may be serviced in the following wa
42. 1 be dialed prior to the desired number or that the area code be deleted 3 The maximum capacity of all trunk including FX lines cannot exceed 256 lines Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment 5 FX lines can be assigned as Direct In Terminations Radio Paging Equipment Access General Description This feature provides station users dial access to Radio Paging Equipment and to selectively tone or voice tone alert individuals carrying pocket paging devices The paged party when on premises can be connected to the paging party by going to the nearest station and dialing an answer back code Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To page 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Radio Paging Answer Code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the number of the paged radio and receive ring back tone 4 The on premises paged party answers The two parties can converse Service Conditions 1 Radio Paging Equipment must be locally provided Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for the fol lowing specifications e type of tones e capability of receiving individual radio number e maximum number of users that can be assigned individual radio access numbers A maximum of three digits can be assigned as Radio Paging Equipment Access and answer codes Individual radio numbers can be a maximum of 4 digits The Attendant Console can originate a radio paging call
43. 184 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HOTEL MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE To cancel 1 Dial the desired extension 2 Press the Automatic Wake Up function key 3 Press the RESET key Service Conditions 1 A dedicated function key on the console must be assigned for each desired feature Room Cutoff Automatic Wakeup etc 2 The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual stations One group is available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed on a per station basis in system data 3 An Application Processor AP00 is required to provide Station Message Detail Recording Message Reg istration Room Cutoff Group and Do Not Disturb Group 4 Pressing the DDOVR key when calling a station that has DND set will override the DND setting NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 185 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT General Description A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument This can be used to set and cancel standard H M features such as Message Waiting Do Not Disturb Automatic Wake Up and Room Cutoff Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure Normal call processing procedures apply except for the following e When calling a station that has set Do Not Disturb DND pressing th
44. 2 Dial CCSA feature access code and receive second dial tone from CCSA switch 3 Dial desired telephone number 4 Converse when called party answers To answer an incoming CCSA call With Attendant assistance 1 DID lamp flashes and audible indication is received 2 Attendant presses either the DID or ANSWER key 3 Attendant extends call to desired station Without Attendant assistance Lift handset and converse NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 224 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS Code Calling Equipment Access Service Conditions 1 An access code needs to be assigned for CCSA Access 2 4 Wire Tie Line circuits ODT board must be provided for the interface with CCSA network 3 The maximum number of ODT boards are 32 PIM 4 Immediate second dial tone wink start or delay dial operation is available by system data on a trunk route basis 5 When the called station is busy busy tone is returned to the calling party Code Calling Equipment Access General Description Code Calling Equipment consists of external paging units and external dialers requiring dial access from the system Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To access Code Calling Equipment 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Code Calling feature access code 3 Dial the code number for the Code Calling unit desired Service Conditions Code Ca
45. 4 Restore the handset To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call from a Single Line Telephone 1 Dial 8 or press the hookswitch and dial 8 for PB telephone and Voice Call receive service set tone for 3 seconds 2 Record the message 3 Restore the handset To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call from a Multiline Terminal 1 Dial 8 or press the function key of the Multiline Terminal receive service set tone for 3 seconds 0 00 03 PLS WAIT 1 34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999 2 Record the message 0 00 00 CARD XXxX 1 34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999 3 Message Waiting lamp is lit on the called station X the number of messages MESSAGE __X 1 34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 221 MESSAGE WAITING 4 Restore the handset REC COMPLETE XXX 1 34 PM FRI 12 APR 1999 XXX Card No To set while receiving ringback tone or busy tone or performing voice call 1 2 from the Attendant Console Dial 8 receive service set tone for 3 seconds Press the RELEASE key or CANCEL key To retrieve a message from a Single Line Telephone 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Message Waiting Individual retrieve access code Listen to the message Restore the handset To retrieve a message from a Multiline Termin
46. 78 A SPACE E 4 When the desired letter is displayed pressing the Transfer key will change the letter to a lower case letter default is upper case Press the Hold key to enter that letter and advance to the next entry 5 Repeat the previous two steps until the desired name is displayed and entered A maximum of eight letters can be entered 6 Press the Speaker key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 7 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of stations that can be provided with a user s name display is 512 The maximum number of characters per name is 16 including spaces The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT can be used to register or change a name A Multiline Termi nal can register or change the name assignment of that individual Multiline Terminal User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD display using the MAT or CAT The trunk route name display is provided on a trunk route basis The maximum amount of characters in the trunk name display is four The maximum number of trunk routes assignable is 63 Only the MAT or CAT can be used to register or change a trunk name display The clock calendar displays the system clock and calendar on the bottom line of the LCD display and is set using the MAT CAT or SN610 ATTCON
47. 9 1019 0009 0010 La i g 1090 1 1091 9 1099 ID Code Development No 01 09 Forced Account Codes and DISA Codes will be registered in the same way as above Limitations The maximum number of ID Code Development Tables in the system Without expansion memory 1024 With expansion memory 3072 The maximum number of ID Pattern Tables in the system Without expansion memory 1000 With expansion memory 3000 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 344 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0
48. ACD group to immediately overflow to another ACD group upon en countering an all agents busy condition Station Application All ACD Pilot Stations Operating Procedure Refer to the Call Forwarding Busy feature and specification for details on setting the forwarding when busy condition Service Conditions 1 This feature uses the Call Forwarding Busy feature set on the ACD pilot extension to immediately for ward the call to another ACD group upon encountering an all busy condition in the first group The overflow destination must be an ACD pilot number 3 When a call has terminated to ACD group A and all station in group A are busy and group B is assigned as the overflow destination using Call Forward Busy the call is transferred to group B When all the stations are busy in group B the call queues onto ACD group B 4 One overflow group can be provided for each ACD group 5 Overflow is performed only once NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 53 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Priority Queuing ACD Priority Queuing ACD General Description This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis when the call enters an ACD queue When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure No manual ope
49. ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT 0000 00 eee eee eee 210 MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MIG once ieee etka tees Sebeeeteuser eet ie RE 211 MESSAGE PESISTRATIO No akcddeneures Veda doenes AAA AAA 214 MESSAGE PENUINDE sir ida idad 215 MESSAGE WAITING aa DEAR ACA RA 218 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS orion reirte isis 224 A A A eee E EAA E E T EE 224 Code Calling Equipment ACCESS vcc rr errcaraer e A Beet eee 225 Dictation EGU INE AA 225 Foreign Exchange FAX ACCOSS crrisscrerperrerk db iaa 226 Radio Paging Equipment ACCESS cir escri RIA ARANA 227 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page iv NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Wide Area Telephone Service WATS ACCESS 000 cece tees 228 MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION 2262 0esssavdensd desea rra AA 229 e a ceckecrse hace eee beets ake eke bere eee te eek eebeeotienssens 231 NAILED DOWN CONNECTION DATA oc vcese sd eibbde tee eapedengesedes tagceeineeee 232 AS 233 ANA Night CI rior id AAA ARA RASO er ee ee 233 CARS DINO prp EUA ADAN IIA ARANA AAA 234 Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console 0000 cece eee eee 235 Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing 0 0 00 eee 235 ls e as AAA Sn Sean Er eee ceed eeeee salts 236 Night Connection Flexible A A lessee aoees teecers 237 Trunk Answer Any Station TAS 652620060600 ditaeseoe ase Satede oredr Sancrenywon ee 238 OFF ROOK ALARN ee re eer ne re ree ee re rere RRA 2
50. ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT General Description The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT is a personal computer that provides an interface to the PBX via the system CPU card The MAT PC must have the MATWorX Studio program properly installed to com municate with the PBX MATWorX Studio is required for system software registration and activation MATWorxX Studio is a Graphical User Interface GUD program that provides an efficient method to manipulate the PBX database This program contains extensive help files Usage Wizards and Tool Tips with hyperlinks imbedded in the text The hyperlinks provide quick access to the appropriate Add In modules Add In modules provide a user friendly intuitive method to customize the PBX database Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure Refer to the MATWorX Studio User Guide NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 210 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MCI MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MCI General Description This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System VMS which can send Message Waiting lamp control data to the system The Message Center Interface MCI can provide the following operations 1 When terminating the call to the VMS the system sends call connection status information to the VMS through the MCI The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp
51. All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To activate Privacy Release with a call in progress 1 2 3 4 Press the Conf key The Conf LED flashes Another station with the same line appearance presses that line button Privacy on that line is released and a three party Conference is in progress Repeat above procedure to establish a four party Conference if desired Service Conditions 1 When a line is busy and Manual Privacy Release has not been activated on that line any attempt to access that line will result in busy tone Manual Privacy Release is available for Multiline Terminals connected to any extension line key When a Multiline Terminal user presses the Conf key Privacy on the active line is released If the Conf key is pressed again or another party enters the connection Privacy is reestablished After a third party enters the conversation the Conf key can be pressed again Privacy is released and a fourth party is allowed to join the conversation by the same operating procedure Manual Privacy Release is activated only on a connection during which the Conf key is pressed Once the station releases the connection Manual Privacy Release is canceled and Privacy is restored The primary extension of the station entering the conversation is accessed when that station enters the con versation For this reason the primary extension must be idle at the entering station for this feature to work NEAX2000 I
52. B Called Party Station C Destination of Call Transfer from Station B Station C does not set Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line or Call Forwarding No An swer to the VMS Station A or outside party calls Station B Station B presses Transfer key and dials Station C a Station C is busy Station B hears Busy Tone BUSY appears in display and then presses VM transfer button or dials 9 e Station A or outside party hears Music on Hold source e Station B hears ROT and does not see CF BUSY in display as if it would if a VM port were avail able Station B must press Transfer key to return to Calling Party b Station C is idle Station B hears Ringback Tone and presses VM transfer button or dials 9 e Station A or outside party hears Music on Hold until Station B goes on hook When Station B goes on hook Station A or outside party hears Ringback Tone e Station B does not see CF NANS in display as if it would if a VM port were available but Station B sees Station C number in display instead If Station B goes on hook the call from Station A or outside party is transferred to Station C and continues to ring at Station C until Station Transfer Recall occurs The call will return to Station B If all ports in the VMS UCD group are busy assuming the following conditions Station A or outside party Calling Party Attendant Console Called Party Station C Destination of Call Transfer fro
53. Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 121 CONFERENCE SIX TEN PARTY 6 The maximum number of C O line tie lines that can be connected in a Conference is e Up to five C O line tie lines for a 6 party Conference e Upto nine C O line tie lines for a 10 party Conference Call charges for C O lines are charged to the leader in SMDR 8 Ten ports are required per CFT trunk The CFT time out until the first participant is connected into the CFT trunk after seizing the CFT trunk is fixed at 1 minute 10 Amplification is provided for Conferences 11 When a conference using the access code and a conference using the feature key are held simultaneously in a system the LED of the Conference feature key is not controlled 12 A Multiline Terminal user can not use both 6 party and 10 party Conference feature keys simultaneously 13 The LED indication of Conference feature key is as follows LED indication STATUS OFF CFT trunk is not used Flash Red 60 IPM CFT trunk is used The leader is not attending by Hold key Steady Red CFT trunk is used The leader is not attending by going on hook Steady Green Conference is established 14 A participant can replace a conference leader by pressing the Conference feature key of their Multiline Ter minal If the kind of Conference key 6 party or 10 party is different from that of the leader replace is not allowed Call charges for C O lines are charg
54. Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 5 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 6 7 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 7 8 Target station for Call Forwarding Busy Line 9 Station Speed Dialing The LCD displays SET XXXX or SET OPR Target Station Operator The LED of the associated feature button lights 4 Restore the handset or press the Speaker key To cancel Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key and receive special dial tone Press the key and receive service set tone The LCD displays CANCEL and the associated LED goes off 3 Restore the handset or press the Speaker key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 88 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding No Answer From a Single Line Telephone and Multiline Terminal without Split Call Forwarding Busy Line feature key To set Split Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone Number Destination Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 0 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 1 Target st
55. Call Park System for more than a preprogrammed time interval will recall to the primary extension of the station which originally parked the call Once this recall has started the Call Park System location becomes idle When Call Park System recalls the parked party hears ringback tone If the trunk which was placed in Call Park is assigned to any Multiline Terminal as a direct trunk appearance the system can be programmed on a per system basis whether or not the Multiline Terminal can retrieve the parked call by pressing the Trunk key Trunk key LED indication is as follows e Possible to retrieve flashing Green Red hold e Impossible to retrieve steady Red busy When a Call Park System recalls to a station any other station can pick it up using Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group or Call Pickup Designated Group When attempting to set Call Park System to a busy Call Park System location Step Call can be used to ac cess an idle location Page 94 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL PARK Call Park Tenant 8 A call can be retrieved from Call Park System while receiving feature dial tone If a station other than the station that originally parked the call retrieves the call Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will record a transfer 10 Parked calls receive Music On Hold if provided 11 When a Call Park System recalls to an Attendant Console no LED indicat
56. Conditions 1 An extension must be set as a Prime Line 2 This feature is not available when the prime line is busy Handsfree Unit General Description The built in Handsfree Unit enables full Handsfree operation for both internal and external calls No optional Handsfree Unit is required Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 1 Press the Feature key followed by 1 to turn on the microphone MIC LED is lit 2 Press the Speaker key and the associated LED lights 3 Dial the desired number 4 When the called party answers converse Handsfree NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 256 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL I Hold I Use Indication Service Conditions 1 The MIC LED must be lit to transmit during Handsfree operation When the microphone is off the outside party cannot hear the Multiline Terminal user s conversation 2 Clipping of voice transmission or reception may occur if the microphone is covered or the ambient noise level in the area is too loud I Hold l Use Indication General Description Multiline Terminals provide indication of which line keys have been placed on Hold or are in use by that Mul tiline Terminal The LED associated with the line key will give the appropriate indication Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Mul
57. DISA soncisarsrrciania arrendar A 143 DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION DIT cierre rr rre rre teas 145 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING TOC social 146 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE 148 Busy Qut Siats COGS 65425 i hea hoes DES ie HSER AAA AA IAN 149 Do Mot Disturb COS suds s 6654 600 6SU di ee EWENE ARA AA A 150 Message Waiting CONO rr EA AAA AAA 150 A e AAA hee ee ean EER EERE ees E E E ER 151 Wake Up N a A A 152 DISTINCTIVE RINGING copoccin ide ra e 153 DO NOT DO TURG uvas sai RAT AAA AAA AN RO 155 Do Not DIST ARISTA si a RARA AAA AAA AO SEEM 157 Do Not Distr SOL doc cae rarte erret eh oh AAA EE 159 ELAP SEQ CALL TIMER 5032 eai ingka ira t i bid idos ero id ce edi ico is 161 ENHANCED AR ereen EREE Re AERE RITR E REE RRS 162 EXECUTNE CALLING 1 dara ena oo ae A hes A A 163 EXECUTIVE VERDES 02d besa herded VAIO AAA PIR EEEE AAA SD RT URETS 164 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET ME sucia rca cra rai 166 As A 168 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Page FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION 0000 0 cece eee eee 169 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT smc peu eae Sk vee A oad ANEN I 170 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN gc cteet ete et eee t Re A eke ds 171 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT rtorras eee tawceus 172 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE test serca tte ini 173 e A aa ee ee eee a ee a ee ee ee 174 Automatic Conference 6 10 Party sisi nnna seine
58. Delay operation requires that the station hang up When an Attendant attempts to set up a Trunk to Trunk Connection between trunks that do not provide an swer supervision the connection is denied and the RELEASE key has no effect The Attendant can dial the called number for the station user or using the passing dial tone method allow the station user to dial When Least Cost Routing LCR is programmed the Attendant cannot pass dial tone The call must be com pleted using delay or non delay operation The Attendant cannot pass dial tone to a station whose route restriction class prevents the station from re ceiving incoming calls on the trunk route selected NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 17 ATTENDANT CAMP ON ATTENDANT CAMP ON General Description This feature permits the Attendant to hold an incoming call in a special mode when the desired station for the transfer is busy The Attendant sends a Camp On tone to the busy station When that station becomes idle it is automatically alerted and connected to the waiting party Station Application Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure To activate a Camp On from the Attendant Console 1 Dial the desired station and receive busy tone 2 Press the RELEASE key 3 Camp On tone is sent to the station and Camp On is set To cancel a Camp On from the Attendant Console 1 Press the LOOP key corresponding to held
59. Dial Pulse Single Line Telephone 1 2 5 Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone Dial 2 and receive service set tone if single digit feature access codes are enabled OR Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone Dial the Call Back feature access code if busy tone dial 2 if ringback tone if single feature access codes are enabled and receive service set tone Restore the handset When the busy station becomes idle or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac cesses a feature and then becomes idle the station that set the Call Back will ring Upon the originator answering the originally called station will ring To set Call Back from a DTMF Telephone 1 2 5 Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone Dial 2 and receive service set tone if single digit access feature access codes are enabled for busy tone only OR Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone Dial the Call Back feature access code if busy tone dial 2 if ringback tone and receive service set tone Restore the handset When the busy station becomes idle or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac cesses a feature and then becomes idle the station that set the Call Back will ring Upon answering the originally called s
60. Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone Service Conditions There is no limit to the number of stations that can set Call Forwarding All Calls at one time 2 Extensions can be allowed or disallowed this feature by Class of Service in system programming A separate Class of Service Assignment controls access to Call Forwarding All Calls to outside numbers 3 When Call Forwarding All Calls is rerouted to another destination one burst of ringing is sent to the for warded station to indicate that it is call forwarded Single Line Telephone only 4 When a call is forwarded to a Multiline Terminal with LCD the display shows the initially called station s number as well as the calling station s number 5 Call Forwarding All Calls assignments are retained in system memory when the system is re initialized or when there is a power failure NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 75 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding All Calls 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 A maximum of 26 digits without access code can be stored for Call Forwarding All Calls to an outside number Call Forwarding All Calls to an outside number can be routed by the Least Cost Routing feature and re stricted by the Code Restriction feature More than one Call Forward can occur in the progress of a call Se
61. Group Busy LED on a function key 2 This feature may be used on trunk groups consisting of either DDD DID WATS TIE FX or special trunks 3 Besides Trunk Group Busy LEDs on the Attendant Console Trunk Group Busy status can be displayed on the following LEDs a Function key LEDs on Multiline Terminals b External LEDs PN DKO0 card or built in DKOO in MP card must be installed 4 A total of 62 Trunk Group Busy LEDs are available for Attendant Consoles Multiline Terminals or External LEDs NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 40 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant General Description This feature allows an Attendant to transfer an incoming or outgoing call on one trunk to an outgoing trunk and exit the connection before the called party answers Operating Procedure An incoming call is received and answered in the normal manner The trunk number is displayed 2 The Attendant dials the access code of the outgoing route then the destination number The dialed digits are displayed 3 If the feature is allowed the display will change to show the selected outgoing trunk number The call is extended by operation of the RELEASE key The Attendant Console will be recalled On an swer the Attendant will be connected to the original trunk party If the call is answered the trunk to tr
62. MCI can control the LCD display of a Multiline Terminal for MESSAGE Indication The number of messages is not displayed When the Message Waiting lamp control is activated with the MCI the lamp control from the following equipment will not be provided e From the Property Management System PMS e From the station by dialing the access code e From the Direct Station Selection DSS Console e From the Hotel Motel Attendant Console From the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument e From the Attendant Console Only one system should be programmed via system programming to control Message Waiting lamps through the CCIS network The system controls Message Waiting lamps normally when the time interval between messages is a mini mum of 350 msec or more When the VMS interface line does not answer all of the messages are sent out from the I O port of the APOO If the VMS is not ready for information receiving Busy Status the APOO can temporarily store up to 16 call records in its internal memory If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is generated the system will write over the oldest stored record NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 212 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MCI 13 The Voice Mail Integration Inband feature cannot be combined with voice mail through the MCI in the system Either the Voice Mail Integration Inband feature or MCI feature must be sel
63. Message Reminder notification A Digital Announcement Trunk DAT circuit is required for each announcement 3 When a station user goes off hook and feature status requires both announcements the Message Wait an nouncement will be heard NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 329 VOICE GUIDE 4 This service is effective on the system wide basis 5 A station can originate a call while receiving the announcement NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 330 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION General Description This feature is used to interface the system with a locally provided stand alone type Voice Mail System VMS The VMS connected to the system single line circuit LC is controlled by sending receiving DTMF signals using this LC The system can provide the other two types of genuine VMS The NEAXmail AD 16 is a stand alone type VMS and is connected via a Digital Line Circuit DLC The NEAXMail AD 8 is a circuit card type VMS and is di rectly accommodated into the Port Interface Module PIM with no interface card The VMS s voice mail feature can be used by accessing this VMS directly from an extension If a station sets its call forwarding destination to the VMS calls to this station are connected to the VMS and the messages can be registered according to the VMS instruction In addition the Messa
64. Multiline Terminal receiving a call indicating the station num ber or trunk number of the incoming call Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure No manual operation is required NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 255 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Dynamic Dial Pad Service Conditions 1 When a call terminates to a line other than the station s Prime Line the Calling Name and Number Display will be indicated only after the ringing line key is pressed or the call is answered For trunk calls the LCD displays the trunk route name and trunk number For internal incoming calls on the Prime Line the LCD displays the extension number and caller s name For Direct Inward Termination DIT the LCD displays DIT the trunk route name and trunk number 2 When an incoming call terminates to the Prime Line the station number and name will be displayed when the call begins ringing 3 Refer to the Alphanumeric Display and Elapsed Call Timer features for additional information Dynamic Dial Pad General Description This feature allows to make an outgoing call at first hand by pressing a ten key of Multiline Terminal without pressing a Speaker key or going off hook Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Dial the desired station number by pressing a ten key without pressing a Speaker key or going off hook Service
65. No Answer System Group Basis Individual Station Basis From STA ATT Tenant Basis From MAT CAT Group Diversion From MAT CAT Applicable for STA call TRK call ATT call TRK call DID TIE only STA call TRK call DID DIT TIE Line ATT call ATT Transfer Recalls Priority 1 3 2 The maximum number of Group Diversion groups per system is 31 3 The number of stations that can be included in the same group is unlimited 4 The Group Diversion group has no relation with Call Pick Up Group Station Hunting Group or any other group 5 No Answer timing for Group Diversion is the same timing as for Call Forwarding No Answer 6 The destination of this service must be assigned for each group separately 7 An Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the destination of this feature 8 Incoming direct trunk appearances will not follow Group Diversion programming Page 92 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL PARK Call Park System CALL PARK General Description This feature enables a station user or attendant to place a call into predesignated Call Park locations The station user or attendant is then free to process other calls This feature is available system wide and for individual ten ants Call Park System General Description When a call is parked by Call Park System the call can be retrieved from Call P
66. On service cannot be set to a data line If a station is busy and already has a Camp On set to it the station user must finish their call receive ringing and then answer the first Camp On call prior to receiving Camp On tone for the incoming DIT call Page 58 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION ANI AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION ANI General Description This feature receives the calling subscriber s number automatically sent from T1 network using MF signaling and displays the calling number on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an Attendant Console Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber s number for ANI can be displayed on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal or the Attendant Console Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber s number can be recorded in the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR by system programming Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber s number can be sent out to the OAI computer by system program ming ANI information can not be transmitted to a tie line or a C O line through tandem connection The 4RSTB card is required for the MF receiver of ANI information Two signaling formats are supported for ANI ANI format and Feature Group D most common
67. QUANTITY 1 A NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 137 DIRECT DATA ENTRY In Printout Format 2 even if the data corresponding QUANTITY is not entered the system does not recognize that the data entry is an error no reorder tone is received C Example Input data 1 2 3 Printout format 1 Printout format 2 1995 04 10 17 20 MON 1995 04 10 17 20 MON NO 220 NO 220 CODE1 1 CODE1 1 CODE2 2 QUANTITY 2 CODE3 3 CODE2 3 T l A NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 138 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE General Description This service feature provides the capability to connect trunks from the NEAX2000 Ivs directly to T1 carrier links using either a private or public network DS 1 signal level PCM transmission line 24 channel Digital PABX OFFICE OFFICE REP REP REP REP Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Each Office Hierarchy is defined as follows a Source office One center will operate as the Source Office This location has two highly stabilized source oscillators and distributes the Source Clock to all the systems through the Digital Interface lines b Sub Source office This office operates using a Phase Lock Oscillator PLO to synchronize with the
68. Reminder feature access key and key Receive service set tone Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 2 The time is entered on a 24 hour basis in 1 minute increments A maximum of 32 stations can set the same reminder time When the number of settings exceeds 32 the excess stations will automatically be set to 5 minutes prior to the time set at the other 32 stations Timed Reminder attempts whether successful or not can be printed out at a locally provided printer When a Timed Reminder is set or canceled a printout is provided The ringing signal is the same as Station to Station calls and its time can be assigned from 4 sec to 32 sec programmable on a system basis The default is 28 32 seconds The Timed Reminder will ring a station in Do Not Disturb When setting or canceling has been completed service set tone is heard as confirmation When a Timed Reminder is answered either music or announcement is provided to the station Either a DAT circuits of MP card or 2DAT 4DAT card as an internal announcement source or COT card with locally provided music or announcement source is required As an option a PN DKO0 or built in DKOO in MP can be programmed to provide a contact closure for starting the external announcement or music source when used in conjunction with a COT card When providing the internal announcement via DAT card multiple connections can be made to the an nouncement card Secondary station users ca
69. Selection of format is system wide one format per system Feature group D format and ANI format are described below Signal Pattern Called Number AN FGD Format MF signal MF signal ANI Format DP signal MF signal If using DNIS on the Attendant Console some of the characters of the displayed name will be cut off de pending on the number of digits of ANI NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 59 AUTOMATIC RECALL AUTOMATIC RECALL General Description This feature works as a timed reminder When a call remains on Hold Camp On or ringing unanswered for a fixed interval after being transferred the station that initiated the hold transfer or Camp On is automatically alerted Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Automatic Recall timing is flexible in system programming Automatic Recall timing is as follows a All stations Nonexclusive Hold 4 to 396 seconds Default 60 64 seconds Exclusive Hold 4 to 396 seconds Default 236 240 seconds e Transfer Recall 4 to 120 seconds Default 24 28 seconds e Camp On Recall 8 to 128 seconds Default 24 32 seconds b Attendant Consoles e Attendant Recall Camp On No Answer 2 4 to 124 8 seconds Default 31 2 33 6 seconds e Attendant Held calls 2 4 to 124 8 seconds Default 31 2 33 6 seconds When a Multiline Term
70. Stations may be allowed or denied this feature in Class of Service programming in station data A maximum of 128 stations per system may simultaneously use this feature When a station has a Camp On call providing a hookflash and dialing the Call Hold feature access code results in the station immediately connecting to the Camped On party Dual Hold General Description This feature permits a station user who is placed on Hold by another station to place that station on Hold also Station Application All Multiline Terminals NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 181 HOLD Exclusive Hold Operating Procedure Internal party connection from a Multiline Terminal 1 Station A presses the Hold key and Station B is placed on hold 2 Station B presses the Hold key and Station A is placed on hold 3 Dual Hold is now in progress Service Conditions 1 The party who placed the other party on Hold first will not receive a recall until the other party releases the Dual Hold 2 This feature is available for extension calls including Intercom calls 3 When two Multiline Terminals activate this feature the recall timer begins when second station goes on Hold the first hold is no longer timed When the timer expires the second station is recalled and upon answering initiates a recall to the first station 4 An Intercom Voice Call with Hands free Answerback cannot be placed on
71. The ringing pattern for incoming internal calls is programmable on a system basis The ringing pattern for incoming external calls is programmable on per trunk route basis The ringing pattern of recalls to Single Line Telephones is the same pattern as that of the original call The distinctive lamp indication is applicable only for Multiline Terminals during call termination including a recall NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 153 DISTINCTIVE RINGING 11 The lamp indication patterns are as follows e Incoming internal calls Red 120 ipm flashing e Incoming external calls Green or Red 120 ipm flashing The lamp color for incoming external calls can be selected to be green or red 12 The lamp color for incoming external calls can be designated on a per trunk route basis 13 The distinctive lamp indication is valid for Direct Inward Termination Automated Attendant Direct Inward Dialing and Tie line incoming call 14 The flashing lamp color depends on system data assigned for Distinctive Ringing CM08 137 and is used to indicate the termination of a transferred external incoming call 15 If the system is installed behind Centrex or the main PBX this feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns to the Multiline Terminal in the system so that the station user can distinguish between internal calls from the main PBX and external incoming calls The C O trunk to the main PBX
72. There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed overwriting with a new name or by inserting a blank space as the first character to delete the programmed name The Attendant Console cannot be assigned a name This feature applies only to Multiline Terminals and Sin gle Line Telephones A call from the Attendant Console will always show OPR on the top line of a Multiline Terminals LCD display Station name assignment data is retained when there is a system reset or a power failure About LCD displays refer to APPENDIX 2 Refer also to the Proprietary Multiline Terminal Features and Specifications for details on Called Station Status Display and Calling Name and Number Display Page 8 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ANALOG PORT ADAPTER ANALOG PORT ADAPTER General Description This feature allows an Analog Port Adapter unit combined with a Multiline Terminal to connect to an analog terminal such as an analog telephone Modem and PC with built in Modem There are two communication modes for the terminal connected via the Analog Port Adapter as shown below 1 Single Port Mode A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal share the same port In this mode the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously 2 Dual Port Mode A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal use different ports In this mode the Multiline Terminal and th
73. Tie Line Transfer and internal calls which encounter a busy condition to be forwarded to a predetermined location Attendant Console another station or voice mail equipment 4 Split Call Forwarding Busy Line and Split Call Forwarding No Answer must be set to the same desti nation to result in Split Call Forwarding Busy Line No Answer Split Call Forwarding No Answer General Description This feature allows internal and external calls to extensions that do not answer to be rerouted to separate des tinations individually NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 89 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding No Answer Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To activate Split Call Forwarding both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required For Call Forwarding settings refer to the description of Call Forwarding No Answer From a Multiline Terminal with LCD To set split Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone 0 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 0 1 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 1 2 Target
74. When multiple Account Codes are entered for the same call only the last code entered will be recorded by SMDR If the system is set to comply with KF Registration this feature only allows an Account Code to be input while the outside line is seized Page 2 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ADD ON MODULE ADD ON MODULE General Description This feature allows the Add On Module to be combined with a Multiline Terminal when there are insufficient line or trunk keys provided at the Multiline Terminal When the Add On Module unit keys are programmed as line trunk keys the additional 25 lines trunks and the existing lines trunks set for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly maximum of 49 lines trunks The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the Add On Module unit Also one of the last 3 keys can be used as a Day Night change key Station Application All Multiline Terminals D Series IM Series E Operating Procedure The operating procedure as an Add On Module is the same as that of the Multiline Terminal If any key on the Add On Module unit is used for station speed dialing the operating procedure is the same as station speed dialing Service Conditions 1 10 11 12 The maximum number of Add On Module units per Firmware Processor FP is 32 The maximum number per system is 32 Only one Add On Module can be con
75. a The system determines the need for code restriction by checking the assignment of code restriction Yes or No and the assignment of a digit code table for the selected trunk route b The system compares the digits dialed with the digit code table assigned to the trunk route If a match is found the system is provided with an assigned code restriction class If no match is found the call is allowed to progress normally c An intersection table is provided in system programming which relates the station s restriction class to the code restriction classes There are 16 code restriction classes and 5 route restriction classes which can be used for code restriction deny allow assignment Once a code restriction class is obtained from the digit code table the intersection table is used by the system to decide whether the call is allowed or denied When a toll call is denied Reorder Tone will be returned to the calling party Toll Denial If desired the calling party can be routed to the Attendant Console ICPT key Toll Diversion Either toll denial or toll diversion is set on a per system basis Six digit code restriction is assigned by using Least Cost Routing LCR pattern tables and programming the system to check the 50 office code tables for allow or deny assignment based on the office code after the area code is matched by the system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 117 CONF
76. a One Touch key assigned for Station Speed Dialing capability Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Multiline Terminals To operate using a One Touch key Press the One Touch key associated with the desired telephone number The speaker automatically turns on and the number is dialed To operate using dial access 1 Press the Redial key The speaker and Speaker LED automatically turns on and feature dial tone is received 2 Dial the abbreviated code assigned to the desired number 3 The number is dialed e To program numbers in memory for One Touch key 1 Press the Conf key and the desired One Touch key Previously stored digits will be displayed on the LCD 2 Dial the desired number The old digits will be erased and the new number is displayed 3 Press the Conf key The LCD will display SET To program numbers in memory for dial access 1 Press the Feature key followed by the Redial key 2 Dial the abbreviated code to be assigned 3 Dial the desired telephone number including a trunk access code 4 Press the Feature key Single Line Telephones To operate 1 Go off hook and dial the Station Speed Dialing feature access code 2 Dial the abbreviated code assigned to the desired number 3 The number is dialed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 297 STATION SPEED DIALING To program numbers in memory 1 2 3 4 G
77. access code 3 Enter the Account Code 4 Dial the desired station number From a Single Line Telephone 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone 2 Enter the Account Code feature access code 3 Enter the Account Code and receive feature dial tone again 4 Return to the original outside line by pressing the FLASH key or momentarily pressing the hookswitch OR Dial a station number to transfer the call NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 1 ACCOUNT CODE Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of digits in an Account Code is 10 when using the NEAX2400 SMDR format oth erwise the maximum is 16 There is no limitation to the number of Account Codes used per system The feature access code for Account Code entry can be one to three digits A station user can enter an Account Code consisting of fewer digits than the maximum length defined and indicate the end of the entry by pressing the key Therefore the key cannot be part of an Account Code Account Code entry can be performed with an outside party on Consultation Hold In this case feature dial tone is received instead of dial tone after entering the Account Code Stations are assigned this feature through Class of Service Account Codes can be output in the SMDR record for calls handled by Trunk Queuing Outgoing during connection to the outside line
78. an Automatic Uniform Call Distribution UCD group If the night station has set Call Forwarding incoming calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the destination station If the night station has set Call Forwarding to the Attendant this setting will be ignored and incoming calls will terminate to the night station Night stations can access Call Hold Call Transfer and Conference provided these features are programmed into its Class of Service Night Connection Flexible General Description This feature provides incoming calls normally terminated to the fixed night station to be Call Forwarded to an other station Station Application All stations except fully restricted stations NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 237 NIGHT SERVICE Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Operating Procedure Before placing the Attendant Console into Night Service the Attendant sets Call Forwarding All Calls from the fixed night station to the desired station Note The Call Forwarding setting should be canceled when the tenant or system is changed back to the day mode Service Conditions 1 The Night Connection Flexible station may be programmed from either the Attendant Console or the Night Connected Fixed station 2 Refer to the Call Forwarding Features and Specifications for more information Trunk Answer Any Station TAS General Description This featur
79. another hunt group it can be determined through system data whether the calling party hunts to the called party s hunt group or the terminating party s hunt group when the for warded to stations are busy If the destination of Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls is the pilot of an Automatic Uniform Call Distri bution ACD UCD group ACD UCD is executed If a member of an ACD UCD group is a member of a Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls sequence that station is skipped in ACD UCD hunting NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 83 CALL FORWARDING Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line General Description This feature permits a call to a busy station to be forwarded multiple times to a predesignated idle station Station Application All stations Operating Procedure The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding All Calls apply Service Conditions 1 2 Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line can not be performed for data calls Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line can route a call up to five times when the called station sets Call For warding Busy Line to a station that is busy that has set Call Forwarding Busy Line and so on If the calling station is set as the forwarded destination of its own call in a multiple call forwarding scheme Call Forwarding Busy Line at that point will not take place
80. answers or the Attendant reenters the switched loop When a station user in a two party connection places the second party on hold the second party is connected to Music On Hold A maximum of ten Music On Hold input sources can be assigned Each Music Source must be assigned to a different tenant NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 231 NAILED DOWN CONNECTION DATA NAILED DOWN CONNECTION DATA General Description This feature provides Data Interface which can transmit the intra office or inter office digital data on fixed path connection The Data Interface equips the V 11 X 21 interface A maximum data transmission speed of 64 Kbps is available Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 This connection is assigned using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Admin istration Terminal CAT in the system data base The fixed connection is set automatically after initialization of the system 3 If power failure occurs the Nailed Down Connection is lost until power is restored and the system has rein itialized 4 For this feature it is necessary to install the Data Port Controller DPC card And when providing the inter office digital data transmission it is necessary to install the Digital Trunk Interface DTD card in addition to the DPC card 5 Refer to associated
81. basis Soft Keys General Description According to the status of the Multiline Terminal function keys Soft Keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD If the status of Multiline Terminal changes the Soft Keys will change automatically Also if the Help key is pressed explanation of indicated Soft Keys are shown on the LCD Station Application Multiline Terminals with Soft Keys D Series E Operating Procedure To use Soft Keys 1 4 Soft Keys are indicated in the LCD according to the status of the Multiline Terminal 2 Press the Scroll Key to scroll the display to show the desired key if there are more than 4 Soft Keys 3 Press a desired key under the indicated 4 Soft Keys on the LCD 4 The service feature of the pressed Soft Key is operated To use the Help key 1 Press the Help key and Soft Key 2 Explanation of the pressed Soft Key is indicated on the LCD 3 Press the Exit key and the explanation is deleted If the Exit key is not pressed for 16 to 20 seconds the explanation is deleted automatically Service Conditions The indication of 4 Soft Keys are shown in the third line and each key is indicated by maximum 6 letters 2 The combination of Soft Keys are maximum 4 patterns per system The pattern can be selected for each sta tion by the system data programming CM12 3 The function of Soft Keys per pattern can be set by system data programming CM9A Maximum 12 statuses can be set as the st
82. clock at the Source Office If the Source Clock fails the Sub Source office can operate using its own backup oscillator c Receiver office This office is arranged so it will have at least two clock routes one for Source and the other for standby Synchronization Clock is derived from incoming PCM bit stream from higher hierarchy offices d Local Receiver office This is the end office in a digital network arrangement This office will not be provided with a backup route for the PLO because this office is the only one influenced in the event of trouble occurrence 2 When a digital network is implemented using the NEAX2000 IVS the NEAX2400 IMX can function as a Source office or Sub Source office while the NEAX2000 IVS functions as a Receiver and or Local Receiv er office 3 Each digital office is equipped with a PLO used for network synchronization Clocks from the Source Os cillator or Digital Interface Package should be connected to inputs on each PLO 4 D3 Channel Banks are not required since the switch can be equipped with a Digital Trunk Interface DTI compatible with DS 1 signal level 5 The DTI provides signalling interface bipolar unipolar conversion frame synchronization insertion ex traction and alarm detection NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 139 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE 6 The DTI can be provided with circuit cards to interface with T1 carrier The DTI bo
83. configured through the use of Tie Lines a Uniform Numbering Plan UNP is employed When UNP is employed a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired party by using a uniform dialing method based on the UNP Station Application All stations Operating Procedure The following describes two applications of the UNP Station Number As shown in Figure 1 all the stations of each PBX connected using Tie Lines are assigned a Station Number of 3 or 4 digits and the location of the PBX can be identified by the first two digits of the Station Number When this numbering plan is employed a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired party using a uniform dialing method Office Code and Station Number When this numbering plan is employed each PBX in the network is assigned a 1 2 or 3 digit Office Code and each station in the PBX is assigned a 2 3 or 4 digit Station Number as shown in Figure 1 Normally when calling another station the calling station dials as follows P XXX XXXX Access Office Station Code Code Number 2nd DT No Tone Xi 0 9 p 0 9 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 323 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA NEAX2000 IVS Main office Public Network NEAX2000 IVS2 Satellite office Y ELE NEAX2000 IVS Tributary office Public Network e 1 2 or 3 di
84. data features for more information on Data Communications NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 232 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 NIGHT SERVICE Attendant Night Transfer NIGHT SERVICE General Description This feature provides a variety of methods for handling incoming calls when the system is in night mode These include Attendant Night Transfer Call Rerouting Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing Night Connection Fixed Night Connection Flexible Trunk Answer Any Station Attendant Night Transfer General Description When the Attendant Console is in Night Service any operator directed calls dial 0 calls are automatically rout ed to a preprogrammed station Priority Calls and Off Hook Alarms which terminate to an Attendant are also routed by this feature Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 The calling party dials 0 That call is automatically forwarded to the preprogrammed station The calling party receives ringback tone Ringing signal is sent to the preprogrammed station The preprogrammed station goes off hook and the answered call can be transferred to another station or outside party Service Conditions 1 This feature may be provided together with Night Connection Fixed or Night Connection Flexible to a pre determined night station The predetermined night station for this featur
85. dial tone Dial a desired station number and receive a busy tone 3 Dial 9 or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS Restore the handset To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from a Multiline Terminal 1 While answering an external call press Transfer key and receive a feature dial tone 2 Dial a desired station number and receive a ringback tone or a busy tone 3 Dial 9 or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS 4 Restore the handset To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from an Attendant 1 While answering an external call dial a desired station number and receive a ringback tone or a busy tone 2 Dial 9 or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS 3 Press the RELEASE key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 335 VOICE MAIL TRANSFER To transfer a Camp on call from an Attendant to a VMS 1 2 3 4 While answering an external call dial a desired station number and receive a busy tone Press the RELEASE key A Camp On tone is sent and Camp On is set If the Camp On call is not answered by predetermined time the call will be automatically transferred to the VMS Press the RELEASE key Service Conditions 1 If all ports in the VMS UCD group are busy assuming the following conditions Station A or outside party Calling Party Station
86. dialed is allowed or denied for a specific trunk route Ser vice area check Digit Addition Pattern Table Up to 256 tables are available for assigning digit addition pattern Up to 32 digits including pauses can be added 5 Assignment of LCR is on an access code basis All trunk access codes can be assigned for LCR Up to 3 different LCR access codes can be assigned per numbering plan providing flexibility in choosing routes by access code When LCR is implemented all stations within the system are subject to the LCR process 6 To provide a group of stations access to trunks that are not subject to LCR the associated trunk routes should be given different access codes not assigned to LCR Other stations can be restricted from access to these trunk routes Direct trunk appearances on Multiline Terminals are not subject to the LCR process 8 Ifthe system is designated as KF registration this feature is not available The following flow charts describe LCR system operation Page 202 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 START Is first digit an LCR access code Normal operation no LCR Get LCR code to digit code development pattern Is an _ LCR code to digit development pattern as signed Reorder tone Yes Receive next digit Check assignment for matched patter
87. esiescietecisdugieg tay AAA ea R 335 ARO PER AAA o EErEE E T eqeeet 338 APPENDIX 1 FIRED FUNGTION KEYS suenan cai vet 341 APPENDIX 2 LCD DY DISPLAY sarracisrrrrsr rantik NARRAR 342 APPENDIX 3 REGISTRATION OF ID CODES 10 ittis itt IEE rAr EENE AAA ERA 344 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page vii This page is for your notes NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page viii NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF FEATURES FEATURE Account Code X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 NEAX2000 IVS x y Add On Module Alarm Indications Alphanumeric Display Analog Port Adapter Announcement Service Answer Key Jimi m im im Asynchronous Data Switching Attendant Assisted Calling Attendant Camp On Attendant Console SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON Attendant Called Calling Name Display Attendant Called Calling Number Attendant Call Selection Attendant Console Lockout Password Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel Attendant Interposition Calling Transfer Attendant Lamp Check Attendant Listed Directory Number Attendant Loop Release Attendant Programming Attendant Training Jacks Audible Indication Control Call Processing Indication
88. extension from an analog terminal via the Analog Port Adapter An analog terminal does not ring when a call terminates the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal 2 Press the line key of the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal and lift the handset of the Multiline Terminal The LED of the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal lights green 3 Lift the handset of the analog terminal to switch over to the analog terminal Replace the handset of the Multiline Terminal 5 Converse Dual Port Mode An analog terminal connected via the Analog Port Adapter can be used independently of the Multiline Terminal Refer to the User s Guide for each terminal for operating procedures Service Conditions 1 The following analog terminal can be connected to the APR unit e Single Port Mode Single Line Telephone PB only Facsimile Modem for PC Dialing Connection Unit e Dual Port Mode Single Line Telephone PB only Facsimile Voice Mail System with analog inter face Modem with NCU 2 In Single Port Mode the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously When the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal go off hook simultaneously the analog terminal has prece dence 3 In Dual Port Mode the Multiline Terminal and the analog terminal can be used simultaneously A Multiline terminal analog terminal cannot be identified on the LED in Single Port Mode The LED indi cation on the Multiline
89. feature does not indicate a call termination on the LCD One facsimile call number can be assigned to flexible line keys of multiple Multiline Terminal sets 5 Multiple facsimile call numbers can be assigned to a flexible line key of any one specific Multiline Terminal set 6 When a new call terminates while the facsimile incoming call lamp is lit the lamp indication changes to 120 ipm flash 7 The chime which signals starting reception of a facsimile message beeps even if the Multiline Terminal is busy unless the speaker is in use at that time NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 168 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION FEATURE ACTIVATION FROM SECONDARY EXTENSION General Description This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user to access an appearance of another extension and program cer tain features from that extension Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Refer to the applicable feature for operating procedures Service Conditions 1 The following features may be set on a secondary extension e Busy In Busy Out ACD e Busy In Busy Out UCD e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line e Call Forwarding No Answer e Call Pickup Group e Return Message Schedule Display 2 After a call has been originated from a secondary extension Call Back or Trunk Queuing Outgoing can be set The primary extension
90. feature is normally used when direct in service is desired on an extension or system wide basis 2 DID must be provided by the serving C O however not all telephone company C O are capable of pro viding this service 3 One of the following control signaling methods can be used on incoming DID trunks immediate start delay start and wink start 4 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF or rotary dial signaling is available This is assigned on a trunk route basis 5 Calls to invalid numbers can be routed to an Attendant a predesignated station or to a recorded announce ment 6 When a station has activated Call Forwarding all types the DID call will be forwarded to the designated station rather than to the specific station dialed 7 Ifthe called station is assigned as a pilot in Station Hunting and is busy the call follows the preset hunting pattern 8 Onan incoming call to a busy station the Call Forwarding feature takes precedence over the Station Hunting feature If the Call Forwarding feature and the Station Hunting feature are not activated the caller will re ceive busy tone or will reroute to the Attendant Console predesignated station or recorded announcement depending on the assignment in system programming 9 Stations in Do Not Disturb will be provided with visual indication but no audible indication Secondary ap pearances will ring when assigned The calling party will receive ring back tone until answered 10 An
91. flexible and can be assigned in system programming 4 The maximum number of simultaneous Executive Overrides per system is eight or sixteen depending upon conferencing hardware installed 5 Ifthe called station has set the Call Forwarding Busy All Calls feature and the target station is also busy the Executive Override will interrupt the originally dialed station If the target station is not busy the call will be forwarded 6 Executive Override can be set when the busy station is connected to another station or a trunk in a two party connection NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 164 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE 7 Executive Override is denied if the busy station is dialing in Line Lockout mode receiving a system gen erated tone protected against Executive Override in Class of Service protected against any override by DND key or when any of the following features are in progress e Attendant Override e Consultation Hold e Call Back e Data Line Security e Hold e Paging e Call Transfer e Privacy e Camp On Trunk Queuing Outgoing e Conference e Voice Call 8 When Executive Override is denied the caller will receive reorder tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 165 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET ME EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET ME General Description This feature allows a station user or attendant dial access to
92. from the line keys of the Multiline Terminal 5 Feature Access keys cannot appear on the DSS BLF Console NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 148 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE Busy Out Status Console 6 The DSS BLF Console can be provided with a Message Wait MW key a Do Not Disturb DND key a Night Transfer NT key a Wake Up No Answer WU key a Room Cutoff RC key and a Agent Busy Out BYO key for the following purposes e MW key Message Waiting Set Cancel Status Display DND key Do Not Disturb Set Cancel Status Display NTkey Day Night mode change for the associated tenant e WU key Automatic Wake Up No Answer Cancel Status Display RCkey Room Cutoff Set Cancel Status Display e BYO key Agent Busy Out UCD Status Display These keys must be assigned to the last three 3 keys key no 57 58 and 59 on the DSS BLF Console 7 Key operation from MW DND WU and BYO key on the DSS BLF Console are effective for only the first 48 DSS keys key no 00 to 47 which have two 2 LEDs red and green in each key Direct Station Se lection busy status indication and Line Lockout status indication are effective for all 60 keys on the DSS BLF Console 8 When the following operations from the DSS BLF Console are used the Function Mode key must be as signed to one of 60 DSS keys e Message Waiting Set Cancel using MW key e Do Not Distur
93. heard If denied busy tone will be heard Dial the desired number trunk access code station number or Digital Announcement Trunk Card access record code and then card number Service Conditions 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA Code Limitations a Inthe case of a system with APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 10 digits If Check Code is provided limited to 8 digits If APO1 card is utilized for Authorization Code the same number of digits must be assigned to Au thorization Code and Direct Inward System Access DISA Code e Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with Authorization Code and forced Account Code b In the case of a system without APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 8 digits e Number of codes The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit number For details refer to APPENDIX 3 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTME instruments are required for DISA A portable tone generator may be utilized in circumstances where such instruments are not available A DISA identification code must be programmed into the system to identify the user accessing this service The DISA identification code may be assigned a Class of Service limiting access to capabilities by an out side caller DISA identification codes can be entered from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT the Cus tomer Administration Terminal CAT and Attendant Console A dedicated trunk is used for DISA access The
94. iees 8b sess AAA 174 E oe kendo NS 175 GROUP LISTENING eses prose ees cones rr ete dia 177 HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK ritos ars rd 178 HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING 22 is2sccoucce criar rar 179 e 13465 0654 GANGS A and bade Hees OR A eed eae 180 o Beers ganar ae ae ae eer are ee er ran ere re eee ae wr ene a me eer re 180 ees ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee 181 SSG AA sh t64th4ceb ie Sieeseceesd a a r 182 a re thetic IR eee ee 183 AOTEL MOTEL ATER CONSOLE serra erro pa 184 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT 1 5 055000155924 R04 RAEE 186 Pi LINE INSIDE OU SIDE ican vada A ADA AN Ke eee eee ew AAA 190 POUSE PRIQMIE sica rita arar daria FeO Reeds 191 INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS scotland e 192 INTERCEPT ANNQUNGEMENT icii s ae ai a aga aa aaia a a k aed a deere dea 193 NTER ae ane eee te eee Gee ces rosa ee ae eee eerie eee 194 Manual es i ee ee a ee ee ere eee ee eee ee 194 ir AR Ones ere ed Ahad ORL ew Res Re ees 195 el ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ere ee Ser er re 195 INTERNAL TONE YOICE SIGNALLING casio rea ls id eei ayi 197 INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEEITHME 6c cencks errar Aa 199 LAST NUMBER REDIAL 232 0653445 0045450 catedcapbrdica bebas brea sde ost 200 LEAST COST ROUTING DIGIT ons sks eb kde de RARA 201 INE LOCKOUT gare eee eer ee ee ee ee re re re ere ee ere ee ree 206 LME Fe eee i 6 esd oo Ree ee Se Ke eh ETER e Ssh A 207 MAD STATUS oe ee ce thee atthe ban ebeee rs cea ee se tee eee pees ee neta cee neeces 208 MAINTENANCE
95. individual DID or Tie Lines from Intercept Announcement NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 193 INTERCOM Manual Intercom INTERCOM General Description Three types of Intercoms are available Manual Intercom Automatic Intercom and Dial Intercom Each type of Intercom provides access to a small group of Multiline Terminals with simplified calling methods Manual Intercom General Description The Manual Intercom groups have up to six Multiline Terminals sharing a common signal path Users can call other members of the Manual Intercom group by pressing a Manual Intercom key each press sends a tone burst over the speakers of all the terminals in the group When another user answers the call a speech path is activated Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 1 The caller lifts the handset and presses the Manual Intercom key The other members of the group receive a tone burst Each subsequent press sends another tone burst 3 Another user presses the same Manual Intercom appearance and establishes a station to station call by lift ing the handset Service Conditions A Manual Intercom group can consist of two to six Multiline Terminals A maximum of 25 Manual Intercom groups can be assigned per system 3 A Manual Intercom is always non private therefore up to 4 members of the group can enter an Intercom call 4 Incoming call indicatio
96. is provided Dial the trunk access code and receive PBX dial tone Dial the desired number and receive busy tone Press the assigned CALL BACK key and receive service set tone Replace the handset E A EA When the trunk becomes idle the station is recalled Once connected to the trunk the system will automat ically redial the number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 312 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TRUNK QUEUING OUTGOING Service Conditions 1 NA AN 10 11 Once an outgoing trunk becomes available the user s station will ring for 30 seconds If not answered within that time the station is automatically dropped from the queue When this feature is utilized in conjunction with System Speed Dialing or Least Cost Routing the system automatically dials out the called subscriber number when the handset is lifted If the user wishes to remove himself from the queue prior to being recalled a Trunk Queuing Outgoing can cellation code must be dialed Individual stations may only initiate one outgoing Trunk Queue at a time Subsequent attempts result in a reorder tone Stations may be restricted from using this feature in Class of Service This feature is not available on an Attendant Console Maximum number of simultaneous Trunk Queues Outgoing per system is 32 Call Pickup group cannot be used to answer a call directed to another station using the Trunk Queuing Out going feature Th
97. is used up to 26000 calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 295 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR When a call is completed the record is sent to the output device and is removed from memory If the amount of calls exceed the SMDR memory those overflow calls will not be recorded The built in SMDR can not be provided when APOO is mounted The built in SMDR does not provide a record of tandem calls Account Codes Forced Account Codes Authorization Codes and DISA Codes on Tandem connections SMDR with APOO only are reported in the applicable call record 10 SMDR with APO0 provides a record of incoming Tie Line tandem calls where another trunk is dial accessed 11 For details of SMDR format data stream memory buffer etc refer to the Installation Procedure Manual Feature Programming Manual 12 Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber s number for Automatic Number Identification AND and CPN IS DN can be recorded in the SMDR by system programming 13 In case of built in SMDR if the station number exceeds six digits only the last six digits will be sent NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 296 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STATION SPEED DIALING STATION SPEED DIALING General Description This feature allows a station user to dial frequently called numbers by dialing an access code and an abbreviated code or by pressing
98. keys One line key is reserved for that sta tion s primary extension A maximum of one Do Not Disturb key and three Save and Repeat keys can be assigned per Multiline Ter minal Stations desiring dial tone from a specific line can press that line key before lifting the handset When Station Speed Dialing is assigned to the line key on a Series E Multiline Terminal with no DSS key by the system data and an extension number is assigned to the line key by the station user a lamp of the line key indicates the busy idle status of the extension NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 170 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN General Description The system has a Flexible Numbering Plan All access codes and station numbers and can be assigned in system programming Refer also to the Single Digit Dialing Features and Specifications which further increases the flexibility of the system Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Normal call handling procedures apply Service Conditions 1 The system is provided with a Resident System Program however the flexibility of the system allows all access codes and station numbers to be changed to any desired number from one to three digits for access codes and one to 8 digits for station numbers provided access codes and station numbers do not conflict with each other 2 Up to four different numbering plans
99. keys which can be as signed as Trunk Direct Appearances The following features are available e Outgoing call connection restriction e Code Restriction e Conference e Delayed Ringing e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Hold e Call Transfer e Call Park Save and Repeat e Last Number Redial e Broker s Call e Station Speed Dialing When an outgoing call is placed the following restrictions apply Trunk Queuing Outgoing is not available e System Speed Dialing cannot be used e Account Codes may be entered using the function key programmed for Account Code entry or Account Codes can be dialed from second dial tone The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy and green when being used by the station that selected that trunk Trunks assigned as Trunk Direct Appearance on Multiline Terminals can also be assigned to ring at Atten dant Consoles and Trunk Answer any Station For further information refer to the Flexible Line Key Assignment and Flexible Ringing Assignment fea tures When transferring the call of line key it can be specified by system data programming whether a dial tone is sent or not by pressing TAH key To set Exclusive Hold to a call of a line key by the TAH key assigned to a programmable key press Feature key first then press the TAH key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 311 TRUNK QUEUING OUTGOING T
100. m time dial Press the SET key Repeat Steps 2 5 for additional stations Press the RLS key ote In 12 hour display mode dialing wake up time in 24 hour format is available In 24 hour display mode dialing wake up time in 12 hour format is unavailable Dialing as fifth digit is unavailable To cancel Automatic Wake Up from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument lO Press the WK UP key Dial the station number Press the RESET key The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations Press the RLS key Page 62 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC WAKE UP To set Automatic Wake Up from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation with the station 1 Press the WK UP key 2 Dial the wake up time in military format in one minute increments 3 Press the SET key 4 Press the RLS key To cancel Automatic Wake Up from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument wile engaged in conversation with station 1 Press the WK UP key 2 Press the RESET key 3 Press the RLS key To set Automatic Wake Up from a guest room station or administrative station 1 Pi AO Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the Wake Up access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the desired Wake Up time in military format in one minute increments Receive service set tone Restore the handset To cancel Automatic Wake Up fro
101. may be assigned in the same system When there are multiple tenants any one of the four numbering plans can be assigned to each tenant 3 Any combination of 1 to 8 digits can be assigned as station numbers within the same numbering plan When assigning different amounts of digits to stations the leading digits of the shorter extension numbers cannot be the same as the leading digits of the longer extension numbers For example extensions 60 and 607 can not be assigned in the same numbering plan 4 The system can also be programmed to provide a group of fixed single digit feature access codes These codes allow a station user to dial a single digit to activate specific features These codes can only be applied while the station user is receiving ringback or busy tone The following feature access codes can be dialed while receiving busy tone Access Code Feature Call Back Trunk Queuing Outgoing Executive Override Camp On transfer Camp On call waiting Message Reminder Step Call The following feature access codes can be dialed while receiving ringback tone Access Code Feature Internal Voice Tone Signaling Call Back Message Reminder 5 The single digit feature access codes used while receiving ringback tone can be used by Single Line Tele phones with a DTMF dialpad after pressing the FLASH key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 17
102. not transmitted to the other party of the original call The called station can then privately talk to the calling station the secretary The called station re presses the Answer key or presses the hook switch The called station will return to the original call while the calling station is put on hold If the called station the boss hangs up while the Whisper Page is in progress the original call will be released Then a Ringback Tone is transmitted to the calling station and the called station can hear a ringing tone If the calling station secretary or the other party of the original call hangs up while the Whisper Page is in progress the call turns into a two party connection Service Conditions 1 This feature enables a maximum of 16 stations to access simultaneously including the other conference fea tures The calling station and the called station can be defined as the Service Restriction Class Whisper Page cannot be made from or to an Attendant Console Whisper Page cannot be set to a station which is calling from an Attendant Console or a station which is set on Privacy NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 338 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 WHISPER PAGE 5 Whisper Page can be set to a call in progress with the primary extension Sub Line or trunk line appearance 6 Whisper Page cannot be set to a call in progress with the Sub Line to which Camp On has been set When Station C int
103. on a switched loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated interface card The Attendant uses these loops for answering originating holding extending and re entering calls When Attendant loop release is used the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console The following pages describe the features asso ciated with the Attendant Console An alternate Attendant Position is described under Multiline Terminal Attendant Position Station Application Attendant Console SN610 ATTCON Operating Procedure Detailed operating procedures are provided in Attendant Console User s Guide Service Conditions 1 Each Firmware Processor FP can support up to 8 Attendant Consoles SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON A maximum of 8 Attendant Consoles SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON can be support ed per system 2 Each Attendant Console requires a 2 pair cable This cable cannot be longer than 4000 feet 1200 meters SN716 DESKCON General Description The Attendant Console SN716 DESKCON operates on a switched loop basis with a maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card The Attendant uses these loops for answering originating holding extending and re entering calls When Attendant loop release is used the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console For the applicable features and specifi
104. outside user dials a dedicated number to access this capa bility DISA codes can be printed out in the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR record for Tandem Con nection NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 143 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA 8 Ifthe called station is busy or does not answer or the number dialed is a feature access code any one of the following operations can be set e The C O line can be released e Dial tone can be supplied e An alternate call terminating destination Attendant Trunk Answer Any Station Direct Inward Termi nation can be provided 9 The outside user can access a Digital Announcement Trunk Card via DISA if programmed 10 The feature cannot use the DTMF Receiver on the MP card NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 144 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION DIT DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION DIT General Description This feature automatically routes incoming network exchange calls directly to a preselected station without At tendant assistance The call can then be processed by the called party Three party Conference Call Transfer etc are handled in the same manner as any normal trunk call Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Bothway trunks can be used for Direct Inward Termination but i
105. provided 4 Dictation Equipment can be accessed from stations Attendant Consoles Tie Lines or remotely Refer to the Direct Inward System Access Features and Specifications 5 Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment Foreign Exchange FX Access General Description An FX line is a line which is extended and terminated at a distant C O With this feature outgoing calls over the FX line become a local call at the distant C O Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Outgoing Call from any station 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the FX line access code and receive dial tone from distant C O 3 Dial the desired telephone number Multiline Terminals can have direct trunk appearances of FX lines Incoming call to the Attendant Console 1 The FX lamp at the Attendant Console flashes and an audible signal is received 2 The Attendant presses key assigned to the FX line or the ANSWER key 3 The Attendant processes the call in a normal manner Service Conditions 1 One circuit on the COT board is required for each FX line interface NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 226 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS Radio Paging Equipment Access 2 Care should be excerised in system data assignment when using this feature in conjunction with Least Cost Routing LCR since FX lines may require that the digit
106. provided for a programmed interval then followed by repetition of the Delay Announcement This process repeats until an agent in the UCD group is available on the caller hangs up c After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a first Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided After a pre programmed interval the caller then hears a second Delay Announcement followed again by Music on Hold The second Delay Announcement and Music on Hold are then repeated at the pre programmed interval time until an agent becomes available or the caller hangs up d After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a first Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided After a pre determined interval time the system checks to see if an overflow destination has been assigned for the incoming trunk route If assigned and the destination is available idle the call overflows to the destination If not assigned or the destination is busy the call remains in queue for the predetermined interval time and the system then checks again for overflow assignment For the latter case if repetition of first announcement is set or second announcement is made available that announcement will be played Note Repeat of the first announcement or receipt of second announcement is only available when the overflow destination for the trunk route is busy not available 3 Overflow out of queue causes the call
107. receive busy tone 2 Camp On call waiting is automatically set if the Camp On feature is allowed 3 Receive ringback tone Camp On tone 3 tone burst is sent to the busy station To set Camp On with an outside call in progress transfer method e From a Single Line Telephone 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch The call in progress remains on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received Dial the desired station and receive busy tone 3 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch Feature dial tone is received 4 Dial the Camp On transfer feature access code and receive service set tone Camp On tone two tone bursts is sent to the busy station 5 Restore the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 108 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CAMP ON From a Multiline Terminal er SS 5 Press the Transfer key The call in progress remains on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone Press the Transfer key Feature dial tone is received Dial the Camp On transfer feature access code and receive service set tone Camp On tone two tone bursts is sent to the busy station Restore the handset To answer a Camp On transfer method or Call Waiting method from any station 1 2 Receive Camp On tone From a Single Line Telephone momentarily press the hookswitch and dial the
108. recorded Intercept Announcement which informs the caller that an inoperative number was reached and may supply the number for information Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure To record a message 1 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the voice recording feature access code and the voice recording card number Three seconds of tone will be supplied 3 Record the message maximum duration 60 seconds 4 Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 This feature requires a Digital Announcement Trunk DAT circuits of MP card or a 2DAT 4DAT card pro grammed for Intercept Announcement MP card includes two DAT circuits and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4DAT circuits 2 Multiple calls may be connected to the Intercept Announcement board at the same time If a second call arrives while the first is being processed the second caller may not hear the announcement from the begin ning 3 If the caller does not hang up the system will repeat the message This feature is only available on DID and tie line calls where answer supervision is provided 5 The following call conditions which cannot be completed can be routed to an Intercept Announcement e Vacant level e Unassigned station number Calls to restricted access codes or feature access codes will always receive the Intercept Announcement Only one common message can be provided for the different intercept conditions There is no method to exempt
109. station user to allow for equal access accom modation or for secondary common carrier access or Central Offices which do not provide equal ac cess e Delete the area code for FX trunks e Delete all digits or up to 8 digits from the number dialed Allow or deny access to a specific trunk route based on the office code dialed All trunk routes in the system can be accessed using LCR including DDD Tie FX WATS etc Restric tion on outgoing calls and Code Restriction assignments are applied The following programmable tables are available e Digit Code Table Up to 8 tables of area codes are used to determine the route to be selected Although area codes are normally 3 digit codes this table can be assigned with 1 to 8 digit codes These codes can be assigned to select any other LCR table NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 201 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT Route Pattern Table Up to 256 Route Advance tables are available each with 4 entries If more than 4 entries are required up to 8 entries can be provided by combining two route pattern tables LCR Pattern Table Up to 256 tables are available for assignment of digits to be added or deleted Also the office code dialed can be checked to determine whether service is available for a specific office code and whether a prefix 1 should be added This table can be used in conjunction with toll restriction assignment f
110. stations Operating Procedure With an incoming call during Night Service 1 2 The outside party hears ringback tone Ringing signal is sent to the night station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 236 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 3 NIGHT SERVICE Night Connection Flexible The night station goes off hook and answers the call If necessary the answered call can be transferred to another station or outside party Service Conditions 1 10 Night Connection station can be assigned the following types of trunks e Direct Distance Dialing DDD e Foreign Exchange FX e Wide Area Telephone Service WATS e Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA e Direct Inward Dialing DID available only for LDN calls e TIE available only for operator calls Each night station can be assigned multiple trunks A fully restricted station cannot be assigned as a night station If the night station to which an incoming call has been terminated is busy the system can be programmed to provide one of the following choices on a per trunk basis e Automatic Camp On e Trunk Answer Any Station e Ringback tone If the night station does not answer after a predetermined time the system can provide one of the following options on a per trunk basis Trunk Answer Any Station e Ringback tone The night station can be assigned to a Station Hunting Group The night station can be assigned to
111. than nine stations are assigned to one group the first nine stations are paged in order of regis tered number on the system data 2 Single Line Telephones Multiline Terminals can be assigned as the stations within the conference groups Virtual line cannot be assigned A station can belong to multiple groups 3 Up to eight groups can be assigned as conference groups by system data 4 The maximum number of participants which can be connected in a conference is e Six participants Inclusive of the leader when one CFT trunk is used e Ten participants inclusive of the leader when two CFT trunks are used NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 174 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 GROUP CALL 2 Way Calling Up to four CFT trunks can be accommodated in the system The maximum number of conference groups per system when using four CFT trunks maximum is e Four 6 party conference groups e Two 10 party conference groups e Two 6 party conference groups and one 10 party conference group A CFT trunk is used for either a 6 party or 10 party conference Dialed access codes determine which CFT trunk is used for a conference If the leader dials the access code or press the feature access key for a 10 party conference when only one CFT trunk is idle the leader is restricted and hear reorder tone 5 A Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal can be an originator and make a conference call to a group even if it d
112. that call is completed the station is logged off busy out 4 The agent can log on off from the secondary extension by dialing the log on log off feature access code The LOG ON LOG OFF key is not available for the secondary extension NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 317 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Call Waiting Indication UCD Call Waiting Indication UCD General Description This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to a UCD group is placed in queue due to an all agents busy condition An external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication Station Application Multiline Terminals assigned with a Call Waiting CW Lamp Operating Procedure No operating procedure is necessary Indication is automatic once it is assigned Service Conditions 1 A PN DKOO or built in DKOO in MP is required to provide the external relay control when an external indicator is used 2 There is no limit to the number of appearances of a CW lamp assigned to Multiline Terminals One CW lamp per group is available 3 On aper system basis the option is available to select how many calls in queue causes the CW lamp to flash Default setting is one The LED lights steady until the set threshold count is reached at which time it begins to flash 4 Provision of ringing on a CW key is contro
113. the trunk the calling party information of the call which is terminated to the trunk access key can be displayed by the CID key e Trunk Direct Appearances e Trunk Direct Appearance TAS NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 107 CAMP ON CAMP ON General Description This feature provides selected stations or outside calls with Camp On capability to a busy internal station Two Camp On methods are provided The call waiting method allows a station or an outside party to camp itself on to a busy station The transfer method allows a transferred outside call to be camped on to a busy station Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Camp On call waiting method From a Single Line Telephone 1 Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch Feature dial tone is received 3 Dial the Camp On call waiting feature access code and receive special ringback tone Camp On tone 4 tone burst is sent to the busy station e From a Multiline Terminal 1 Dial the desired station number and receive busy tone 2 Press the Transfer key Feature dial tone is received 3 Dial the Camp On call waiting feature access code and receive special ring back tone Camp On tone 4 tone burst is sent to the busy station From an outside party on DID incoming call 1 Dial desired station number and
114. to eight Multiline Terminals can use the Help key at the same time j The explanation displayed by the Help key will automatically be cleared unless the Exit key is pressed for 16 to 20 seconds NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 131 DIAL BY NAME 2 Character Registration a b The following table shows how to record the alphanumeric character to the system Input Mode S Z Q 5 gt XI GO Z A AO m w te K lt AO 5 TH a ALN a 5 o 0 b c e f h i k 1 n o P q u v Ww x amp ol el gt o space O CO NY DM Ty BY Go N O CO NY DM UY BY GW N j o There are two input modes for alphabet and number The input mode is displayed on Multiline Terminal soft key as following example When left side soft key shows ABC the alphabet can be recorded When NUM is displayed on soft key the number is recorded The alphabet mode and number mode can be changed by pressing the left side soft key which shows ABC or NUM 11 22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999 11 22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999 ABC UP DOWN NUM UP DOWN Alphabet Mode Number Mode In the alphabet mode the input character is fixed by key Example 1 Dial 222 22 CB is recorded Example 2 Dial 222999 CY is recorded Exa
115. unless the Attendant is already on a loop or unless the volume control is used to silence the buzzer Off hook ringing is available on a per console basis Common Route Indial General Description This feature allows assignment of incoming DID calls to different Attendant Call Selection keys based on the last 4 digits dialed into the system Up to eight individual Listed Directory Numbers can be assigned in system programming When an incoming call to any of these trunks is received an Attendant Call Selection key will flash and the LCD display will indicate the Listed Directory Number associated with that trunk route NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 35 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Operating Procedure Refer to Attendant Call Selection Features and Specifications Service Conditions 1 A maximum of one Listed Directory Number can be specified for each Attendant Call Selection key Up to eight LDN keys may be assigned This feature can help identify calls to particular tenants who are sharing Attendant s In this case service conditions for Tenant Service would apply to the system If the system or tenant group is in night mode the Common Route Indial lines would follow the established night rerouting Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS General Description This feature provides a display of the company name on the Att
116. versa To answer a ringing call the user must lift the handset and press the flashing Dial Intercom key Service Conditions 1 SI ON IU a ee bo A maximum of 25 Dial Intercom groups are available per system A maximum of 10 Multiline Terminals per Dial Intercom group are allowed A Multiline Terminal can have more than one Dial Intercom appearance Each Dial Intercom provides a single voice path Intercom number assignments are one digit 0 9 A Dial Intercom is private and the other members of the group can not enter an Intercom call Incoming call indication is only given to the called party within the Dial Intercom group Each Dial Intercom from 2 to 10 appearances uses a single extension which can be a software extension no supporting hardware is required Dual Hold and hold recall are available on Dial Intercom Other extension features such as Call Transfer Call Park etc are not available If the called party within the Dial Intercom group is busy off hook on its primary extension the station making the intercom call will receive busy tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 196 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 INTERNAL TONE VOICE SIGNALLING INTERNAL TONE VOICE SIGNALLING General Description Multiline Terminals can signal incoming internal calls by Voice Announcement or by ringing according to the programmed mode Voice first or Ring first of the called terminal The caller c
117. 000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 135 DIRECT DATA ENTRY DIRECT DATA ENTRY General Description This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the PMS Property Management System using the guest room station for entry through dial operation The same numerical data can be output to a Hotel Motel Printer by system data programming Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Direct Data Entry access code and receive feature dial tone Dial input data to the PMS or Hotel Motel Printer and receive service set tone Restore the handset Service Conditions This feature is activated from a guest room telephone The digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 can be used for the input data The input data can be sent out to the PMS and or Hotel Motel Printer The output option can be selected by system data programming A maximum of 30 digits can be entered in one operation to the PMS and or Hotel Motel Printer If data ex ceeds 30 digits the guest room station receives reorder tone If the input data to be sent is less than 30 digits FP can be used to end the digit string The FF is not sent to the PMS and Hotel Motel Printer Example Access code 1234567890 When the Hotel Motel Printer is used can be used to separate the data entry is not p
118. 1 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT General Description This feature allows lines on Multiline Terminals to be individually programmed to ring or not ring Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The following priority applies to ringing of multiple incoming calls a Voice call Station to Station on extension Automatic or Dial Intercom b Recalls c Incoming External Calls d Incoming Internal Calls Dial Intercom ringing calls Manual Intercom 2 Delayed Ringing is available Refer to the Delayed Ringing Features and Specifications for more informa tion 3 Flexible Ringing Assignment is assignable in system programming NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 172 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE FORCED ACCOUNT CODE General Description This feature forces the user to enter an Account Code up to 8 or 10 digits for all outgoing calls The Account Code must be dialed before dialing the outgoing number Calls are processed only when the dialed Account Codes are valid Station Application All stations Operating Procedure When dialing an outgoing call 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Enter the Forced Account Code feature access code and receive service set tone Enter the Forced Account Code up to 8 or 10 digits and receive dial ton
119. 1 237 1 275 1 238 1 276 1 239 1 277 1 240 1 278 1 241 1 279 1 242 1 280 1 243 1 281 1 244 1 282 1 245 1 283 1 246 1 284 1 247 1 285 1 248 1 286 1 249 1 287 1 250 1 288 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE JANUARY 2000 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE DATE DATE DATE NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Revision Sheet 4 5 NDA 24271 ISSUE No ISSUE No PAGE No PAGE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 4 5 6 7 8 289 1 327 1 290 1 328 1 291 1 329 1 292 1 330 1 293 1 331 1 294 1 332 1 295 1 333 1 296 1 334 1 297 1 335 1 298 1 336 1 299 1 337 1 300 1 338 1 301 1 339 1 302 1 340 1 303 1 341 1 304 1 342 1 305 1 343 1 306 1 344 1 307 1 308 1 309 1 310 1 311 1 312 1 313 1 314 1 315 1 316 1 317 1 318 1 319 1 320 1 321 1 322 1 323 1 324 1 325 1 326 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE JANUARY 2000 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE DATE DATE DATE NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Revision Sheet 5 5 NDA 24271 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications TABLE OF CONTENTS Page POU OODE 4 eutetee test AI e
120. 235 NIGHT SERVICE Night Connection Fixed Station Application All stations Operating Procedure By dial access code 1 2 3 Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the DAY NIGHT Mode Change feature access code followed by 1 for DAY mode 2 for NIGHT mode 3 for MODE A mode 4 for MODE B mode Restore the handset By function key on a Multiline Terminal 1 2 3 4 Go off hook or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone Press the assigned feature access key Dial 1 for DAY mode 2 for NIGHT mode 3 for MODE A mode 4 for MODE B mode Restore the handset or press the Speaker key Service Conditions This feature is assigned in the station s Class of Service If using a function key on a Multiline Terminal the associated lamp will be lit when the tenant changes Day mode to another mode Night mode Red lamp on MODE A mode Red lamp flashing 60 int MODE B mode Red lamp flashing 120 int On a system basis incoming trunk destination and trunk restriction class can be changed depending upon programming when the tenant or system is placed in Night Service This feature is only available for the tenant without a master Attendant Console Night Connection Fixed General Description This feature allows incoming calls normally terminated to the Attendant to reroute to a predetermined station when the system is placed in Night Service Station Application All stations except fully restricted
121. 40 DPF PREMISES EX TENSIONS 61662640 si4esiotireeeeiS od eer beNe Ae EE A 241 OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE WA ats cres seins siete eeedocbeees de di id E 242 A E EE E A ET A A A A E AE A A 243 PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE cortan A Ue ia 245 POOLED UNE ACCESS errer REVIERTE RARA AIR RT BAIRE ee 246 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER sucias asa EARL TEENE AAA NARA RARA DA 247 PRIORITY CALL A A 248 a PRA A A A E E A A en sees 249 Dieci Pivac ACIDO ereina astermen biela cisois e rca bi dd E Da e 249 Manual Privacy Release A IA 250 PRIVATE LINES eee eee ARA Ea ere er re rr ee ee ee eee ee 251 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE 6 4sc0s eenseedecneontessesse eases 253 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL sosr csisrirasarrcin arras aa 254 Automate kde ROW src A pani a A sc Cees 254 Called Station Status Display rr ra a e e 255 Calling Name and Number Display lt ocostersaiiocarcasdetsrcosblisidinntcciarratbes 255 e DAP Oe erregek aE RAAE a a 256 go See ee virta bpk t erene ee ee eT eee AGA AI 256 Pelee ON reversa 257 Microphone OT oc ee te ce O NEAR easel ECR Enp eee eae Ee EUS AE os 257 AA eeu ueeawess eee eee eimeeeenesees 258 ROO A A ae os eee A ETN 259 Oif Hook Vaice AMMOUNC M EN y xa hades caer ARA AA 259 SE A ee a 0 ee eee eR eae 260 RECAE ee ee EIA MARN AAA ARANDAS RA 261 Relay Control Function A 262 Ring Frequency Control lt et eecet ees e deb esedeeiee pasar ee gees se eee es ees eee 263 Pong ing Kine PO cr cutee eeede este see cee d
122. 7 INTERNAL TONE VOICE SIGNALLING 4 Press the Speaker key Service Conditions When a Multiline Terminal is receiving a Voice Announcement it cannot receive any other audible signal Single digit feature access codes must be allowed in system programming Voice Announce service on extension lines can be allowed or denied on a system basis Microphone control MIC lamp must be lit for Handsfree Answerback response Refer also to the Intercom Features and Specifications DN NO Voice announcement is available only to the primary extension of the dialed station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 198 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET ME INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET ME General Description This feature allows the Attendant Console and system users to page over the built in speakers of the Multiline Terminals within the assigned zone or all zones Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To page from a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the Internal Zone Paging feature access code for the desired zone all zones or press line key assigned for the desired zone all zones 3 Page the desired party To page from Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Internal Zone Paging feature access code for the desired zone all zones 3 Page the desired party To a
123. 71 Issue 1 0 8 MESSAGE WAITING When the user of a station that has a Message Waiting indication lifts the handset the station can receive special dial tone by system programming It reminds the station user that a message is waiting Voice Message Waiting System Individual 1 A maximum of 10 messages can be recorded for Voice Message Waiting System A maximum of 128 messages can be set simultaneously for Voice Message Waiting Individual One Voice Recording Mem ory port per message is required The duration of an announcement is limited to 60 seconds in Voice Message Waiting System Individual Voice Message Waiting System Individual can be automatically cleared by retrieving a message from a set station For the Voice Message Waiting System more than one connection can be made to a Digital Announce ment Trunk Secondary connections can be made in the middle of a message For the Voice Message Wait ing Individual only one station can be connected to each Digital Announcement Trunk Card at a time Any operations for Voice Message Waiting System Individual are not available from a station with a call in Consultation Hold The message is repeated until the station goes on hook Voice Message Waiting System Individual can be provided on a system basis NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 223 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS CCSA Access MISCELLANEOUS TRU
124. 71 Issue 1 0 BROKER S CALL BROKER S CALL General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone user to alternate between two parties talking to one party while the other party remains on Hold on the same line The Multiline Terminal user utilizes the Transfer or Answer key to alternate between the two parties The Single Line Telephone user uses the Hold fea ture to alternate between the two parties Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To activate Broker s Call from a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress 1 Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone The first party is placed on hold 2 Dial the new number and wait for the second party to answer 3 Press the Transfer or Answer key and return to the first party The second party is placed on hold 4 Repeat as often as needed To activate a Broker s Call from a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press hookswitch and receive feature dial tone The first party is placed on Consultation Hold Dial the Call Hold feature access code and receive extension dial tone 3 Dial the new number and the second party answers Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch The second party is placed on Consultation Hold 5 Dial the Call Hold feature access code and the second party is placed on Call Hold The first party is recon nected 6 Repeat the la
125. ANCED 911 General Description This feature allows the PBX to transmit a callers emergency service identification information to an Enhanced 911 Emergency system Station Application All stations and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure Lift the handset and receive a dial tone Dial the trunk access code and telephone number e g 911 3 The system automatically completes a call and sends the pre assigned number calling area code calling station number Service Conditions 1 Upto four 911 Sender trunk can be accommodated in the system which includes T1 ANI Caller ID Receiver trunk 2 The caller s telephone number must be sent in Automatic Number Identification ANI format corresponding to Centralized Message Accounting CAMA standards A trunk circuit capable of performing these functions is called a CAMA type trunk 3 The calling station in the system will receive ROT if there is a C O line failure on the CAMA trunks If the system has multiple CAMA trunks and the calling station receives ROT due to a C O line failure the calling station must go on hook and then attempt the call again With CM 35 YY 83 set to 1 by allotter for the CAMA trunk route the PBX will select the next available CAMA trunk Note For this purpose it is recommended that the system has a minimum of two CAMA trunks for Enhanced 911 5 The physical interface for Enhanced 911 can be any of the following e Digital T1
126. AX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 123 CONSULTATION HOLD CONSULTATION HOLD General Description This feature permits a station user to hold any incoming or outgoing C O call tie line call or any intraoffice call while originating a call to another station user within the system Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal e To hold the original call and place a second call 1 Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone 2 The original call is placed on hold and receives Music On Hold if provided 3 Dial an internal station number and receive ringback tone 4 The second station answers The original call is now on Consultation Hold To return to the original call 1 Inany of the following cases the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the Transfer key e Ifthe second station called is busy e Ifthe calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction or no answer If the second station hangs up the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call 3 If the second station remains connected pressing the Transfer key returns the original call to the Multiline Terminal while the second call enters Consultation Hold 4 By pressing the Conf key a three party Conference will be initiated From a Single Line Telephone To hold the original call and place a s
127. Advance table with local exchange or WATS trunks Use of the LCR feature overcomes this difficulty Tie Lines should not be assigned to a Route Advance table that includes C O FX or WATS trunk groups Route Advance is available for use with outgoing C O FX WATS CCSA and Tie Lines The dialing party may be either a station Attendant Tie Line or outside party using Direct Inward System Access DISA If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 281 SAVE AND REPEAT SAVE AND REPEAT General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal to save a specific dialed number and then redial that number at a later time Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Go off hook and seize any idle line Dial a number 2 After the number has been dialed press the Save and Repeat key The dialed number is stored for future use The associated LED lights red 3 To access this number later go off hook and receive dial tone Press the Save and Repeat key and the saved number is dialed Service Conditions 1 Three Save and Repeat keys per station can be assigned 2 The Save and Repeat function may be set at any time after the number has been dialed and before going on hook 3 Itis not necessary to erase the stored number in order to save another The second number wi
128. All Calls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No Station Speed Dialing 4 Replace the handset To monitor Split Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset 2 When Split Call Forwarding All Calls has been set special dial tone is heard 3 Replace the handset To cancel Split Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Split Call Forwarding All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone 3 Replace the handset Service Conditions 1 This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for Call Forwarding All Calls the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding All Calls The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming 2 Either Call Forwarding All Calls or Split Call Forwarding All Calls can be selected for the feature avail able per tenant in system programming depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal call attendant assisted call a Tie Line call or a C O call 3 Split Call Forwarding All Calls allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Termi nation DIT Tie Line Transfer and internal calls to be forwarded to a predetermined location Attendant Console another station or voice mail equipment 4 When the station user that has set Split Call
129. Boss line key appearance is steady green at secretary and boss Multiline Terminal and is steady red else where The secretary then goes on hook and the calling party is connected to the boss Boss line key appear ance is steady green at boss terminal and steady red elsewhere OR The boss goes on hook and the secretary presses the transfer key to return to the original call For a Boss Secretary transfer of an incoming call to the boss Single Line Telephone 1 Secretary answers incoming call by pressing boss line key appearance and lifting the handset Secretary converses with calling party Boss line key appearance is steady green on secretary s station and steady red elsewhere Secretary presses boss line key appearance again Incoming call is placed on Consultation Hold and re ceives Music On Hold if provided Boss line key appearance is steady green at secretary s station and steady red at other appearances At boss Single Line Telephone internal ringing is heard Page 66 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 BOSS SECRETARY CALLING 4 The secretary can now go on hook The boss Single Line Telephone continues to ring incoming ring rate reflects whether the calling party is internal or external and all line key appearances of the boss extension provide incoming ring indication 5 The boss lifts the handset and is connected to the calling party OR The boss c
130. CODE RESTRICTION CODE RESTRICTION General Description This feature allows the system to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls according to specific area and or C O codes This restriction is controlled on the basis of a three digit area code or six digit area and office code num bering plan Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The programmed restriction pattern may consist of either those codes to be allowed or those codes which are to be denied The Code Restriction feature is assigned on a per station basis in Class of Service The system may be programmed to ignore digit 1 prefixing an area code pattern so that true 3 6 restriction can be applied Trunk Queuing Outgoing provides queuing on selected outgoing trunk groups which are busy when dialed The station user goes on hook and is called back when an idle trunk is available After answering the ring back the station user dials the C O number The number dialed must be allowed to the toll restricted station user s line otherwise the trunk is immediately released and reorder tone is returned to the station user On a system wide basis System Speed Dialing can be allowed to override or not override code restriction The default is not to override code restriction Direct trunk line appearances on Multiline Terminals can be code restricted Code restriction is implemented as follows
131. Call Hold feature access code From a Multiline Terminal press the FLASH key or Answer key The existing call is placed on Call Hold and the Camp On call is automatically answered To answer a Camp On Call Waiting method outside calls from any station 1 2 1 2 3 4 Receive Camp On Call Waiting tone From a Single Line Telephone momentarily press the hookswitch From a Multiline Terminal press the FLASH key or Answer key The existing call is placed on Call Hold and the Camp On call is automatically answered To alternate between two calls press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch or Answer key OR Receive Camp On Call Waiting tone Complete the existing call and restore the handset The Camp On call is automatically terminated Lift the handset Service Conditions 1 Camp On tone for call waiting method internal calls is 4 four tone burst Camp On tone for transfer method is two tone bursts Camp On tone for the call waiting method outside calls is three bursts When Camp On is activated to a station any other Camp On attempts to that station are denied and reorder tone is provided transfer method or busy tone is provided call waiting method Once the Camp On recalls to the originator or is answered and the first call abandoned or the camped on party abandons another Camp On can be activated A Camp On of an internal station will not recall The station which sets camp on must rema
132. Confirmation of message reminder Off hook Alarm Transferred destination OFF HOOK ALM OFA Call was forwarded from sta tion 3000 by Off hook alarm Room Cutoff Transferred destination RCO RCO Call was forwarded from sta tion 3000 in Room cutoff mode Stack Dial REDAIL SPEED 1 82625563 RDL SPD 1 82625563 Timed Queue Originator TIMED Q TIMED Q Confirmation of Timed queue Voice Call Called Calling party VOICE CALL VCL Voice call to from station NEAX2000 IVS2 Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 343 APPENDIX 3 REGISTRATION OF ID CODES APPENDIX 3 REGISTRATION OF ID CODES ID Code Development No 00 Ex Register from 1000 to 1099 as Authorization Code 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit registered ID Pattern Table 0 0 0 1000 gt 0000 Purpose 3 1 1001 0001 Trunk Restriction 2 0002 Class 8 8 9 1009 0003 Service Restriction 9 9 9 0004 Class A gt 0005 Service Restriction 1010 0006 Class B 1 1011 7 f i icti The number of registered ID Codes 100 ae 5 Senica ae The number of ID Code Development Tables 13
133. D The following information is indi cated according to the kind of the calls Displayed Information Kind of Calling Party Network Upper on LCD Lower on LCD Extension Station number Station s name if provided TI ANI Kind of trunk trunk number Calling subscriber s number Caller ID Class Kind of trunk trunk number ie Rect cig ISDN Calling party s sub address Calling subscriber s number Station number Station s name if provided oe Kind of trunk Calling subscriber s number Other trunks Kind of trunk trunk number None Attendant Console OPR None Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure 1 Press a CID Caller ID Display key assigned to one of the programmable key on the Multiline Terminal The Multiline Terminal stays in CID mode for six seconds the CID key lamp lights and the LCD displays the calling party s information of the incoming held call for six seconds 2 If there are plural incoming calls or held calls press the desired line key while the CID key lamp lights The LCD displays the calling party s information of the incoming held call for six seconds If the line key which is pressed while CID mode has no incoming held call CID mode is cancelled 3 When the CID key is pressed again in CID mode the CID key lamp goes out and CID mode is cancelled When the CID key is pressed during conversation the LCD displays the calling party s i
134. DSS BLF CONSOLE Wake Up No Answer Console Wake Up No Answer Console General Description This feature allows a DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Wake Up No An swer WU Console This feature is activated by a function mode key on a DSS BLF Console The No Answer status for each station is indicated by a flashing green LED associated with each button Station Application All Multiline Terminals with a DSS BLF Console Operating Procedure To display and cancel Wake Up No Answer 1 Press the WU key If stations failed to answer their wake up call their associated LED flashes green at 30 ipm Press the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Press the flashing DSS key s to turn out the desired station s LED 4 Press the WU key again to return to the DSS BLF mode if desired Service Conditions 1 The Wake Up No Answer Console is only used to display cancel the No Answer status of the Automatic Wake Up feature after the station has failed to answer The Automatic Wake Up feature cannot be set from the Wake Up No Answer Console If the system is initialized reset the Console function mode will return to DSS BLF 3 Refer to the DSS BLF Console and the Automatic Wake Up Features and Specifications for more details NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 152 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DISTINCTIVE RINGING DISTINCTIVE RINGING
135. Data Features and Specifications Page 278 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ROOM CUTOFF Service Conditions 1 Stations in Room Cutoff condition are able to place outgoing calls using the Attendant Assisted Calling fea ture 2 Ifthe station under Room Cutoff status dials a C O line access code and or a special area code the station is rerouted to one of the following e Reorder tone Attendant Console 3 Room Cutoff is automatically set by Check Out operation and it is automatically reset by Check In opera tion Room Cutoff is available for guest room stations only 5 Station to Station calling and service feature access such as Maid Status are still available NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 279 ROOM STATUS ROOM STATUS General Description This feature provides the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the guest s room status A supplementary print out individual and summary can be provided Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To display Room Status from a Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 Press the STS key 2 Dial the desired station number 3 Press the SET key The Automatic Wake Up time and Maid Status are displayed on the LCD and related room status lamps are lit green if set The above two steps can be repeated for other stations 4 Press the RLS key Service Conditions 1 Items indicated a
136. Disturb Set Call Hold Voice Call Message Waiting Set Transfer to Voice Messaging System Ringer Tone Changing Call Back Set Scroll Key Voice Messaging System Live Record For details refer to NEAX Mail AD 8 User s Guide NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 265 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Volume Control Volume Control General Description Multiline Terminals are equipped with common Volume Control keys for e Built in Speaker Handset Receiver Volume e Ring Volume e C O Transmission Level e LCD contrast e Ring Tone Frequency The Volume Control keys are located on the lower front side of Multiline Terminals UP T and DOWN J Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Built in Speaker Handset Receiver Volume e While in an off hook state press the T UP key to increase the volume or the l DOWN key to decrease the volume Ring Volume 1 Press the Feature key followed by 0 receive a test ring tone from the built in speaker 2 Press the T UP key to increase the volume or the l DOWN key to decrease the volume 3 Press the Feature key or lift the handset and restore the handset to return to idle OR When in a ringing state press the T UP key to increase the volume or the DOWN key to decrease the volume C O Transmission Level e While connected to a trunk press the Feature key followed by 2 or 4 Feat
137. ERENCE THREE FOUR PARTY CONFERENCE THREE FOUR PARTY General Description This feature provides a station user the ability to add on another party trunk or station to a call already in progress Single Line Telephone users can add up to one additional party and Multiline Terminal users can add up to two additional parties Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To add a third party e From a Single Line Telephone with a call in progress 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press hookswitch First party is placed on hold and feature dial tone is received Dial the second party either another station number or a trunk access code plus the outside number 3 Wait for the second party to answer 4 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch A three party Conference is established From a Multiline Terminal with a call in progress 1 Press the Transfer key First party is placed on hold and feature dial tone is received 2 Dial the second party either another station or a trunk access code plus the outside number 3 Wait for the second party to answer 4 Press the Conf key A three party Conference is established The display shows CONF plus the name and number of the trunks or station if assigned To add a fourth party with three party Conference in progress 1 Press the Transfer key The two parties are placed on hold and feature dial tone is received 2 Dial the third part
138. Forwarding lifts the handset the station can receive special dial tone by system programming NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 87 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Split Call Forwarding Busy Line General Description This feature allows internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to separate destinations Desti nations may be an internal station Attendant Console or voice mail Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To activate Split Call Forwarding both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required For Call Forwarding settings refer to the description of Call Forwarding Busy Line From a Multiline Terminal with LCD To set split Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone 0 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 0 1 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 1 2 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 2 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 3 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 4 5 Target station for Split
139. HUNTING General Description Three Station Hunting arrangements are available Station Hunting Circular processes the call no matter which station in the hunt group is called Station Hunting Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a hunt group is called Station Hunting Secretarial is initiated when a busy secretarial station in a Station Hunting Circular group or Station Hunting Terminal group is reached Station Hunting Circular General Description When a busy station in a hunt group is called this feature permits the call to be processed automatically through the hunt group in a preprogrammed order from that station s position within the hunt group Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 When all stations within a Station Hunting Circular group are busy the calling party will receive busy tone unless the call is rerouted by Station Hunting Secretarial Assignment of station numbers to a Station Hunting Circular group may be in any numerical order The last station in the order of hunting can be programmed if required Switch Back System Calls to any programmed station in a Station Hunting Circular group will when that station is busy pro ceed through all other stations entered subsequently in the hunt group until reaching the last If a hunt group station has set Do Not Disturb hunting will bypass that station a
140. Hold The called party must be off hook using the terminal s handset in order for this call to be placed on Hold Exclusive Hold General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold and to exclude all other station users from retrieving the held call Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure While a call is in progress 1 Press the Transfer key and then press the Hold key The LCD displays E HOLD OR Press the Hold key twice The LCD displays E HOLD 3 To return to the held call press the held line key The conversation is re established Service Conditions Exclusive Hold may be activated from any line appearing on a Multiline Terminal 2 After Exclusive Hold has been set the user can make or answer calls from any other line appearing on the Multiline Terminal 3 Only the Multiline Terminal that set Exclusive Hold may retrieve the held call The station initiating the Exclusive Hold will receive a distinctive I Hold indication 5 After a programmable period of time the held call will be automatically recalled regardless of the status of the Multiline Terminal Ringing however is disabled while Do Not Disturb is activated NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 182 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HOLD Non Exclusive Hold The LEDs of other Multiline Terminals on which the held line appears will give a steady display while the Excl
141. LLER ID CLASS General Description This feature receives the calling subscriber s name and number sent from a public network using a MODEM signal and displays the name or number on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an Attendant Console Station Application All Multiline Terminals with an LCD and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure To display the calling subscriber s name or number when receiving answering a call No manual operation is required In case of receiving both the name and the number it can be specified by system programming which one has priority for display To change the name number display Every time the Name Number Display Change key is pushed on the Multiline Terminal or the Attendant Con sole the name and number are shown alternately To store the subscriber s number for Save amp Repeat feature During a call push the S amp R Save amp Repeat 0 1 2 key The S amp R lamp lights if the number has been stored In the case that no number has been sent from the public network the S amp R lamp will go off because the number has not been stored To redial by Save amp Repeat feature Push the S amp R 0 1 2 key after hearing the dial tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 104 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALLER ID CLASS Service Conditions 1 ARE an 9 10 11 Up to 14 digits of the calling subscriber s name or number can be displayed on the LCD of a Multil
142. Loop Start or Ground Start trunks and is provided on a per system basis The activation timing for this feature is by default from 32 to 36 seconds after the call status has changed from trunk incoming call to Attendant call and can be programmed from 4 seconds to 120 seconds in in crements of 4 seconds When the destination of the Night Service is specified as a Direct Inward Termination DIT the incoming call processing is changed to Trunk Answer Any Station TAS when the called DIT station fails to answer the rerouted call within a predetermined time period The next incoming trunk call will ring at the Attendant Console as normal Page 44 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE ATTENDANT OVERRIDE General Description This feature permits an Attendant to enter a busy connection station or trunk using the Attendant Console When this feature is activated a warning tone is sent to the connected parties after which they are connected with the Attendant in a three way bridge Station Application Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure To activate Attendant Override 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the desired station number or dial the feature access code for individual trunk access and the desired trunk number 3 Press the BV key when busy tone is heard A double burst tone is sent to the connected parties 5 The Attendant may now monitor o
143. M 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 60 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE JANUARY 2000 ISSUE 5 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE ISSUE 8 DATE NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications DATE DATE DATE Revision Sheet 1 5 NDA 24271 ISSUE No ISSUE No PAGE No PAGE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 4 5 6 7 8 61 1 99 1 62 1 100 1 63 1 101 1 64 1 102 1 65 1 103 1 66 1 104 1 67 1 105 1 68 1 106 1 69 1 107 1 70 1 108 1 71 1 109 1 72 1 110 1 73 1 111 1 74 1 112 1 75 1 113 1 76 1 114 1 77 1 115 1 78 1 116 1 79 1 117 1 80 1 118 1 81 1 119 1 82 1 120 1 83 1 121 1 84 1 122 1 85 1 123 1 86 1 124 1 87 1 125 1 88 1 126 1 89 1 127 1 90 1 128 1 91 1 129 1 92 1 130 1 93 1 131 1 94 1 132 1 95 1 133 1 96 1 134 1 97 1 135 1 98 1 136 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE JANUARY 2000 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE DATE DATE DATE NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Revision Sheet 2 5 NDA 24271
144. NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 247 PRIORITY CALL PRIORITY CALL General Description This feature allows the Attendant to answer a call before other calls at the Attendant s discretion Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To initiate a Priority Call from any station 1 2 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Priority Call number To answer a Priority Call at the Attendant Console 1 The Attendant presses the designated Priority Call key Service Conditions 1 A Priority Call can be answered by pressing the Answer key provided no other calls are waiting If other calls are waiting the Priority Call must be answered by pressing the designated Priority Call key in order to be answered first The designated Priority Call key must be assigned using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT Two Priority Call numbers can be assigned Separate Priority Call keys must be assigned at the Attendant Console The ability to place a Priority Call can be allowed or denied in Class of Service A Priority Call to an Attendant Console when the system is in night mode receives reorder tone When a station is assigned as the destination of a Priority Call and the station has set Call Forwarding the Priority Call will follow the Call Forwarding setting NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 248 NDA 24271 Issue 1
145. NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 55 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Silent Monitor ACD Service Conditions 1 Service feature class is used to control which stations are agents and which are supervisors 2 The default setting in system programming is that one tone is sent to both parties when the monitoring fea ture is used As an option this tone may be disabled on a per system basis 3 The Silent Monitor feature uses a three party conference circuit Therefore a maximum of 16 monitors can occur simultaneously in conjunction with any normal Conferences Three Four party in progress CAUTION The use of monitoring recording or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sound activities whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be il legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws Legal advice should be sought prior to imple menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation prior to mon itoring or recording a telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specificatio
146. NEC NDA 24271 ISSUE 1 STOCK 152007 NEAX 2000 IVS INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications JANUARY 2000 NEC America Inc LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America Inc reserves the right to change the specifications functions or features at any time without notice NEC America Inc has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC America Inc and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America Inc NEAX D and CallCenterWorX are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation MATWorX is a trademark of NEC Corporation Copyright 2000 NEC America Inc Printed in U S A PAGE No ISSUE No 4 5 PAGE No ISSUE No 4 5 23 24 25 26 O AS A 27 vi 28 vii 29 viii 30 31 32 xi O SS as A 33 xii 34 xiii 35 xiv 36 x lt 37 x ae A as 38 39 40 41 42 43 as as 44 45 46 olol NI OD oO BR Ww rm 47 o 48 49 4 m ae SS A A Ml 50 oo 51 A 52 al 53 o 54 N 55 i 00 O SS A 56 o 57 Nm o 58 N 2 1 1 1 59 4 Nm m
147. NK ACCESS General Description This feature allows the connection of various types of external facilities In addition to Loop and Ground Start Trunks the following can also be interfaced with the system CCSA Lines Code Calling Equipment Dictation Equipment Foreign Exchange FX Lines Radio Paging Equipment and Wide Area Telephone Service WATS lines Refer to separate features Direct Inward Dialing DID and Tie Line Access for more applica tions of Miscellaneous Trunk Access CCSA Access General Description This feature allows connection to or from a CCSA Common Control Switching Arrangement network A CCSA network is a special privately leased network constructed for one customer s exclusive use which replac es or augments the public switched network services The outgoing connections using CCSA lines are accomplished in the same manner as a normal outgoing call Incoming calls are received from the CCSA network as a series of digits from the network instead of a ringing signal and the connection is established in the same manner as a Direct Inward Dial DID or Tie Line connec tion For Tie Line applications the customers can construct a network with their own numbering plan In a CCSA application the numbers are issued by the C O following the CCSA network numbering plan Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To place an outgoing CCSA call from station 1 Lift handset and receive dial tone
148. Non exclusive Hold To set Voice or Tone mode 4 Press the Speaker key Dial Voice Tone Programming access code and receive feature dial tone The LCD will show the current mode of the Multiline Terminal Dial any single digit 0 9 Voice mode is switched to Tone mode or vice versa and Service Set Tone is heard Press the Speaker key Service Conditions This feature is assigned in Class of Service on a per station basis This feature is only available for the incoming call to the Primary Extension of a Multiline Terminal with an APR or APA unit The Multiline Terminal with APR or APA unit requires two time slots one for primary voice one for sec ondary voice Therefore the maximum number of Multiline Terminals with APR or APA units is limited by the total number of time slots in the PIM or the system The voice announcement to a Multiline Terminal in DND is restricted The voice call on Automatic Intercom Boss Secretary Transfer is not affected by the mode programming Voice Tone mode of the called station Prime Line Pickup General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to go off hook and originate a call from the line assigned as the Prime Line without pressing the associated line key Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 1 2 3 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key Dial tone from the Prime Line is received Proceed with normal call process
149. OG key The PROG key LED red lights PASSWORD is displayed on the LCD as prompt information 3 Dial the password 1 8 digits The dialed password is displayed on the LCD When password dialing is completed the following message is displayed on the LCD The PROG key LED red blinks at this time PROGRAM DISA SPD CLOCK TONE If the RLS key is pressed in this status the Attendant Console will return to the idle status At this time both CANCEL and Answer keys are disabled NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 29 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Programming After the above operation select DISA code set up speed dial programming or system clock set up oper ations To set up the DISA code 1 Press the DISA key The DISA key LED red lights ID DISA 2 Dial the ID code a Inthe case of new ID code PATTERN 12345 55 DISA b In the case of existing ID code PATTERN 0100 12345 55 DISA The currently registered Pattern number is displayed and the number is blinking 3 Dial the Pattern number four digits PATTERN 0250 12345 55 DISA If dial 9999 the ID code is cleared 4 Press the Answer key PATTERN 0250 12345 55 DISA The Pattern number is blinking and the DISA codes are set up 5 Press the CNCL key To set up another ID code return to Step 2 6 Press the CNCL key The system goes back to th
150. Operating Procedure When Caller ID Display feature is provided to the Multiline Terminal 1 Confirm the calling party s information by the operation of Caller ID Display Note For the operating procedure of Caller ID Display refer to the pages of Caller ID Display 2 While in the Caller ID Display CID mode while the CID key lamp lights press the Call Redirect CRD key assigned to one of the programmable key on the Multiline Terminal The call is transferred to the pre assigned destination station and the CID key lamp goes out When Caller ID Display feature is not provided to the Multiline Terminal 1 Press the CRD key The Multiline Terminal comes into CRD Call Redirect mode for six seconds the CRD key lamp lights While in the CRD mode while the CRD key lamp lights press the line key of the incoming held call The call is transferred to the pre assigned destination station and the CID key lamp goes out Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 8 Multiline Terminals can operate the Call Redirect CRD simultaneously per system including the terminal which is on Caller ID Display CID mode If the CRD key is pressed on the 9th Multiline Terminal CRD key lamp lights in a moment 0 5 seconds then the call is transferred to the destination station CRD mode is continued for 6 seconds after the CRD key is pressed After 6 seconds the CRD key lamp goes out automatically and CRD mode is cancelled Two transfer d
151. Outside e Terminated by Off Hook Alarm e Terminated by Priority Call 12 The Attendant Console cannot be a member of a hunt group Station Hunting Terminal General Description When a pilot number is dialed and that number is busy sequential Station Hunting will be initiated However if anumber other than the pilot number is dialed and that number is busy busy tone will be provided rather than initiate Station Hunting Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions If all lines in a hunt group are busy the caller will receive busy tone Only calls to the pilot number will initiate a Terminal Hunt Calls to other stations in the Terminal Hunt group will ring at that station or receive busy tone The maximum number of stations that can be included in one Station Hunting group is 60 including the pilot station When the extension number used as a pilot number has set Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding will reroute the call and Station Hunting Terminal will not occur When an extension within the Station Hunting Terminal group other than the pilot extension sets Call For warding All Calls calls already in the hunt process will bypass the extension and continue hunting Calls directed to the extension versus directed to the pilot extension will follow the Call Forwarding setting When any extension except a pilot in a hunt group has set Do Not Disturb th
152. Page 200 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT General Description This service feature allows the system to be programmed to route outgoing calls over the most economical fa cility WATS FX DDD Based on the individual area code and office code dialed 6 digit analysis the sys tem examines the programmed tables and uses the trunk in the order specified Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the trunk access code and receive dial tone again Dial the area code office code and telephone number The system automatically completes the call using the most economical route Service Conditions 1 Least Cost Routing can be programmed to choose a route based on the following criteria e Digits dialed first 3 or 6 digits of the outside number e Day of Week e Time of Day e Tenant number e Route Advance In addition a special Digit Code Table is used to interpret the one two or three leading digits of the area code e g 01XX X International Call 0 Operator Call OXXX Toll Operator Call The system exam ines the Digit Code Table when an ORT timeout has occured after dialing leading digits In addition to selecting the route the system can be programmed to e Add the prefix digit 1 for use with FX lines requiring 1 dialing e Add up to 32 digits in front of the number dialed by the
153. Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the desired station number The DD LED flashes and reorder tone is received 3 Press the DDOVR key 4 The desired station will ring Service Conditions Refer to the Do Not Disturb feature for more details Stations are assigned to the DND group in station Class of Service either from the CAT or MAT The Attendant Console is able to verify and change the status of stations with respect to Do Not Disturb Fe Wile DND Override allows the Attendant to call stations in DND without changing their status NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 25 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Interposition Calling Transfer Attendant Interposition Calling Transfer General Description This feature allows any Attendant to directly converse with another Attendant and also allows Attendants to transfer calls from their console to another Attendant s console in systems where Multiple Console Operation has been provided Operating Procedure To call from console A to console B 1 NAS eS Attendant A presses an idle loop key Attendant A dials the Interposition Calling Transfer access code and Attendant B s identification number The call is indicated at console B on the Answer key or TF key Attendant B presses the Answer key or TF key Attendant A converses with Attendant B Attendant A and B press the RLS key To transfer from console A to console B
154. Press the RESET key The above two steps can be repeated for other stations 4 Press the RLS key To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation with station 1 Press the RC key 2 Press the SET key 3 Press the RLS key e To reset Room Cutoff from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument while engaged in conversation with station 1 Press the RC key 2 Press the RESET key 3 Press the RLS key Toll Call Restriction To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Press the STS key Dial the desired function status code Press the STS key again Dial the guest room station number Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for other stations Press the RLS key OR Press the STS key Dial the guest room station number ON NS 0 Os ES Press the SET key Room Status is displayed The above two steps can be repeated for other stations Press the STS key again Dial the desired function status code Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for other stations Press the RLS key Oy Oe tS To set Room Cutoff from a guest room station by maid or repair person Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Maid Status feature access code and receive special dial tone Dial the maid ID code Dial the desired function status code and receive service set tone Yo eS Replace the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel
155. RATION TERMINAL CAT General Description In addition to the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT programming of the system can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode and system data can then be changed To prevent unauthorized changes password levels are assigned providing authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure Refer to of the Command Manual for programming instructions Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 mn Programming from a CAT can only be accomplished when the system is on line The system must be initialized with default data before system data can be changed from the CAT All Multiline Terminals with LCD scanned during initialization will be CATs The commands CMO00 Office Data All Clear and CMO1 Office Data Partial Clear cannot be accessed from the CAT The CAT cannot delete itself from the system program Only two CATs can be in program mode at the same time The data that can be changed from the CAT can be limited by the Password level assigned There are eight levels of Passwords that can be assigned in system programming The relation between Password level and access to available commands is also assigned in system programming A password can consist of a maximum of any eight digits with the following limitati
156. RUNK QUEUING OUTGOING General Description This allows a station user upon encountering a busy signal on a trunk to dial a feature access code and enter a first in first out queue As soon as an outgoing trunk becomes available stations in the queue will be called back on a first in first out basis Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From Single Line Telephones When Least Cost Routing is not provided Dial the trunk access code and receive busy tone Press the FLASH key or momentarily press hook switch and receive feature dial tone Dial the Trunk Queuing Outgoing feature access code and receive service set tone Replace the handset TEA Ne When a trunk becomes idle the station is recalled When Least Cost Routing is provided Dial the trunk access code and receive PBX dial tone Dial the desired number and receive busy tone Press the FLASH key or momentarily press hook switch and receive feature dial tone Dial the Trunk Queuing Outgoing feature access code and receive service set tone Replace the handset NA OOD When the trunk becomes idle the station is recalled Once connected to the trunk the system automatically redials the number From Multiline Terminals When Least Cost Routing is not provided 1 Dial the trunk access code and receive busy tone 2 Press the assigned CALL BACK key and receive service set tone 3 Replace the handset When Least Cost Routing
157. Station B continues to ring until the VMS becomes idle even after the predetermined time for Call Forwarding No Answer has elapsed When the VMS becomes idle Station A is connected to the VMS d Direct access to VMS e If station A or outside party accesses the VMS directly the calling party hears busy tone Station A can set call back to the VMS 10 Multiple Call Forwarding to VMS When the final destination for any combination of Multiple Call For warding is the VMS calls can be transferred to the VMS The first forwarded station s number forwarded to the VMS is sent to the VMS For example a call is received by Station A which is forwarded to Station B which is forwarded to Station C which is forwarded to VMS The number of Station A is sent to the VMS 11 Ringing Transfer to an Attendant via the VMS The system allows the VMS to transfer the station or outside party to the Attendant and releases before the Attendant answers 12 When the VMS is recalled by transferring the call to an unanswered station the system may be programmed to send the recalling extension number to the VMS 13 A maximum of 26 digit extension numbers including DTMF signal after the VMS answered can be pro grammed to a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 333 VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD General Description Voice Mail Passwo
158. TEM 57 AUTOMATIC CAMP ON A A 58 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION AND oocccocccccccc tees 59 AUTOMA TIG REAL ist d taba AA EIA Riad 60 PUTAS ee WAKE UP AER EAR eS CES eee ee oho AAA AAA 62 BACKGROUND MUSIC acordas OSORNO ANA AAA NAAA 65 BOSOGECRETARY CALUNG iran AAA ANA A ers rere 66 e A A A REF A EE 69 A Ann 70 CALL FORWARDING e ir AA IDAS 72 Attendant Call Forwarding Set Up and Cancel ooococcccoccor 73 A AAA S Ae ee EP ETI RHOREI REE IEE ER ORES OA 74 Call Forwarding Busy UNG 6154 ch05ado000v0se Gander es VEG ASAE Hh EASE RAO EY RRR SKA 77 Eo e A Sn sabes Hee eeetaes 79 Call Forwarding Destination ce colsusrerr cirio ir 81 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls occ rica tarro dei ed 82 Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line nnna nananana 84 Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer 000 cee tees 84 Split Call Forwarding AMC rr AER AAA hee ee kee ey EA 85 Split Call Forwarding Busy Line cos ci cee biecee cee ceeteneciersne reseed aeeetescead 88 Split Call Forwarding No Answer 245 ceee scene AAA A 89 Call Forwarding Override ari A 91 Group A Ann 92 e E E eer eer rr Terre Ce ree ee ere ee Tere ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 93 Seg ae el III AAA ee er re re ee re rer a 93 Call asii ie ia e h a bekei io a ie a ia ea e y 664 E ede Shoe a deiei aa scenes 95 Re ee coset eect erste tate tole AR A 97 E etc be ee aSeeee conse E seh Pe ee beet eee eiee Late EE 97 CAMPOO AAA Rede KNEES DRESS DEES ARANA 98
159. Terminal when the analog terminal is in use is as follows e Single Port Mode The LED of the Prime Line lights green Note e Dual Port Mode The LED of the secondary extension lights red Note When answering the incoming call to the secondary extension on the Multiline Terminal and switching over to the analog terminal the LED of the secondary extension lights green 5 A Multiline Terminal analog terminal cannot be identified on the LCD on the Multiline Terminal in Single Dual Port Mode 6 The ringing pattern is fixed as 1 sec ON 2 sec OFF The distinctive ringing pattern cannot be provided for Single Dual Port Mode 7 The service feature with hooking operation is not allowed from the analog terminal for Single Dual Port Mode 8 In Dual Port Mode the analog terminal cannot originate from the secondary extension and cannot answer the incoming call to the secondary extension 9 In Dual Port Mode a call cannot be switched over from the Multiline Terminal to the analog terminal or vice versa NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 10 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE General Description This feature allows station users to record messages on Digital Announcement Trunk DAT cards When a sta tion user dials the feature access code for this feature the user receives the corresponding message from the sys tem Also Announcement Service can be used to provide
160. This feature allows a Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone to page a maximum of fifteen parties simulta neously including the originator After one of paged parties answers the paging becomes the 2 Way Calling be tween the originator and the first answered party automatically stops paging other parties The stations are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as a participants by the system data beforehand Station Application All Stations NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 175 GROUP CALL 2 Way Calling Operating Procedure To page stations of a group 1 2 Press the Speaker key or go off hook and receive a dial tone Dial the access code or press feature access key Multiline Terminal only for a desired paging group and receive a ringback tone To answer the paging 1 2 3 The called terminals receive ringing The LCD of the Multiline Terminal shows PAGING including the sta tion number of the originator Answer the ringing page from the originator Paging stops after one of paged stations answer Service Conditions 1 A maximum of fifteen stations are paged simultaneously including the originator Even if more than fifteen stations are assigned to one group except the leader the first fifteen stations are paged in order of registered number on the system deta Also one station can belong to multiple groups Single Line Telephones Multi
161. To set Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET XXXX or SET OPR Target Station Operator 4 The LED of the associated feature button lights 5 Restore the handset or press the Speaker key To monitor Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key The LCD displays CF BUSY XXXX Target Station 3 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To set Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone Press the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key and receive feature dial tone Dial the trunk access code and desired telephone number Wait till service set tone is received unless programming CM08 222 0 AS Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To cancel Call Forwarding Busy Line Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature access key and receive special dial tone Press the key and receive service set tone The LCD displays CANCEL and the associated LED goes out 3 Restore the handset or press the Speaker key
162. VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS General Description This feature permits assignment of circuits which do not physically exist to be used as secondary extensions on Multiline Terminals There are 256 software lines that can be assigned to line keys and used as desired Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Normal call processing procedures apply Service Conditions 1 A Software Line Appearance can be assigned as follows e Hotline e Intercom e Station Hunting pilot number e Automatic Uniform Call Distribution phantom number e Secondary appearance on Multiline Terminals e Pilot numbers for hunting groups and Automatic Uniform Call Distribution ACD UCD groups When accessing the Call Pickup feature the Software Line Appearance assigned as a secondary extension can only pickup calls directed to the group programmed for that secondary extension A Software Line Appearance can enter or access the Speed Dialing data on the station of the same Multiline Terminal on which it appears All Station Message Detail Recording SMDR data of the Software Line Appearance will be recorded as activity on the primary extension of the Multiline Terminal on which it appears including that on secondary extension appearances When a real number corresponding to an installed station is not used as a pilot number for Station Hunting or ACD UCD groups a software line can be us
163. VS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 250 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PRIVATE LINES PRIVATE LINES General Description Only a C O trunk assigned to that specific station is seized when a station user originates an outgoing C O call or when an incoming C O call is terminated at the station designated by Direct In Termination In this manner stations and C O trunks are to be associated on a 1 to 1 basis Station Application All Multiline Terminals and Single line Telephones Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Incoming and outgoing restriction assignments can be used to assure privacy 2 The following features are available e Conference e Delayed Ringing e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Call Transfer e Call Park e Call Hold e Save and Repeat e Last Number Redial e Broker s Call e Station Speed Dialing using feature keys 3 When an outgoing call is placed System Speed Dialing cannot be used The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy and green when being used by the station that selected that trunk 5 For further information refer to the Flexible Line Key Assignment Flexible Ringing Assignment and Trunk Direct Appearance features 6 This feature is valid for outgoing calls from a Single line Telephone or Multiline Terminal For an outgoing call multiple trunks can be designated per station so that one
164. a PN DKOO or built in DKOO in MP can be programmed to provide a contact clo sure for starting the external announcement or music source when used with a COT card When providing the internal announcement via a DAT card multiple connections can be made to the announcement card Secondary station users may be connected to the middle of the message Data for Automatic Wake Up programming is canceled by Check Out operation The number of Automatic Wake Up call attempts is programmable from 1 to 5 times If the station does not answer is busy in Line Lockout or ringing recalling is initiated one minute later Recalling is repeated up to 5 times Each call which fails is printed When the final attempt results in failure a buzzer is sounded at the printer and a flashing LED on the DSS BLF Console is available to indicate which station does not answer An APOO card is required for connection to a printer After Automatic Wake Up is set the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument is able to verify the setting on re quest The Automatic Wake Up set procedure is followed but a new wake up time setting need not be en tered Automatic Wake Up calls will not be rerouted by Call Forwarding or other features Page 64 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 BACKGROUND MUSIC BACKGROUND MUSIC General Description Background Music can be provided on a dial up basis over Multiline Terminal speakers I
165. a special access code to temporarily restrict guest room telephones from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from their room and when rooms are in Check Out status There are two types of Room Cutoff conditions depending on the type of calls restricted e External Call Restriction All outgoing calls from guest room stations are restricted in the Room Cutoff status Only internal calls are available e Toll Call Restriction All toll calls from guest room stations are restricted during Room Cutoff status Internal and local calls are available Station Application All stations except House Phones Operating Procedure External Call Restriction To set Room Cutoff from the Attendant Console 1 Dial the desired station number 2 Press the RC key 3 Press the Answer key 4 Press the RLS key e To cancel Room Cutoff from the Attendant Console 1 Dial the desired station number 2 Press the RC key 3 Press the RESET key 4 Press the RLS key e To set Room Cutoff from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 Press the RC key 2 Dial the desired station number 3 Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for other stations 4 Press the RLS key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 277 ROOM CUTOFF e To reset Room Cutoff from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 Press the RC key 2 Dial the desired station number 3
166. a voice message in the following cases e An incoming C O line Tie line call has been transferred and encounters a busy or no answer condition e An incoming DID line Tie line call has been terminated to a station and encounters a busy or no answer condition Internal Recorded Message in place of Music on Hold Night Announcement Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To access 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the applicable Announcement Service access code 3 Receive the message To erase an announcement 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Announcement Service delete access code 3 Receive feature dial tone 4 Dial the Announcement Service group number 5 Restore the handset To record 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Announcement Service record access code Dial the Announcement Service group number and the DAT card number Receive 3 seconds of service set tone Record a message Restore the handset DN UE O NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 11 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE To record replay delete for each Digital Announcement Trunk card To record a message 1 2 Go off hook and receive Dial Tone Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk record access code and Digital Announcement card number Three seconds of tone will be supplied Record the message maximum du
167. acsimile machine a related lamp on a predesignated Multiline Terminal is caused to light indicating reception of a facsimile call The lamp indication is as follows Status Indication Lamp red 120 ipm flash The chime beeps on start of message reception Receiving Receive End Lamp red Steady Lighting Not Receiving Clear Lamp Off Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To turn off the facsimile call lamp press the FACSIMILE INCOMING CALL key Service Conditions Note In the following service conditions the term facsimile station refers to the actual facsimile machine sin gle line station number Facsimile call station refers to the button assignment on the Multiline Terminal 1 The number of facsimile station numbers and facsimile call station numbers that can be assigned varies with each of the following cases a When Hot Lines Inside Outside are used to implement this feature a maximum of 100 facsimile stations can be assigned In addition a maximum of 100 facsimile call stations can be assigned b When House Phone groups are used to implement this feature a maximum of four facsimile stations can be assigned In addition there is no limit to the number of facsimile call stations that can be assigned to each facsimile station 2 Termination of a facsimile call is indicated on the lamp of the flexible line key to which a facsimile call station number is assigned 3 This
168. age even if the message is in the middle of a cycle The announcement is repeated until the call is removed from hold 10 A voice message can be sent to incoming C O calls during day or night mode a b c Different messages can be programmed on each C O line Different messages can be programmed for day night More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card circuit Secondary connections can be made in the middle of a message Announcements may be programmed to be repeated after an interval of from 4 to 120 seconds in 4 second increments NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 13 ANSWER KEY ANSWER KEY General Description An Answer Key is provided on all Multiline Terminals The Answer Key can be used to answer incoming calls on outside lines and primary or secondary extensions When the Answer Key is used to answer an incoming call with a call in progress the first party is placed on hold and the second party is connected If the Answer Key is pressed while in a three party call the user can alternate between each party and a Broker s Call is established Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To answer an incoming ringing call with a call in progress 1 2 3 4 Receive incoming indication Press the Answer key The original call is placed on Non Exclusive Hold Converse with the connected p
169. age 211 MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MCI 3 Follow the instructions given by the voice mail system To retrieve a voice mail message from the voice mail system 1 2 3 4 The Message Waiting lamp is lit or the LCD displays MESSAGE Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the voice mail extension number and receive ringback tone The LCD displays XXXX VMS Voice mail extension number Follow the instructions given by the voice mail system Service Conditions 1 10 11 12 The Voice Mail System VMS is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD 8LC card The 4LCD 8LC provides disconnect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided with the VMS station The Application Processor APOO is required to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal DTMF telephone or the Attendant Console but not from DP telephones The MCT is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station trunk Attendant to the VMS For de tails of the connecting patterns refer to the Installation Procedure Manual Feature Programming Manual Stations can set Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding All Calls No Answer and Busy Line to the VMS The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS A call to a station that has Call For warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS The
170. aintenance Admin istration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure Refer to the Maintenance Manual for operating procedures Service Conditions 1 The following station status information can be displayed on the MAT or CAT by direct command e Idle Line Lockout e Dialing e Tone Trunk Connection reorder tone busy tone service set tone etc e Types of Connection station to station three way calling voice calling holding etc e Destination number trunk number register number e Short circuit on line 2 The following trunk status information can be displayed on the MAT or CAT by direct command e Idle e Ringing in e Incoming queue to Attendant Console e Holding e Ina tandem connection e Incoming queue to UCD e Dialing e Receiving dialed digits 3 The following information is stored and can be displayed on the MAT or CAT using a memory dump com mand in hexadecimal format e Program address where an endless loop has occurred e Last initialization time for main program e Last initialization time for firmware program e The reason for initialization power on RESET key endless loop sense switch command from MAT or CAT 4 The system has a built in patrol program that monitors the status of all connected devices Additionally when no response or an invalid response from a device is received this program stores in memory the slot nu
171. aker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the MSG key The first station that set a message is called 3 Use the handset to speak when answered OR 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder retrieve access code 3 The station which set the message is automatically called 4 Converse when answered To set a message from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Message Reminder feature access code 3 Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone Message indication is set 4 Press the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition To cancel a message from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Message Reminder cancel access code 3 Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone Message indication is canceled 4 Press the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 216 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE REMINDER To cancel a message from the station that set it 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Message Reminder cancel code Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone The message is cleared at the dialed station Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 10 11 12 13 14 Single Line Telephones must be connected to a 4LCD SLC card for this feature to operate Single Line Tele phones must b
172. al 1 2 3 4 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone Press the MSG key Listen to the message Press the Speaker key or restore the handset Service Conditions Message Waiting 1 When Check Out is performed any remaining messages will be output to the printer and cleared from mem ory The Message Waiting function can be set even when the guest station is busy The Message Waiting lamp will not light while the guest station has the handset in use on Single Line Telephones Message Waiting status is displayed by the Message Waiting lamp on Single Line Telephones or Multiline Terminals Message Waiting can be automatically cleared by talking to the Attendant Console or the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument on a system basis If Message Waiting is not automatically cleared the reset operation is required A 4LCD 8LC card is required to provide Single Line Telephones with the Message Waiting function Sin gle Line Telephones must be equipped with Message Waiting lamps for 70VDC When multiple Message Waiting indications are initiated from various points Attendant Consoles Front Desk Instrument other stations etc clearing one message will remove the Message Waiting indication The flashing rate for the Message Waiting lamp on the Multiline Terminal is selected on a system wide basis for 60 IPM or lit steady NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 222 NDA 242
173. an a fixed number MP FP AP communication failure FP AP down DTI line failure DCH link failure CCH link failure Number of lockout stations was more than a fixed number SMDR output buffer memory overflow DLC failure AC DC power supply PZ PW121 Note 1 AC input down DC output down 5V 27V Fuse blown 5V 27V XI OK OK OK OK OK OK OK X Xx XI OK OK OK OK OK OK x X Xx XI OK OK OK OK OK OK OK X Xx XI OK OK OK x OK OK x x Xx X OK OK OK OK OK X OK X OK OK OK OK OK OOK OK Alarm for pre determined time Note 1 MJ ALARM is always displayed for power failure regardless of programming Note 2 When FP DLC which accommodates the Multiline Terminal becomes unusual Alarm Indications cannot be displayed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 5 ALARM INDICATIONS 2 Normal operation of each Firmware Processor FP is indicated by a green flashing 120 int run LED located on the FP 3 Normal operation of the Main Processor MP is indicated by a green flashing 120 int run LED located on the MP 4 Normal operation of each AC DC power supply is indicated by a steadily lit green LED located on the AC DC power supply 5 In case that PBX is stopped at predetermined time when PBX starts fault message is stored and alarm is sent 6 Al
174. an dial the digit 1 to change from Voice Announcement to Ring Tone or vice versa The Multiline Terminal assigned this feature can program the following two modes Voice Mode allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement Tone Mode allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure When a called Multiline Terminal has been set to Ring first 1 2 3 Press the extension line key and lift the handset Dial extension number The called party s extension will ring The handset must be used for reply OR Dial 1 Wait for voice page alert tone Voice announce call The called party can reply handsfree When a called Multiline Terminal has been set to Voice first Sa ae ln ae 6 Press the extension line key and lift the handset Dial extension number Wait for voice page alert tone Voice announce call The called party can reply hands free OR Dial 1 The called party s extension will ring The handset must be used to reply To set Voice Tone mode 1 2 Press the Speaker key Dial the Voice Tone Programming access code and receive feature dial tone The LCD will show the current mode of the Multiline Terminal Dial any single digit 0 9 Voice mode is switched to Tone mode or vice versa and Service Set tone is received NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 19
175. an lift the handset while receiving internal ring to talk to the secretary Boss line key appearance is steady green at the secretary s station and steady red elsewhere 6 The secretary then goes on hook whereby the calling party is connected to the boss Boss line key appear ance is steady red at all appearances OR The boss goes on hook and the secretary presses the Transfer key to return to the original call To set cancel Message Waiting Indication to the boss from the secretary station 1 Lift handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the boss extension number 3 Press the Message Waiting set cancel key Boss Message Wait Lamp is lit if set goes off if canceled For a Boss Secretary Override when the boss is busy on the primary extension of a Multiline Terminal and the secretary has a call on the primary extension of the secretary s Multiline Terminal 1 The secretary presses boss line key appearance on the secretary s Multiline Terminal The party that was connected to the secretary is placed on Hold and receives Music On Hold if provided Additionally the sec retary hears special ringback tone and the boss hears one burst of tone through the handset to indicate a call is waiting If the secretary presses the Transfer key before the boss answers the secretary is reconnected to the calling party The secretary s Answer key is ineffective in this situation 2 The boss presses the Answer key The party originally connected
176. an share an Automatic Intercom path The maximum number of Automatic Intercom paired stations per system is 32 More than one Automatic Intercom can appear on a Multiline Terminal Automatic Intercoms are private Each Automatic Intercom pair uses two extensions which can be software extensions no supporting hard ware is required Dual Hold with hold recall is available on Automatic Intercom Other extension features such as Call Trans fer Call Park etc are not available When the called terminal is busy the caller will receive busy tone Dial Intercom General Description Dial Intercom comprises up to 10 Multiline Terminals which can call each other using a dedicated Dial Intercom line key with abbreviated dialing Dial Intercom calls can be Voice Announce with Handsfree Answerback or ringing calls Station Application All Multiline Terminals NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 195 INTERCOM Dial Intercom Operating Procedure 1 2 3 2 The caller lifts the handset presses the Dial Intercom key and receives dial tone The caller dials the one digit Intercom code of the called Multiline Terminal 0 9 The called terminal receives a tone burst followed by Voice Announcement and can answer using Handsfree Answerback OR The caller can dial 1 to change the call to a ringing call Each 1 dialed changes the mode from ringing to Voice Announce or vice
177. and trunk identification code are displayed Attendant Loop Release General Description This feature allows an Attendant Console loop to become available for a second call as soon as the Attendant has directed the first call to a station even if that station does not answer Operating Procedure To operate 1 O The Attendant Console indicates incoming calls Press the Answer or appropriate Attendant Call Selection key Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone Before the station answers press the RELEASE key The loop is now available for another call To re enter the call that has been released from a loop before being recalled 1 2 3 Dial the Call Pickup Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the extension number of the ringing desired station Converse with the held party Service Conditions 1 Unanswered calls will be routed to the Attendant within the predetermined timing using Automatic Recall Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters Features and Specifications for more information Page 28 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Programming 2 If all Attendant loop circuits are busy when Automatic Recall is activated unanswered calls will be routed to the Attendant when idle loops become available Call Waiting CW shows on the LCD to indicate a call is waiting to be answer
178. ant Recalls e Emergency Calls e WATS Incoming Calls e Intercept Calls e Serial Calls e Tie Line Incoming Calls e Call Forward No Answer Calls Off Hook Alarm e Call Forward Busy Calls Special Operator Calls e Interposition Calling Transfer 3 Multiple Attendant Call Selection keys can be flashing at the same time The Attendant can select any in coming call by pressing the associated key or can answer on a first in first out FIFO basis using the An swer key Attendant Console Lockout Password General Description This feature allows the Attendant Console to be set into a lockout mode This disables the console from origi nating or receiving calls and setting or resetting service features To return the Console to its manual operating condition a password is required Station Application Attendant Console SN610 ATTCON NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 23 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Console Lockout Password Operating Procedure To set Attendant Console Lockout 1 2 5 Press an idle LOOP key The associated green LED lights Dial the feature access code or press the MODE key The associated red LED lights The LCD displays ACTIVE during normal mode and the green LED of the ACTIVE key lights Press the LKOUT key The associated red LED lights The LCD display changes from ACTIVE to LKOUT Press the Answer key and receive service set t
179. arding No Answer Features and Specifications for details on setting the No Answer for warding condition Service Conditions 1 This feature uses Call Forwarding No Answer to another UCD member to enable a call to an agent that fails to answer to hunt past that agent to the next agent 2 Calls directed to the agents primary extension number will also forward or a no answer condition to the next agent 3 Itis recommended when this feature is used that the Call Forwarding No Answer and the Call Forwarding Busy Line features be separately assigned use different access codes and keys Immediate Overflow UCD General Description This feature allows a call directed to a UCD group to immediately overflow to another UCD group upon en countering an all agents busy condition Station Application All UCD Pilot Stations Operating Procedure Refer to the Call Forwarding Busy Line Features and Specifications for details on setting the forwarding when busy condition Service Conditions 1 This feature uses the Call Forwarding Busy Line feature set on the UCD pilot extension to immediately forward the call to another UCD group upon encountering an all busy condition in the first group This feature works if the overflow destination is a UCD pilot number 3 When a call has terminated to UCD group A and all station in group A are busy and group B is assigned as the overflow destination using Call Forwarding Busy Line t
180. ards are mounted in the AP board slot of the Port Interface Module PIM 8 The following two methods may be used for network synchronization see below a Source Receiver System Source b Source Receiver System Receiver S Source office SS Sub Source office R Receiver office NEAX2400 IMX ra LR Local Receiver office Direction of clock signal supply a NEAX2000 IVS2 NEAX2400 IMX S Source office SS Sub Source office R Receiver office Direction of clock signal supply NEAX2000 IVS SS 9 The maximum number of trunks for DTI is 240 ports 10 24 DTI boards 24 ports DTI board or 8 30 DTI boards 30 DTI 31 ports DTI card The total number of ports DTI and other AP must be less than 256 ports 10 The NEAX2000 IVS includes built in PLO Source or Receiver mode only in the MP card NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 140 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID General Description This feature provides for incoming calls from the exchange network except FX or WATS to reach any station within the system without attendant assistance Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure The calling party outside the system dials the appropriate telephone number The call will ring directly at the called station bypassing the attendant Service Conditions This
181. ark by any station in the system Station Application All stations and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure To place a call into Call Park System From a Single Line Telephone Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold Dial the Call Park System feature access code Pe NS Dial the Call Park System location number 00 19 and receive service set tone If the Call Park number is busy dial another location number using the Step Call feature until an idle park location is accessed 5 Restore the handset e From a Multiline Terminal with LCD Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone 2 The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold 3 Dial the Call Park System feature access code The first available Call Park location is selected by the sys tem and displayed in the LCD Receive service set tone 4 Restore handset OR Press the Call Park System feature key and receive service set tone 2 Restore the handset e From a Multiline Terminal without LCD 1 Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone 2 The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold 3 Dial the Call Park System feature access code or press Call Park System feature key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 93 CALL PARK Call Park System 4 5 Dial the Cal
182. arm indication to Multiline Terminal lamp a The maximum number of Multiline Terminals per system is two b Incase of MN alarm Red flashing 60 int c Incase of MJ alarm Red lighting included MN MJ d When system FP is reset after lighting alarm lamp alarm indication will go off Fault information remains NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 6 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY General Description The LCD display on Multiline Terminal is used to provide alphanumeric information including clock calendar and call processing information Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure Displays are automatically provided by the system once programmed however a Multiline Terminal user s name can be changed as required from the associated Multiline Terminal To program a name at the Multiline Terminal to which the name applies 1 Press the Speaker key and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Name Assignment access code and receive special dial tone 3 Using the keypad press the key with the desired letter to display the first letter on the key The display will indicate the numerical designation Subsequent presses will advance through the letters on that key The fol lowing table can be used as a guide to indicate the key and the number of presses required to display num bers letters spaces and periods Dial Pad Keys 5 6
183. arty To return to the call on hold after the second call is completed press the line key associated with the call on hold To answer a Camp On call with a call in progress Ni Oe tS Receive Camp On tone Press the Answer key The original call is placed on Hold Subsequently pressing the Answer key alternates the active and holding parties Converse with the Camped On party When one conversation is complete go on hook The party on Hold will recall immediately Service Conditions The Answer key s LED will flash for Camped On calls The priority of Ringing Line Pickup and Ringing Assignment calls using the Answer key is as follows Voice Call b Incoming external call and recall to the primary extension c Incoming external call and recall to the trunk line appearance d Incoming internal call to the primary extension e Incoming calls to the secondary extension When a Multiline Terminal user is monitoring tones provided by the system extension dial tone busy tone etc and uses the Answer key to answer an incoming call the first call will not be placed on hold the tone connection will be abandoned Page 14 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ANSWER KEY 4 When a Broker s Call is in progress the Answer key cannot be used to answer incoming calls but will al ternate between the existing calls when pressed 5 When a three party Conference is in prog
184. arty on Consultation Hold When the station user hangs up the first and third parties are connected automatically Service Conditions 1 The station performing the Call Transfer can abandon the connection before the called party answers If the called station does not answer within the predetermined time a recall is initiated to the transferring station 2 Outgoing calls may be transferred immediately NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 102 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL TRANSFER Call Transfer Attendant 3 A three party Conference can be accessed from the Call Transfer state The three parties connected can be as follows e Three stations Two stations and one trunk One station and two trunks 4 A four party Conference can be accessed from the Call Transfer state by Multiline Terminals only When the Consultation Hold of a three party Conference connection is followed by calling another internal station a four way connection can be initiated Refer to the Conference Three Four party Features and Specifica tions for additional information 5 The maximum number of simultaneous Conferences per system is 16 Call Transfer Attendant General Description This feature permits a station user while connected to an internal or outside call to signal the Attendant and have the Attendant transfer the call to another station within the system or to an outside connection Station Application
185. as been rerouted is displayed rather than the station number the Attendant dialed 3 When Station Hunting has rerouted an Attendant to Station call the number of the station where the call has been rerouted is displayed rather than the station or pilot number the Attendant dialed 4 The trunk route designation and the trunk identification code are shown on the top line of the console s dig ital display during an Attendant to Trunk connection 5 All trunk routes will appear in the digital display with a designation DDD WATS FX TIE CCSA etc The trunk identification code 4 digits is programmable 6 Tenant information is not supplied in the digital display 7 By pressing the LOOP key of a call which has been camped on by the Attendant and then using the DEST key an Attendant can determine the trunk the station number and the station name if assigned to which the call is Camped On 8 When a trunk call has been rerouted by Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forward ing No Answer or intercept to the Attendant Console and the Attendant answers the call the trunk number and the called station number intermediate station number will be displayed and the SRC key LED will light 9 While the called station number is displayed the Attendant can transfer the call to a station hold the call or park the call Once any of these steps are taken the original called station number display cannot be r
186. ation Code Receive dial tone Enter the number to be called or access the desired feature Service Conditions The feature access code for Authorization Code can be one to three digits Authorization Code Limitations a Inthe case of a system with APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 10 digits If Check Code is provided limited to 8 digits If Forced Account Code is utilized the same number of digits must be assigned to Authorization Code and Forced Account Code e Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with Forced Account Code and Direct Inward Sys tem Access DISA Code b In the case of a system without APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 8 digits e Number of codes The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit number For details refer to APPENDIX 3 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will print an Authorization Code however masking of the Au thorization Codes is available if desired Authorization Codes are assigned in system data from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT Authorization Code changes the Class of Service for that call only If the system is designated as KF Registration this feature will not be available An Authorization Code can be assigned per a station number so that one code is used only on the specific station Application Processor APO1 is required Page 46 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Fe
187. ation for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 2 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 5 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Block 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Target station for Call Forwarding Busy Line No Station Speed Dialing 4 Replace the handset To cancel Split Call Forwarding Busy Line 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial Call Forwarding Busy Line cancellation code and receive service set tone Service Conditions 1 This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for Call Forwarding Busy Line the other is the target station assigned for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line The target stations for Split Call Forwarding are assigned in system programming 2 Either Call Forwarding Busy Line or Split Call Forwarding Busy Line can be selected for the feature available per tenant in system programming depending on the type of the incoming call which is an internal call attendant assisted call a Tie Line call or a C O call 3 Split Call Forwarding Busy Line allows any incoming Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Ter mination DIT
188. ation that has set Call Forwarding All Calls or Call Forwarding Busy Line Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls cannot be performed for data calls If a calling station has been set to Call Forwarding All Calls five times and encounters a sixth Call For warding All Calls the calling station is not forwarded but receives busy tone if the destination station is busy or ringback tone if the destination station is idle If the destination of Call Forwarding All Calls is set for Call Forwarding Busy Line and is busy for warding occurs When combining Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forwarding Busy Line and the fifth destination station is busy the calling party will hear busy tone If a destination in a Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls situation is busy and has not set Call Forwarding Busy Line or All Calls the calling party will receive busy tone If a destination station is busy the calling station can activate Call Back Camp On Message Reminder or Executive Override to that destination station When Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls occurs the display of the calling party s Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the station number to which the call was forwarded The display of the answering Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the calling party station or trunk and the called number If the destination station in a combined Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forwar
189. atures and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT AUTOMATED ATTENDANT General Description This feature allows the system to answer incoming trunk calls The system will supply a message and or dial tone to the caller The caller can then dial the desired extension number and be directed to that station Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure To record a message 1 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk record access code and the Digital Announcement Trunk card num ber Three seconds of tone will be supplied 3 Record the message maximum duration 60 seconds 4 Restore handset To replay a message 1 Go off hook and receive Dial tone 2 Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk replay access code and Digital Announcement card number 3 Receive a message 4 Restore handset To delete a message 1 Go off hook and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk delete access code and Digital Announcement card number 3 Receive Service Set Tone 4 Restore handset Service Conditions 1 Ifthe called station is busy or does not answer or the number dialed is a feature access code or trunk access code any one of the following operations can be set e The incoming trunk call can be released e A 2nd message and dial tone or dial tone can be supplied e An alternate call terminating destination Attendant Trunk Answer An
190. atus of a Multiline Terminal and maximum 16 Soft Keys can be set in each status If more than 4 Soft Keys are set in one status one Scroll Key should be assigned in every 4 Soft Keys 5 Pattern No 3 is fixed If Pattern No 3 is changed the only way to reset to default is to clear all data in the PBX and load the Resident System Program Help key is only available in Pattern No 3 for English or French 7 A maximum of eight station simultaneously can use the Help key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 264 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Soft Keys 8 The following list provides status and an example of the Soft Key function STATUS e Idle state e During dialing holding no call e During dialing holding a station trunk e During calling holding no call e During calling holding a station trunk e Being called e When called party is busy holding no call e When called party is busy holding a station trunk e When called party sets Do Not Disturb e Trunk busy e During speaking holding no call e During speaking holding a station trunk FUNCTION e Scroll Key e Function Keys The function assigned by CM90 FOXXX FIXXX and F50XX can be set to the Soft Keys by CM9A For details refer to the Command Manual lt Example gt MIC ON OFF Save and Repeat Call Pickup Direct Call Forwarding All Call Forwarding Busy N A Outgoing Queuing Do Not
191. aximum of 16 ACD groups can be assigned per system Each ACD group is assigned a pilot number Calls directed to the pilot number are directed to that ACD group The maximum number of stations in an ACD group is 60 The maximum number of ACD groups in the sys tem is 16 The total number of ACD stations may not exceed the system limits of 256 Ds and 512 ports If ACD MIS is used the maximum number of ACD stations is 60 Assignment of ACD groups is performed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Cus tomer Administration Terminal CAT ACD groups consist of a pilot station and one or more member stations Hunting is initiated in a circular fashion and then based on which member has been idle the longest period of time If all stations within the ACD group are busy incoming calls may be serviced in the following ways e Remain in queue until an agent becomes available Ringback Tone provided e Immediately overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant e Remain in queue until an agent becomes available Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided e Remain in queue for a preset time Ringback Tone Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided then overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding All Calls incoming calls to the ACD group will be trans ferred to the destination of that Call Forwarding All Calls setting An ACD group numbe
192. b Set Cancel using DND key e Automatic Wake Up No Answer Cancel using WU key 9 A4DLC 8DLC card is required when a DSS BLF Console is installed Busy Out Status Console General Description This feature allows a DSS BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Busy Out Sta tus Console This feature is activated by use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Busy Out Status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button Station Application All stations with an associated DSS BLF Console Operating Procedure To display station Busy Out BYO status 1 Press the Function Mode key on the DSS BLF Console assigned for Busy Out Status display An LED as sociated with the BYO key lights When stations are currently in the Busy Out state their associated LED will light green 3 Press the same Function Mode key to return to DSS BLF mode if desired NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 149 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE Do Not Disturb Console Service Conditions If the system is initialized Reset the Console Function Mode will return to DSS BLF The Busy Out Status of a station cannot be set or cancelled from a Busy Out Status Console 3 Refer to the DSS BLF Console and the Uniform Call Distribution Features and Specifications for more de tails Do Not Disturb Console General Description
193. ble pause for System and Station Speed Dialing 1 5 1 5 3 4 5 6 8 10 or 12 Night Service announcement timer 60 64 0 120 4 sec increments Timing of Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer after second forwarding 32 36 0 120 4 sec increments Interval time of UCD delay announcement 32 36 0 120 4 sec increments Automatic Recall of Attendant held calls 31 2 33 6 0 0 124 8 2 4 sec increments in 2 4 33 6 sec 9 6 sec increments in 38 4 124 8 sec Elapsed Time before Call Forward No Answer for internal and assisted calls 32 36 0 120 4 sec increments Message Replay Timer for Automatic Wake Up Timed Reminder 60 64 0 396 4 sec increments Message Relay Timer for Announcement Service 60 64 0 396 Forced Disconnection Timer on Tandem Connection 204 238 minutes 136 544 minutes 34 minute increments NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 328 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VOICE GUIDE VOICE GUIDE General Description This feature provides a station user with an announcement that informs 1 The result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature instead of service set tone 2 Identifies which service has been set to the station such as Call Forwarding All Calls Do Not Disturb or Message Waiting when the station goes off hook instead o
194. by Music on Hold if provided After a pre determined interval time the system checks to see if an overflow destination has been assigned for the incoming trunk route If assigned and the destination is available idle the call overflows to the destination If not assigned or the destination is busy the call remains in queue for the predetermined interval time and the system then checks again for overflow assignment For the latter case if repetition of first announcement is set or second announcement is made available that announcement will be played Note Repeat of the first announcement or receipt of second announcement is only available when the overflow des tination for the trunk route is busy not available Overflow out of queue causes the caller to be removed from the queue This means that if the overflow des tination out of queue is another ACD group the caller is placed at the end of that queue if all agents are busy and is no longer in queue for the first group One DAT Digital Announcement Trunk circuit is required for each Delay Announcement MP card in cludes 2DAT circuits and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4DAT circuits Delay Announcements cannot be shared between groups Each group must have their own set of Delay An nouncements Multiple DAT circuits may be assigned for Ist or 2nd Delay Announcement function to the same ACD group when warranted by high traffic rates into the group When an ACD station become
195. call 2 Press the DEST key and receive busy tone 3 Press the CANCL key and automatically return to the held party To re enter the call that has been Camped On from the Attendant Console before being recalled 1 Press the LOOP key corresponding to held call 2 The busy station number and name are displayed for six seconds in the left side of the console s display if provided by System Data 3 Converse with the held party OR Dial the Call Pickup Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone Dial the extension number of desired busy station 3 Converse with the held party To answer an Attendant Camp On From a Single Line telephone Receive a Camp On tone Hang up and receive incoming ring existing call is abandoned 3 Lift the handset and converse OR Receive a Camp On tone 2 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch The call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 18 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CAMP ON 3 Dial the Call Hold feature access code The original call is placed on Call Hold and the station user is auto matically connected to the Camp On call e From a Multiline Terminal Receive a Camp On tone Hang up and receive incoming ring 3 Lift the handset and converse OR Receive a Camp On tone 2 Press the Answer key The call in progress is placed on Call Hold and the Camp On ca
196. call on Nonexclusive or Exclusive Hold during a three or four party Conference The conference members do not receive hold music but can con tinue talking 8 Automatic Recall will follow any Call Forwarding assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 61 AUTOMATIC WAKE UP AUTOMATIC WAKE UP General Description This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or administration stations at specified times Upon answering the guest is connected to a recorded announcement or music source A printout of unanswered or blocked Automatic Wake Up attempts for each guest room is provided using the Hotel Motel printer Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Automatic Wake Up from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 2 DN ES ER ES N Press the WK UP key Dial the desired wake up time Note a In 24 hour format military format dial four digit number b In 12 hour format dial four digit number and then if p m time dial Press the WK UP key Dial the station number Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations Press the RLS key OR Press the WK UP key Dial the station number Press the SET key Dial the desired wake up time Note a In 24 hour format military format dial four digit number b In 12 hour format dial four digit number and then if p
197. can be set by an Attendant Console the individual station user a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension or from an other station which can program itself to be the destination of the rerouting Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal with LCD To set Call Forwarding All Calls Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone Press the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone The associated LED lights and the LCD displays SET XXXX or SET OPR Target Station Operator 4 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To set Call Forwarding All Calls Outside Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone Press the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive feature dial tone Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number Wait till service set tone is received unless programming CM08 222 0 A AS Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To monitor Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or special dial tone when lifting the handset 2 Press the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key The LCD displays CF CALL XXXX Target Station 3 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key
198. cation All stations Operating Procedure To set Message Reminder from a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder set access code 3 Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone 4 The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp on the dialed Single Line Telephone lights To set Message Reminder from a Multiline Terminal without calling the station to be set 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Message Reminder set access code 3 Dial the desired station number Feature dial tone is received and the LCD displays SET XXXX where XXXX is the dialed station number 4 The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp on the dialed Single Line Telephone will light to indicate a message has been set To set Message Reminder from a Multiline Terminal after dialing the station to be set 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired station number Ringback tone or busy tone is received 3 Press the Message Reminder MSG key or dial 6 1f single digit feature access codes are enabled Service set tone is received and the LCD displays SET XXXX where XXXX is the dialed station number 4 The MSG LED on the dialed Multiline Terminal or MW lamp will light to indicate a message has been set To retrieve a message from a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal
199. cation ANI Automatic Recall Mii Iii id a did pd mimilimilim ill Jimi om Automatic Wake Up Back Up CPU Background Music Boss Secretary Calling Broker s Call Call Back Call Forwarding Attendant Call Forwarding Set Up and Cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Destination Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line XI X X OK X OK X OK OK OK OK X OK X X X OK OK X OK OK X X OK OK X OK X OK OK X OK OK x KY Xx lili mimimiJimiiJiJiJ Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page x NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF FEATURES FEATURE Split Call Forwarding All Calls X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 NEAX2000 IVS x y Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Split Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Override Group Diversion Call Park Call Park System Call Park Tenant Call Pickup Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Designated Group Call Redirect Call Transfer Call Transfer All Calls Call Transfer Attendant Caller ID Class
200. cations associated with the SN716 DESKCON refer to the following pag es which describe the SN610 ATTCON features and specifications Station Application Attendant Console SN716 DESKCON Operating Procedure The same operating procedures as the SN610 ATTCON are applied for each feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 20 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Called Calling Name Display Service Conditions 1 Each Firmware Processor FP can support up to 8 Attendant Consoles SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON A maximum of 8 Attendant Consoles SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON can be support ed per system Each SN716 DESKCON uses a 3 pair cable This cable cannot be longer than 4000 feet 1200 meters The SN716 DESKCON is equipped with an Alarm LED This LED will flash for Minor Alarms and light steadily for Major Alarms Refer to Maintenance Administration Terminal Fault Messages for more infor mation Refer to the following chart for cable distances Refer to the following chart for cable distances A AA A 4 port DLC and 2 DLCC 1000 feet 304 meters 4000 feet 1219 meters 8 port DLC 1000 feet 304 meters 1000 feet 304 meters Note The SN716 DESKCON uses the PWOO card mounted in the PBX or the D Series E AC DC Adapter o IN not both The SN716 DESKCON does not support the Lockout feature Position Busy replaces the Lockout feature The system does not suppo
201. ccess by tenants When Multiple Console Operation is applied a master Attendant Console must be designated to place mul tiple tenants into Night Service A different music source for Music On Hold maximum 10 may be used for each tenant Music On Hold on a tenant basis has a choice for holding held party control in the music source Relay control is available for each of 10 tone sources NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 304 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TIE LINES TIE LINES General Description This feature allows any station user dial access or direct access to an E amp M Tie Line Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To dial access an E amp M Tie Line 1 Lift handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial E amp M Tie Line access code 3 Dial desired number To directly access an E amp M Tie Line 1 Lift handset or press Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press line key assigned E amp M Tie Line 3 Dial desired number Service Conditions Tie Line access may be denied to individual stations through Class of Service 2 When a power failure occurs without reserve power backup all existing E amp M Tie Line connections and access to E amp M Tie Lines is lost 3 Each tie line group can be programmed for both rotary and pushbutton address signaling incoming and or outgoing 4 The system can only be equipped with dial repeating tie lines Immediate start de
202. ce 35 Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS 0 0 0 cece ee 36 INSUR Call SCG rra OKI SSD AAA EANA E OS 37 GINA Trunk ACCESS esuir asar cer AA a 37 A A II e een REEE 38 Multiple Console OOOO cos dentales AA 38 Pushbutton Calling gt Attendant ON Y sctencescetastestcctigaeeea Na 39 TE or a os 39 WING CASPA sena EA EAN RANA ATAR AAN 40 Trunk Group Busy DIES rr ARA REER EE EA E 40 Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Transfer By Attendant ooooooocooornrnnno 41 ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ccocosorrcs cbse sds tias ie a iria betes cs 42 ATTENDANT LOCKOUT ce Beek eo dee nes noes bh ieir r R AN 43 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page i TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ATTENDANT COWVERF LIW AEREA ATRAE ARA RA AAA A 44 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE ua can AAA AAA AA ARANDA 45 ATREA ONE paa AA a ee ee ee 46 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT AAA soe eset oSeeeeees Hee 47 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION tA cob cc actae anib aioi ai ae aa a a aa a a a a ea e a aa 49 Busy wBusy CNS ACD riada arar AA 50 Call Waiting Indication A o In 51 Delay Announcemenl ACD srta RIIIE a ETRAS OEE ORD ARA 51 Hunt Past No Answer ACD ar rn AAA NAAA 52 immediate Overloon e AAA ede Roce Eue AE e a a ek 53 Pionty Queuing ACD socs te cok ecm tence couse A 54 Queue Size Contool FGDs inf 65434 00eS hehe Gaw AAA 54 olen Mona AUD AA ooo A AAA DARA a A 4 55 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYS
203. cel Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the DND function key and the associated LED goes out If equipped with an LCD the display will indicate CANCEL 3 Press the Speaker key From the Attendant Console To set an individual station in DND 1 Dial the desired station number 2 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 155 DO NOT DISTURB 3 4 Press the START key The DD LED lights steady and service set tone is received Press the RELEASE key To cancel an individual station in DND 1 2a 3 4 Dial the desired station number Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out Press the RELEASE key To seta group of stations in DND 1 2 3 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes Press the START key and the DD LED lights steady The designated group is now in DND To cancel a group of stations in DND 1 2 3 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out The designated group is no longer in DND To call a station that set DND Attendant Only 1 2 3 4 Press an idle LOOP key Dial the station number and the DD LED flashes and reorder tone is received Press the DDOVR key The station will ring Service Conditions 1 10 Calls to stations that are i
204. ch tenant However a single common Attendant Console may be shared by two or more tenants The number of Attendant Consoles per tenant is limited to the sum total of the system Interoffice calling between tenants may or may not be restricted depending on system data programming Different tenants may share a common group of trunks where required When a station dials access code 0 it will be connected to the associated Attendant There are 4 different numbering plans Different tenants can utilize the same numbering plan when neces sary The system can provide tenant service up to a maximum of 64 tenants Programming on the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT is common to the system Station to Station Call Transfer Conference and Trunk Answer any Station between tenants can be al lowed or denied in system programming The same feature access code s can be shared between tenants When more than one numbering plan is assigned in the system more than one Day Night Mode Change By Station Dialing access code can be assigned When the access code is dialed by a station only the associated tenant will be placed in Night Service One APOO board is required for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR The same AP0O board is ap plied to all tenants Paging can be shared between tenants or the assignment of different paging zones and different numbering plans allow for individual paging a
205. ching has been registered the LCD shows the lowest memory block number available for the Multiline Terminal f After searching the Multiline Terminal user can search next speed calling number by pressing UP or DOWN key UP displays the lower number than the block number displayed DOWN2 displays the higher number than the block number displayed When the block number reaches the lowest highest by pressing UP or DOWN key one more pressing rounds to the highest lowest memory block number g When searching is performed the first 24 digits are displayed if the number exceeds 24 digits including memory block number h When system utilize the Speed Calling Station memory block 0 1 2 and 3 for Speed Calling System another SYS Soft Keys should be assigned for each memory block basis e Speed Calling System 300 memory F5014 standard e Speed Calling System 1000 memory Block No 0 F5016 e Speed Calling System 1000 memory Block No 1 F5017 e Speed Calling System 1000 memory Block No 2 F5018 e Speed Calling System 1000 memory Block No 3 F5019 When the Speed Calling System memory is limited to use by CM08 searching of the Speed Calling System 1000 memory should not be done Pressing SYS key is ineffective i When Speed Calling Security is effective the speed calling number is not displayed on Multiline Terminal LCD but the name is displayed on Multiline Terminal LCD NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Feature
206. ck up Designated Group feature access code and any station within the group to which the ringing station belongs Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Ringing telephone in another Call Pickup Group 1 Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial Call Pickup Designated Group feature access code 3 Dial any station number within the Call Pickup Group to which the ringing station belongs 4 Converse Service Conditions 1 All ringing calls directed to an extension in a Call Pickup Group can be picked up by this feature except for Trunk Queuing Outgoing and Call Back This feature can not be activated from feature dial tone 3 A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C O call If more than one station within the group is ringing the system will connect the calls in the order in which the system data for the group is stored NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 99 CALL REDIRECT CALL REDIRECT General Description Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminates to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal the calls can be transferred to a pre programmed station or Voice Mail System Two transferring destination number can be designated per tenant in system data programming This feature can be used together with the Caller ID Display feature Station Application All Multiline Terminals
207. code 2 access code for Maid Status Dial 1 and receive service set tone Restore the handset To cancel Pad Lock from a station o OS BD Lift the headset and receive dial tone Dial the Pad Lock access code 1 access code for Authorization Code Dial Authorization Code and receive dial tone Dial the Pad Lock access code 2 access code for Maid Status Dial 2 and receive service set tone Restore headset Service Conditions 1 SO This feature restricts telephones from making C O outgoing calls and or terminating calls from C O trunks stations and Attendant Stations in Pad Lock status are able to place Station to Station calls and outgoing calls using Attendant assisted calling If the station under Pad Lock status dials a C O line access code the station is rerouted to one of the fol lowing a Reorder Tone b Attendant Calls to stations in Pad Lock status will receive reorder tone or on a tenant basis can be assigned to transfer to the Attendant The Pad Lock access code 1 and 2 can be one to three digits About Authorization Code Limitations refer to Authorization Code Features and Specifications Authorization Codes are assigned in system data from the MAT or CAT Pad Lock status will continue unless it is cancelled NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 243 PAD LOCK 8 An Authorization Code can be assigned per station number so that one
208. code is used only on the specific station Application Processor APO1 is required 9 This feature cannot be used in the hotel system using Maid Status feature 10 Application Processor AP00 is required to supply the Pad Lock feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 244 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE General Description This feature provides a periodic tone to the station user who has made an outgoing call This feature can be allowed or denied for each station Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 This feature is allowed or denied in the stations Class of Service assignment using the Maintenance Admin istration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT Additionally this feature can be allowed or denied on a system basis for C O lines and Tie Lines 2 The Periodic Time Indication Tone is 80 ms in duration The interval between tones is programmable from 32 seconds to 724 seconds 180 seconds as set in default 3 Outgoing calls initiated by the Attendant will not have this feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 245 POOLED LINE ACCESS POOLED LINE ACCESS General Description A line key can be assigned to access Pooled Lines Each line key will allow incoming out
209. computer to control the function of the system The system can be customized to accommodate most customer applications Application software can be provided by NECAM an outside software house or a customer Operating Procedure For operating procesures see the individual OAI features Note For more detailed information consult the manuals for each individual OAI feature Service Conditions 1 This feature requires the following hardware software SPN CC04 ETHER INT AP e APM Platform Software Rel FD 600C e OAI Application FD 600C Specific Application Software OAI Computer If the host computer goes off line for any reason all OAI features will be unavailable 3 Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber s number for Automatic Identification ANT can be sent out to the OAI Computer by system programming 4 This feature supports TAPI 2 1 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 242 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PAD LOCK PAD LOCK General Description This feature temporarily restricts telephones from making unauthorized calls by dialing special access code when station users are away from their seats Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Pad Lock from a station 1 DAD SM Lift the headset and receive dial tone Dial the Pad Lock access code 1 access code for Authorization Code Dial Authorization Code and receive dial tone Dial the Pad Lock access
210. configured as Loop Start or E amp M type lines Analog E amp M type lines e Analog Loop Start lines Note These lines must be ordered from the C O as CAMA type trunks NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 162 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 EXECUTIVE CALLING EXECUTIVE CALLING General Description This feature allows a station to be assigned a VIP class This provides special ringing to a called station when that station is idle and automatic sending of three tone bursts to a called station when that station is busy pro vided the call was originated from a station assigned as VIP class Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To initiate an Executive Call 1 2 3 4 The station assigned as VIP class goes off hook The station dials another extension If the called station is busy three tone bursts will be sent to the called party to indicate there is a call waiting The called party can now hang up and answer the Executive Call If the called station is idle a distinctive ring will be sent to the called party to indicate an Executive Call is ringing in Service Conditions Executive Calling VIP class is assigned in Class of Service This feature is station based This feature applies only when a station assigned for VIP class is used When a Single Line Telephone s extension is assigned as VIP class all internal calls originated from that station are Executive Calls
211. ctly accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Mul tiline Terminal Busy status for each station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button In addition the DSS BLF console can provide the following functions e Message Waiting Set Cancel Status Display e Do Not Disturb Set Cancel Status Display e Automatic Wake Up No Answer Status Display Cancel e Agent Busy Out UCD Status Display e Line Lockout Status Display e Room Cutoff Set Cancel Status Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To initiate a call Press the desired DSS key 2 Lift handset and converse when party answers OR Lift handset and receive dial tone Press the desired DSS key 3 Converse when party answers To display Line Lockout status No manual operation is required When stations are currently in Line Lockout mode their associated LED will flash red at 30 ipm Service Conditions A Multiline Terminal can be equipped with as many DSS BLF Console units as necessary 2 The maximum number of DSS BLF Console is 8 per Firmware Processor FP The maximum number of DSS BLF Console that can be programmed in the system is 32 DSS BLF Add On Modules 3 A maximum of 60 Direct Station Selection keys can be assigned on each DSS BLF Console When a call is made using the DSS BLF Console the associated Multiline Terminal s LCD displays the same indication that is provided for internal calls made
212. d Dialing Data Adapter Last Number Redial Least Cost Routing 3 6 Digit Line Lockout Line Preselection Maid Status Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT ii ii mis Message Center Interface MCI Message Registration L m Z Z ojo ojo Message Reminder m Message Waiting Miscellaneous Trunk Access CCSA Access Code Calling Equipment Access Dictation Equipment Access Foreign Exchange FX Access Radio Paging Equipment Access Wide Area Telephone Service WATS Access Multiline Terminal Attendant Position Music on Hold Nailed Down Connection Data Night Service X X X OK X OK OK X OK OK OK OK X OK X KY XK OK OK OK X OK X OK X X X X OK OK OK KY X OK x lt ill II bilby y miJ Jim NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page xiii TABLE OF FEATURES X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 FEATURE NEAX2000 IVS Attendant Night Transfer Call Rerouting Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing Night Connection Fixed x y Night Connection Flexible Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Off Hook Alarm Off Premises Extensions Open Application Int
213. ding Busy Line situation is Call Forwarding No Answer Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer will be put into effect If the destination station of Call Forwarding No Answer is set to Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding All Calls forwarding will be restricted If two stations have set Call Forwarding All Calls to each other an incoming call to either of these stations will not be forwarded therefore an infinite loop cannot occur If the incoming call returns to a station that has already taken part in a Multiple Call Forwarding Busy or All Calls of that call Call Forwarding All Calls service from that station is not be performed again If an incoming call encounters Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls and the final destination of the call for ward is the Attendant Console the incoming call will appear on the ATND key If a station has set Call Forwarding All Calls to another station in a different tenant and that station is set to Call Forwarding Busy Line or All Calls to the Attendant Console the calling station will be connected to the first station s Attendant Console A Direct In Termination call to a station which has set Call Forwarding All Calls will be forwarded The call can be forwarded to another station or to an Attendant Console If the destination station of Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls is in a hunt group and is set to Call For warding Busy Line to a station in
214. e Dial the desired number Service Conditions 1 E ON a The maximum number of digits in the Forced Account Code is programmable for the entire system from 1 to 8 or 10 digits The Forced Account Code access code can be 1 to 3 digits Forced Account Code Limitations a Inthe case of a system with APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 10 digits If Check Code is provided limited to 8 digits The same number of digits must be assigned to Authorization Code and Forced Account Code e Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with Authorization Code and Direct Inward System Access DISA Code b In the case of a system without APO1 card e Number of digits 1 digit 8 digits e Number of codes The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit number For details refer to APPENDIX 3 Both Authorization Code and Forced Account Code can be provided for the same system Stations are assigned this feature according to Class of Service programming in system data Forced Account Codes are recorded in the System Message Detail Records Existing restriction assignments will be applied even after a Forced Account Code is entered If the system is designated as KF registration this feature is not available A Forced Account Code can be assigned per a station number so that one code is used only on the specific station Application Processor APO1 is required NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Spec
215. e displayed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 22 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Call Selection Attendant Call Selection General Description This feature allows assignment of keys on the Attendant Console to particular types of trunk routes such as WATS or FX and particular types of service calls such as Attendant recalls intercept calls etc LEDs indicate the type of incoming call and pressing the associated key allows the Attendant to answer the calls in any order Operating Procedure 1 The Attendant presses a key that has a flashing lamp according to the desired priority this allows override of priorities assigned to the use of the Answer key The Attendant identifies the incoming call by trunk route or service type 3 Normal call handling procedures are used Service Conditions 1 The six keys located on the left side of the console can be assigned for Attendant Call Selection For SN716 DESKCON 7 keys out of upper 20 keys can be assigned In addition the upper 12 keys can also be assigned for Attendant Call Selection instead of loops and function keys SN610 ATTCON only A flashing LED on these keys means a call waiting to be answered and a steadily lit LED indicates an existing connection 2 Trunk routes and services can be assigned for Attendant Call Selection as follows e CO Incoming Calls e Operator Calls e Priority Calls FX Incoming Calls e Attend
216. e no need to dial access code A again 3 Dial the number of the first party to be added to the conference Press the Transfer key after the party answers and then dial the access code B to add then into the con ference 5 Sequentially call all desired parties and connect them to the CFT trunk by dialing the assigned access code B The called party station C O Tie line waits in the Conference mode until the leader is connected to the CFT trunk 6 After connecting the last participant to the CFT trunk dial the access code B to enter the CFT trunk and Conference can be started To release a participant Conference leader goes on hook or an Attendant presses the RLS key 2 Go off hook or press the loop key again Dial the access code C for forced release dial the participant s number Conference number 1 to 5 for a 6 party Conference or 1 to 9 for a 10 party Conference Confer ence numbers are allocated in calling order from the Conference leader 3 Dialed Conference number of Station or C O Tie line party is released from CFT trunk and party hears re order tone 4 The leader returns to CFT trunk Using the feature key of a Multiline Terminal To make a Conference Call The 6 Party or 10 Party Conference feature key and a maximum of 5 or 9 line keys for participants must be as signed to the Multiline Terminal of the conference leader 1 Conference leader Press the line key 2 Dial the n
217. e 321 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Silent Monitor UCD Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of queuing in each UCD group hereinafter called Queue Size can be specified by the system data When the number of queuing calls reaches the preassigned queue size new calls receive Busy Tone Depending on the queue size the Overflowed UCD call indication on a Multiline Terminal or on the external indicator is provided as shown below Queue Size assigned by system data S Number of queuing calls N LAMP INDICATION NDITION ee ONS Multiline Terminal External Indicator Steady on red Steady on red Flashing red Silent Monitor UCD General Description This feature provides the UCD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to a UCD agent The silent monitor function gives no indication as an option to either the agent or the calling party Station Application All UCD group agents can be monitored All UCD group supervisors can monitor Operating Procedure To monitor a conversation To cancel monitoring Supervisor only 1 2 4 5 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone Dial the monitor feature access code or press the MONITOR key Dial the extension number to be monitored Monitor the conversation via the handset or the speaker Restore the handset or press the Speaker key to cancel monitoring CAUTION The use of monitoring record
218. e DNDOVR key will override the DND condition To activate Do Not Disturb Message Waiting and Room Cutoff 1 Press the applicable function button 2 Dial the desired station number where feature is to be set or canceled This procedure is not required when speaking with that station in a Station to Station call or when setting the group functions 3 Press the SET key to set the desired function OR Press the RESET key to cancel the desired function 4 Repeat the above steps if multiple station assignments are desired OR Press the RLS key to exit feature activation Note For alternate operating procedures refer to the applicable feature To activate Do Not Disturb Group or Room Cutoff Group 1 Press the DD or RC key 2 Press the GROUP key 3 Press the SET key 4 Press the RLS key To cancel Do Not Disturb Group or Room Cutoff Group 1 Press the DD or RC key 2 Press the GROUP key 3 Press the SET key 4 Press the RLS key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 186 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT To activate Automatic Wake Up 1 A A SP END a 6 Press the WK UP key Dial the desired Wake Up time in military format in one minute increments Press the WK UP key Dial the station number Press the SET key Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated for additional stations Press the RLS key OR Press the WK UP key Dial the station number
219. e Lockout condition and receives no tone Upon replacing the handset the station is released from the Line Lockout condition For Line Lockout with howler tone assigned 4 The station user goes off hook and receives dial tone If the user doesn t begin dialing within approximately 12 seconds reorder tone is received After 30 seconds of reorder tone the station is automatically placed into the Line Lockout condition and howler tone 30 seconds on 30 seconds off is sent to the station Upon replacing the handset the station is released from the Line Lockout condition Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 A station in Line Lockout condition cannot receive or originate calls The Attendant cannot activate any feature to a station in a Line Lockout condition Howler tone can be allowed or denied on a per station basis This feature will also be activated if 12 seconds elapse between dialing digits NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 206 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 LINE PRESELECTION LINE PRESELECTION General Description This feature provides the station user with two ways to select an idle held recalling or ringing line before going off hook Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Press the desired line key 2 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone or answer the incoming call OR 1 Press the line key and receive dial tone or ans
220. e Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line and Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer Direct Inward Dial DID lines DIT calls Tie lines ring transfer and internal incoming calls will follow the Call Forward setting Only the destination station can call the station that is Call Forwarded If the Call Forward is rerouted to a hunt group and all members of the hunt group are busy the forwarded caller will receive busy tone If the Call Forward is rerouted to the pilot number of an Automatic Uniform Call Distribution UCD group and that pilot station has set Call Forward the call will be forwarded When Call Forwarding All Calls Outside is set the system can be programmed to allow or deny the set ting of the Call Forward with only a trunk access code This can be set on a system wide basis In the SMDR call record the station that set Call Forwarding All Calls Outside will appear as the orig inator of the call SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer supervision The setting station s trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For warding All Calls Outside Checking of the setting station s trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system wide basis A Direct Inward System Access DISA call to a station set for Call Forwarding All Calls Outside will be allowed or denied based on the forwarded station
221. e Trunk Queuing Outgoing Call Back will return to the originating station not to the Call Forwarding terminating station Account Code information can be recorded on Station Message Detail Recording SMDR when used in conjunction with Trunk Queuing Outgoing If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 313 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION General Description This feature provides any station user with the ability to conference together two outside trunk calls and abandon the connection without dropping the Trunk to Trunk Connection Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To establish a Trunk to Trunk Connection from a Single Line Telephone 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch The original call is placed on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received Dial the applicable trunk access code 3 Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch A Conference is now in progress OR Restore the handset The original caller and the second party are now connected To establish a Trunk to Trunk Connection from a Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Transfer key The original call is placed on Consultation Hold and feature dial tone is received Dial the applicable trunk access c
222. e abbreviated call code 2 or 3 digits Converse when the party answers Service Conditions 1 9 System Speed Dialing can be allowed or denied to individual stations in that station s Class of Service as signment System Speed Dialing may also be allowed or denied on a per tenant or system wide basis System Speed Dial numbers are assigned in system programming from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT Two pauses are available to be programmed in System Speed Dialing buffers One pause is preset at 1 5 seconds the other pause is programmable from 1 5 seconds to 12 seconds default is 3 seconds Code Restriction can be allowed denied to System Speed Dialing on a system basis only When Least Cost Routing is supplied in the system it will be applied when System Speed Dialing is access ed There is a total of 300 System Speed Dialing buffers per system as set in default This total can be increased to a maximum of 4000 buffers by reassigning Station Speed Dialing buffers as System Speed Dialing buff ers Each tenant in the system can be assigned up to a maximum of 300 buffers Each buffer can store a maximum of 26 digits Trunk access codes are not part of the 26 digits When Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is provided the actual dialed number is recorded and printed If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available 10 System S
223. e access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To cancel Call Forwarding Busy Line from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Busy Line cancellation code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone To set Call Forwarding No Answer from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer from the Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the Call Forwarding No Answer cancellation code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the originating station number and receive service set tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 73 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding All Calls Service Conditions The Attendant can cancel any type of Call Forwarding set by an internal station Call Forwarding All Calls General Description This feature allows all calls directed to a particular extension to be rerouted to an alternate destination regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension Call Forwarding All Calls
224. e allows any station other than one with incoming restrictions to answer incoming calls when the system is in the night mode When this feature is activated incoming exchange network calls will activate a common alert signal at the customer premises By dialing a specified code any station may answer the call and then extend it to any other station by means of the Call Transfer feature Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To answer a Trunk Answer Any Station TAS call 1 The TAS signal sounds 2 Go off hook and receive dial tone 3 Dial the specified TAS feature access code OR Press the specified TAS key on a Multiline Terminal if provided 4 Connection to the incoming call is completed Service Conditions 1 TAS service can be assigned to the following types of lines e Direct Distance Dialing DDD e Foreign Exchange FX e Wide Area Telephone Service WATS e Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA e Direct Inward Dialing DID available only for LDN calls e E amp M Tie available only for operator calls TAS indication can be provided on a per tenant basis and there can only be one per tenant 3 Stations which may access TAS service are programmed in Class of Service NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 238 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 NIGHT SERVICE Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Stations accessing TAS service must be in the same tenant group By dialing dif
225. e analog terminal can be used simultaneously Station Application Multiline Terminals D Series I1I Series E Operating Procedure Single Port Mode To originate a call from an analog terminal without keypad via the Analog Port Adapter Lift the handset of a Multiline Terminal and receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline Ter minal lights green 3 After the called party answers lift the handset of the analog terminal to switch over to the analog terminal Replace the handset of the Multiline Terminal 5 Converse e To originate a call from a single line telephone PB via the Analog Port Adapter 1 Lift the handset of a single line telephone and receive dial tone The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline Terminal lights green 2 Dial the desired station number from the single line telephone and receive ringback tone 3 The called party answers converse To answer an incoming call to the Prime Line from an analog terminal via the Analog Port Adapter 1 An analog terminal rings when a call terminates to the Prime Line on the Multiline Terminal 2 Lift the handset of the analog terminal The LED of the Prime Line on the Multiline Terminal lights green 3 Converse NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 9 ANALOG PORT ADAPTER To answer an incoming call to the secondary
226. e associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used as a Message Waiting MW Console This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Mes sage Waiting status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Terminal user can set reset MW status using the MW Console NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 150 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE Room Cutoff Console Station Application All stations with a DSS BLF Console Operating Procedure To set and cancel Message Waiting 1 Press the MW key When stations are currently in MW their associated LED will light green 2 Press the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Press the desired DSS key s to set or cancel A lit LED indicates MW has been set 4 Press the MW key again to return to DSS BLF mode if desired Service Conditions 1 The MW Console only displays cancels the set status for those stations to whom Message Wait was set by the station user of the MW Console If the system is initialized reset the Console function mode will return to DSS BLF 3 Refer to the DSS BLF Console and the Message Waiting Features and Specifications for more details Room Cutoff Console General Description This feature allows a DSS BLF Console associated with a Multiline Terminal to be us
227. e calling party 5 The feature access code for Return Schedule can be programmed in a DSS key on the Multiline Terminal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 275 RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY 6 Up to three different messages can be selected a IN BACK recommended when the station user is not at his her desk but is still on premises in a meeting in the building etc Provides an hour and minute display b OUT BACK recommended when the station user has left the premises but will be back within the same day Provides an hour and minute display c AWAY BACK recommended when the station user has left the premises and will be away for an extended time period Provides a month and date display Reorder tone is heard by the calling party when a station that set Return Schedule is called The lower portion of the LCD on a Multiline Terminal with display is used to provide the Return Schedule display 9 Entry of return time is through 4 dialed digits HH MM for hours and minutes 10 Entry of return date is through 4 dialed digits MM DD representing the month and day NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 276 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ROOM CUTOFF ROOM CUTOFF General Description This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument or Property Management System PMS terminal or guest room telephones using
228. e can also be assigned as a night station for Night Connection Fixed or Flexible If the night station is set for Call Forwarding operator calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the designated station The night station can be assigned as a station in a Station Hunting group One night station per tenant is available in multiple tenant arrangements NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 233 NIGHT SERVICE Call Rerouting 6 The night station can be assigned as a station in an Automatic Uniform Call Distribution UCD group This operation is not applicable to Listed Directory Number LDN calls For LDN calls Night Connection Fixed Flexible or Trunk Answer Any Station TAS service is applicable 8 Night stations can utilize the Call Hold Call Transfer and Conference features provided these features are programmed into the night station s Class of Service 9 Any calls to the Attendant dial 0 during Night Service are routed to the night station 10 Individual Attendant Access calls are not transferred to the night station assigned by Attendant Night Trans fer Call Rerouting General Description This feature provides flexible reroute capabilities for a variety of calls when the system is in night mode Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The following is the call rero
229. e equipped with message waiting lamps for 70 Vdc Multiline Terminals can be assigned a MSG key for use with this feature This line button serves as an in dicator for received messages and allows setting of Message Reminder to other stations after dialing the station number A maximum of four messages can be set to one station If a fifth message is attempted reorder tone is heard and the LCD at the setting station shows RESTRICT when LCD is provided A maximum of 200 messages can be set from stations in one system Message indications are battery backed up and are not lost due to power failure or initialization of the sys tem In Multiple Console Operation messages set by one Attendant can not be canceled by another Attendant Messages can be set to a station in any status condition idle busy in Line Lockout etc Message indica tions are not provided when a Single Line Telephone handset is off hook When a Multiline Terminal calls a station that is forwarded and then presses the MSG key the message is left at the station to which the call was forwarded When all stations in a hunt group are busy messages set by a Multiline Terminal using the MSG key are left at the called station Voice Mail Systems that provide in band signaling for this purpose may be able to set Message Remind er s Operating procedures and service conditions of a message waiting LED on Multiline Terminals without LCD are the same as those of Sing
230. e extension will be bypassed and Station Hunting continues When a pilot station has set Do Not Disturb the calling party will receive reorder tone There is no limit to the number of Station Hunting Terminal groups within the system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 292 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STATION HUNTING Station Hunting Secretarial 8 The priority for call handling by features to a pilot station is as follows e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line e Camp On Call Waiting Method Transfer Method e Station Hunting 9 Recalls Call Back Call Park Camp On Call Transfer etc return to the originating station and do not hunt 10 This feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialed or terminated under the following condi tions e Dialed from station e Dialed from Attendant Console e Dialed from Direct Inward Dial DID e Dialed from E amp M Tie Line e Terminated by Direct In Termination DIT e Terminated by Hotline Inside Outside e Terminated by Off Hook Alarm e Terminated by Priority Call Station Hunting Secretarial General Description This feature allows assignments to be given to members of Terminal and Circular Hunting groups to reroute calls when their hunting group is all busy to a back up hunting group Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions
231. e handset or press the Speaker key To cancel Split Call Forwarding All Calls Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding All Calls feature access key and receive special dial tone The LCD displays CF ALL XXXX Target station 3 Press the key and receive service set tone The LCD displays CANCEL and the associated LED goes off Restore the handset or press the Speaker key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 86 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding All Calls From a Single Line Telephone e To set Split Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone Number Destination Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 0 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 1 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 2 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 5 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding All Calls Block 7 Target station for Call Forwarding
232. e holding party returns to the connection a two party connection is estab lished NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 183 HOTEL MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE HOTEL MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE General Description The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel Attendant Console In addition to the business features and functions of the Attendant the Hotel Motel Attendant Console can set Room Cutoff in dividual and group Automatic Wake Up Message Waiting and Do Not Disturb individual and group Station Application Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure Room Cutoff Individual Do Not Disturb Individual and Message Waiting To set 1 Dial the desired extension 2 Press the applicable function key 3 Press the START key e To cancel 1 Dial the desired extension 2 Press the applicable function key 3 Press the RESET key Room Cutoff Group and Do Not Disturb Group To set 1 Press the applicable function key 2 Press the START or key To cancel 1 Press the applicable function key 2 Press the RESET key Automatic Wake Up To set 1 Dial the desired extension 2 Press the Automatic Wake Up function key 3 Dial the digits applicable to the requested Automatic Wake Up time in military time ex 7 30 p m is 1930 4 Press the START key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page
233. e or several times periodically This is selectable 5 Calls remain queued to the attendant until answered or until remote disconnect signalling occurs NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 42 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT LOCKOUT ATTENDANT LOCKOUT General Description This feature denies an Attendant the ability to re enter an established trunk or station connection without being recalled by that station after the call is put in consultation hold Station Application Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 This feature is mutually exclusive with the Attendant Override feature 2 The Attendant Override feature must be disabled to enable this feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 43 ATTENDANT OVERFLOW ATTENDANT OVERFLOW General Description When an incoming call which has terminated from a trunk to the Attendant Console remains unanswered after a predetermined time period this feature provides a change to Night Service for that particular trunk Station Application Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The Night Service assignment applied to the unanswered call is the same that applies to that trunk when the system is placed in night mode This feature only applies to incoming calls on
234. e provided locally One trunk circuit from a COT card is required for each zone of external paging 3 One PN DKOO or built in DKO0 in MP is required for every four zones of external paging in order to share a common amplifier and background music source 4 The maximum length of paging access codes is three digits Paging access codes and Meet Me codes must be preprogrammed 5 A maximum of 10 zones of external paging can be set up 6 Meet Me service is programmable When Meet Me service is not provided there is no system timeout on paging When Meet Me service is provided a system timeout is applied to the delay Meet Me operation In the case of delay operation both the paging period and the period of waiting for the Meet Me call are combined After this timeout expires Meet Me attempts will be denied and the paging circuits become available again Refer to the Variable Timing Parameters feature for timeout information 7 Tf additional dialing is required after seizing a paging trunk the Radio Paging Equipment Access feature may be used 8 No LED indication for the External Paging key on an Attendant Console is provided NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 167 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR General Description When a call from a C O line Direct Inward Termination Direct Inward Dialing Automated Attendant sta tion or tie line has terminated to a f
235. e status assumed after the password was set up NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 30 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Programming To program system speed dialing 1 Press the SPD key The SPD key LED red comes on 2 Dial the speed dial block 5 digits 60009 The selected block number is displayed as follows along with the currently registered trunk access code and telephone number Tenant Buffer 00012 9 12345 SPD If there is no change skip to Step 4 otherwise dial the new trunk access code to register Press the Answer key If there is no change skip to Step 6 otherwise dial the new telephone number ON AN besten A Press the Answer key The new access code and the telephone number are set up 7 Press the CNCL key To program another speed dial block number return to Step 2 8 Press the CNCL key The system goes back to the status assumed after the password was set To set up the system clock 1 Press the CLOCK key The CLOCK key LED red comes on 2 Dial the new date and time 12 digits Dial the date and time in the following order MT DY DW HH MM SS MT Month 01 12 DY Day DW Day of week 00 06 SUN SAT HH Hour 00 23 MM Minute 00 59 SS Second 00 59 012301010203 CLOCK 3 Press the Answer key The new date and time are set up 4 Press the CNCL key The system goes back to the status ass
236. each 2DAT Card and 4 circuits on each 4DAT Card Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming C O line Tie line call has been transferred by a station and encounter a busy or no answer condition The busy condition results in disconnect after three repetitions of the message a Only 1 message of up to 60 seconds can be recorded on each individual voice recording memory card b In this application a minimum of 2 circuits of Digital Announcement Trunk Cards are needed one for a busy condition and one for a no answer condition c More than 1 circuit of Digital Announcement Trunk Card may be used depending on traffic conditions Page 12 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 f ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE Call Forwarding if set has priority over this feature Digital Announcement Trunk Cards can be shared among tenants Each announcement is assigned on a per tenant basis This feature does not function on Attendant transferred calls 9 A voice message in place of Music On Hold can be provided when a call has been placed on hold a b d Different messages can be programmed on a tenant basis Different messages can be programmed depending on the type of line C O line Tie line or station on Hold More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card circuit for this purpose Secondary connections are made to the mess
237. econd call 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch 2 The original call is placed on hold and receives Music On Hold when provided 3 Dial an internal station number and receive ringback tone 4 The second station answers The original call is now on Consultation Hold To return to the original call 1 In any of the following cases the calling station can return to the original call by pressing the FLASH key or momentarily pressing the hookswitch e Ifthe second station called is busy e Ifthe calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction e If the second station does not answer NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 124 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CONSULTATION HOLD 2 Ifthe second party hangs up the calling station will automatically be returned to the original call 3 If the originating station presses the FLASH key or momentarily presses the hookswitch a three party Conference will be initiated Service Conditions 1 An outgoing exchange network or tie line call can also be made by the station user with a call on Consulta tion Hold Refer to Trunk to Trunk Connection and Conference Features and Specifications 2 A station is only allowed to place one call on Consultation Hold at a time NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 125 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT CUSTOMER ADMINIST
238. ected in programming e The trunk can be released e An alternate call terminating destination Attendant Trunk Answer Any Station Direct In Termination can be provided When the called party is busy or does not answer and all DTMF receivers are busy then the following op erations can be selected in programming The trunk can be released e An alternate call terminating destination Attendant or Trunk Answer Any Station can be provided Automated Attendant cannot call out of the system It can only answer incoming calls to the PBX for which 1t is programmed Automated Attendant cannot call transfer calls over CCIS to another NEAX PBX The message can be changed by DAY NIGHT mode Page 48 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD General Description The Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a prearranged group of stations Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within the group based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time Stations may log on log off from the ACD group Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents Station Application Multiline and single line stations Operating Procedure Refer to individual ACD sub features for details on station operating procedures Service Conditions 1 A m
239. ected in system pro gramming 14 When terminating a call with the ANI information to the VMS through the MCI the system can send the ANI information to the VMS if required This is not available through CCIS interface NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 213 MESSAGE REGISTRATION MESSAGE REGISTRATION General Description This feature provides output from the system to a call accounting system using an RS 232C connector This allows the Hotel Motel clerk to retrieve the information needed to charge for local and toll calls Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions An Application Processor card APOO is required for this feature 2 The Station Message Detail Recording call record information is used to provide Message Registration in formation to a call accounting system 3 The call accounting system must be locally provided and compatible with the system Refer to Station Message Detail Recording Features and Specifications for more information NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 214 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE REMINDER MESSAGE REMINDER General Description This feature allows a user or Attendant to turn on the message waiting MW lamp of a Single Line Telephone or the Message Reminder MSG LED of a Multiline Terminal if assigned Station Appli
240. ed A maximum of six calls one per loop may be released simultaneously from any single Attendant Console This feature provides each Attendant with the equivalent of twelve switching loops In a Multiple Console Operation the attendant who initiated the loop release will be recalled ARE lt 8 Attendant Loop Release is only applicable to trunk calls and station calls extended to an unanswered station busy station Camp On Trunk Calls only 7 Calls which are held by the Attendant using the HOLD key cannot be released from the console These calls remain on the switched loop until they are either extended by the Attendant or abandoned by the calling party 8 When Attendant Camp On is activated the Attendant can Camp On to a busy called station Upon Camp On the Attendant may release the call from the console 9 Release is denied when the Attendant attempts to transfer a trunk to a fully restricted station or to a station which already has a trunk camped onto it In this case the RELEASE key is ineffective Attendant Programming General Description This function is allowed only for the Attendant Console and is used to execute DISA code set up speed dial programming and system clock set up operations Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure The following operations are common for DISA code set up speed dial programming and system clock set up operations 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Press the PR
241. ed See Intercom Station Hunting Automatic Call Distribution Uniform Call Distribution With Overflow and Hotline features for details The system can support up to 384 Multiline Terminals up to 512 Multiline Terminals with an Extension Memory card of MP and up to 256 Software Line Appearances However the combined total of Multiline Terminals and Software Line Appearances must not exceed 768 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 287 STACK DIAL STACK DIAL General Description This feature enables a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console to remember the numbers dialed in the pre ceding five calls including the last number dialed The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD thus allowing the station user to make an outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display Station Application All Multiline Terminals with an LCD and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure 1 Press the Redial key The caller hears special dial tone and the number dialed last is displayed on the LCD 2 To display the numbers dialed before the last call press the Redial key again While the caller hears special dial tone the number dialed before the last call are displayed on the LCD Each time the Redial key is pressed the numbers dialed for the last five calls are displayed sequentially from the last number dialed 3 To redial the displayed number on t
242. ed as a Room Cutoff Con sole This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS BLF Console The Room Cutoff status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each button In addition the Multiline Ter minal user can set cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room Cutoff Console Station Application All Multiline Terminals with a DSS BLF Console Operating Procedure To set and cancel Room Cutoff 1 Press the RC key When stations are currently in RC their associated LED will light green 2 Press the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Press the desired DSS key s to set or cancel A lit LED indicates RC has been set 4 Press the RC key again to return to the DSS BLF mode if desired Service Conditions 1 The Room Cutoff Console only displays cancels the set status for those stations which were set into room cutoff by the station user of the Room Cutoff Console Indication is not provided when another Room Cut off console the Attendant Console a Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument or a PMS changes the RC status of a station If the system is initialized reset the Console function mode returns to DSS BLF 3 Refer to the DSS BLF Console and the Room Cutoff Features and Specifications for more details NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 151 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD
243. ed to a predetermined location Attendant Console another station or voice mail equipment Individual Call Forwarding No Answer settings take precedence over system Call Forwarding No An swer settings Call Forwarding No Answer timing flexible in system programming is as follows e For direct incoming calls DID DIT Tie 4 to 120 seconds Default 32 36 seconds e For internal calls and transferred incoming calls 4 to 120 seconds Default 32 36 seconds More than one call forward can occur in the progress of a call See Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line and Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Line can be set simultaneously with this feature to result in Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Line and Call Forwarding No Answer can be set to the same or differ ent extensions When Call Forwarding No Answer Outside is set the system can be programmed to allow or deny the setting of the Call Forward with only a trunk access code This can be set on a system wide basis Page 80 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding Destination 10 In the SMDR call record the station that set Call Forwarding No Answer Outside will appear as the originator of the call 11 SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer su
244. ed to the first leader in SMDR NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 122 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING General Description For Speed Dialing all digits are registered as a Speed Dialing Code In the case of Consecutive Speed Dialing the common portion of the number is registered as a speed calling code and the remaining digits of each number are dialed by each individual calling station or by using a Station Speed Dial key on a Multiline Terminal Example 91516753 XXXX Nooo y gt ee Stored digits sent Additional digits by Speed Dial dialed by caller Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Speed Dialing feature access code 3 Dial the abbreviated code 4 Dial the remaining digits of the number or use a DSS key to dial a stored Station Speed Dial number Service Conditions This feature is available with System Speed Dialing and Station Speed Dialing This feature can be used when the calling station has a call on Consultation Hold or Call Hold The Attendant Console can also manually dial after accessing a System Speed Dialing number After any type of dialing System Speed Dialing is not available for the duration of the call e MS ee After any type of dialing Station Speed Dialing accessed by dialing a code is not available for the duration of the call NE
245. ed with a Message Wait MW key a Do Not Disturb DND key and a Night Transfer NT key Using the MW key converts the DSS BLF Console into a Message Wait Console Using the DND key converts the DSS BLF Console into a Do Not Disturb console Using the NT key places the associated tenant into night mode Only one of these can be accessed at one time An RLS key can be assigned on the Multiline Terminal s line keys Use of the RLS key during a call in progress will terminate that call unless a transfer is in progress in which case the transfer occurs The RLS key acts the same as going on hook The associated LED for MW DND or N T on the DSS BLF Console will light steady green when in use and be off when canceled The associated LED for each station assigned MW or DND is lit steady green while it is set but is displayed only when the Multiline Terminal user activates the Message Wait mode or Do Not Disturb mode Direct trunk line appearances may be assigned to the Attendant Multiline Terminal Operation is the same as on normal Multiline Terminals Attendant Console style operation is not available with Trunk Direct Ap pearances For operator calls from Tie lines the outside party must dial a virtual line number associated with an ATT position An NT key may be assigned to a Multiline Terminal when no master Attendant Console or no station for Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing is provided by the tenant When a station has been
246. edialed after a predetermined time interval Station Application Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 1 2 3 Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone Dial a trunk access code and the desired number Receive busy tone or ring no answer Press the line key assigned as the CALL BACK key The associated LED flashes green and the LCD displays TIMED Q Timed Queue is now set Within a preprogrammed time interval the system will automatically seize a trunk dial tone is heard redial the number dialed digits are heard and ring back or busy tone depending on the status of the called party will be heard at the station that set Timed Queue Lift the handset and converse Service Conditions 1 The time between setting the Timed Queue and when the system releases the trunk is programmable from 4 120 seconds 30 seconds as set in default During this period the station s Speaker key LED is lit and the station is considered off hook by the system The time between the release of the trunk and the reseizure of the trunk is programmable from 4 120 seconds 60 seconds as set in default The number of times a Timed Queue will occur is programmable from 1 7 times 3 times as set in default When the programmed number of attempts is reached Timed Queue will be canceled Timed Queue is canceled if a station user either lifts the handset or presses the Speaker key while this feature is activated When a Timed Queue occur
247. ee eset eeagtcdcce 1 E MODULE 95 025 Ree thee O eRe eee OL ee RES 3 ALARM INDICATION S aer n onran EENEI AA phe eens IRA A RARAS 5 ALPHANUMERIC WHSPLAY 5489 daa da ARA AR ARA 7 ANALOG PORT AAA po II O EARN EE EERS 9 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE AMAS 11 ee rer eaea e a EE A E eee bees A r EE ER 14 ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING reir rei 16 Gps Ri ee ae ss AO eee ee OACI 18 ATTENDANT CONSOLE cosas ridad Ea 20 SSI ATTCON edson bra Ds AAA rd 20 e A eee oul EEE E R E E Lone oeere taeeense 20 Attendant Called Calling Name Display 2 24 lt ccasctsvcetcndeecusicevesesenetescesius sd 21 Attendant Called Calling MOMGE i4sc568h is 6 kde R re R50 ir RA 22 Attendant Call Seletin 645 485 esaGd HEAR 6S ARANA CEGAN ARA 23 Attendant Console Lockout Password 20110 10 eoprorrssrerrirasrerresriridres 23 Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel o ooococcccccc eee 25 Attendant Interposition Call Transier 2 22 ccsece vt eeeetsereetagen si ee iesiecege gues 26 Atendan Lamo A eee OR ered eRe LEED EORTC ER RENE Oe ETERS 26 Attendant Listed Directory NUMbef ssciccksckcs cra AAA AAA ee eae 27 Attendant Loop He ee 5 sirresi retini t itko hA RIKETE A 28 a AAA A O ENEN 29 as AAA APS 32 Audible Indication Control obese beet terest dees pleases recagdeecsandeceesraeeebaseess 32 Gall Processing AAA ee 094i bo iiei 05508405984 PESTS 32 al Ce 250 50059 RIA ERROR IAEA ARAS RAN 33 A E A A 34 UA DI as tas pap ds As O EE E 35 Common Route AA aes ogee sce eeers EE TeRi
248. el Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 67 BOSS SECRETARY CALLING 5 6 When finished conversing with either party the boss goes on hook The other party will automatically recall to the boss station The boss goes off hook and is connected to the other party Service Conditions 1 10 During Boss Secretary transfer operation if the secretary hangs up before the boss answers to complete an unsupervised ring transfer and the boss still does not answer the call will recall to the secretary s primary extension after a predetermined time out default value is 24 28 seconds After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss Secretary transfer operation the secretary is automati cally reconnected to the original caller if the boss hangs up After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss Secretary transfer operation the secretary can use the Transfer or Answer key to alternate conversation between the original caller and the boss Broker s Call after the boss has answered using the handset After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss Secretary transfer operation using the handsets the sec retary can press the Recall key to disconnect the boss and receive feature dial tone allowing a transfer to another station the boss receives reorder tone The secretary can also press either the Transfer or Answer key to return to the original caller While a secretary is originating a voice call du
249. em are as follows e Prepause Variable from 1sec to 12 sec in 1 second increments e Inter Digit Pause Variable from 32 ms to 240 ms e DTMF signal width Fixed at 64 ms or 128 ms A special number of up to 4 digits including an Inter Digit Pause can automatically be added both before and after to the station number that is sent to the VMS from the system This can be used for a variety of identification codes as required Two types of Inter Digit Pauses can be set per system One is fixed at 1 5 sec and the other is programmable from 1 5 sec to 16 sec The VMS can control the Message Waiting Lamp of the Station set by using the Message Waiting Message Reminder feature The retrieval access code for Message Waiting Message Reminder is variable and can be set from 1 to 3 digits in system programming When all VMS is busy assuming the following condition Station A or outside party Calling Party NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 332 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Station B Called Party Station B sets Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer to the VMS Station A or outside party makes a call to Station B a Call Forwarding All Calls e Station A hears reorder tone e Outside party hears busy tone b Call Forwarding Busy Line Station A hears busy tone and can set any busy service to station B e Outside party hears busy tone c Call Forwarding No Answer e
250. endant position has limited access to Attendant related features and functions and can be substituted where an Attendant is required but an Attendant Console is not necessary When a DSS BLF console is associated with this Atten dant Multiline Terminal enhanced operation is available Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure Answering and transferring an incoming C O line call With an incoming call in progress DDD FX or WATS line key LED is flashing C O ring is heard Press the flashing line key or the Answer key 2 The First available LOOP key LED lights steady green Incoming indication stops The LCD shows the trunk name and number 3 Press the Transfer key and dial the station number to be transferred to or press the desired DSS key The LCD shows the called station number 4 Press the RLS key or go on hook To Hold a call With a call in progress 1 Press the Hold key The LOOP key flashes green 2 Go on hook or press the RLS key To retrieve a held call 1 Go off hook 2 Press the flashing LOOP key The LED key indication goes to steady green 3 Converse To set cancel Message Waiting 1 Press the MW key on the DSS BLF console to enter the Message Wait mode 2 Press the associated DSS key for the desired station The associated LED lights steady green for set Message Waiting or extinguishes when Message Waiting is canceled 3 Press the MW key to return to the norma
251. endant Console when the Attendant has an swered a Listed Directory Number LDN or a Tie Line call Operating Procedure 1 2 3 The Attendant answers an incoming call SRC LDN or Tie and Answer lamp lights Company Name LDN Trunk Number and Trunk Identification Code are displayed as follows 0 00 01 DDD 1000 G01 10 23 AM TUE 12 NEC lt 500 gt L Company Name L LDN Number Service Conditions This feature is effective when the Attendant has answered an LDN call or a Tie Line call The maximum number of characters per company name is 8 The maximum number of company names assigned per system is 16 maximum 8 for LDN calls and Tie Line calls respectively The company name can be assigned per system programming The company name can be assigned by character code from the CAT or MAT While the company name is displayed the Attendant can transfer the call to a desired station by dialing the destination number In this case the company name of the call cannot be displayed again While the company name is displayed the Attendant can place the present call on hold by pressing the HOLD key In this case the company name of the call cannot be displayed again when the Attendant returns to call on hold The company name can be displayed when the Attendant has answered the LDN call or Tie Line call for warded from the station If the name display feature is assigned for that station the station name is displayed the
252. ension Line keys 01 through 07 Trunks 000 through 006 e 16 button terminal Line key 16 Primary extension Line keys 01 through 04 Trunks 000 through 003 j Prime Line For all Multiline Terminals the primary extension is assigned as the Prime Line k Memory allocation for Station Speed Dial e Multiline Terminals without DSS keys 10 buffers e Single Line Telephones 10 buffers Up to the maximum of 4500 buffers l All stations are assigned to tenant 01 m Numbering Plan Numbering Plan Access Code Setting Data Service Features Operator Call Call Hold First digit of three digit station number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 272 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM Numbering Plan Continued Access Code Setting Data Service Features Internal Zone Paging group 0 group group 2 For calling group 3 group 4 Internal Zone Paging group 0 group group 2 For answering group 3 group 4 Set Timed Reminder Automatic Wake Up Cancel Voice Call Ring Tone programming Assignment of station name BGM on Multiline Terminal set reset Day Night mode change by station dialing Set Call Park System Retrieve TAS Answer A Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Designated Group Entry Station Speed Dialing E i ance
253. er to be removed from the queue This means that if the overflow des tination out of queue is another UCD group the caller is placed at the end of that queue if all agents are busy and is no longer in queue for the first group 4 One DAT Digital Announcement Trunk circuit is required for each Delay Announcement MP card in cludes 2DAT circuit and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4 DAT circuits 5 Delay Announcements cannot be shared between groups Each group must have their own set of Delay Announcements 6 Multiple DAT circuits may be assigned for 1st or 2nd Delay Announcement function to the same UCD group when warranted by high traffic rates into the group 7 When a UCD station becomes available the caller is immediately connected to the station even if the re corded announcement is in progress 8 Incoming call billing to the outside party starts when the first recorded announcement begins Hunt Past No Answer UCD General Description This feature allows calls targeted at a UCD group to hunt past an agents station after a no answer condition if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable or not available to answer the call NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 319 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Immediate Overflow UCD Station Application Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Operating Procedure Refer to the Call Forw
254. erface OAI Pad Lock Periodic Time Indication Tone Pooled Line Access Power Failure Transfer Priority Call Privacy Direct Privacy Release Manual Privacy Release Private Lines Property Management System Interface Proprietary Multiline Terminal Automatic Idle Return Called Station Status Display Calling Name and Number Display Dynamic Dial Pad Handsfree Unit I Hold I Use Indication Microphone Control Multiple Line Operation Mute Key Off Hook Voice Announcement Prime Line Pickup Recall Key Relay Control Function Key Ring Frequency Control Ringing Line Pickup Soft Keys XI X X X X OK OK X OK OK X OK X OK OK OK X OK OK X X X X OK X X OK OK X X OK OK OK OK KY lt be ded de LLL Do ek le te ld dd oe ce te te ep a mdd id dd ral dd ml dd NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page xiv NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF FEATURES X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 FEATURE NEAX2000 IVS x y Volume Control Q SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call ETSI Version Remote Hold Remote PIM Reserve Power Resident System Program Return Message Schedule Display Room Cutoff Room Status Route Advance
255. errupts the conversation Station A and Station Trunk B Station C can hear Station A but cannot hear Station Trunk B And Station C can talk with only Station A Station Trunk B cannot hear the conversation Station A and Station C NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 339 This page is for your notes NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 340 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 APPENDIX 1 D FIXED FUNCTION KEYS APPENDIX 1 D FIXED FUNCTION KEYS Series E Series Ill ANS Description To answer a waiting call CNF To establish three way conversation FNC To activate terminal setup functions and to program One Touch Speed Dial Feature Keys HOLD To place an internal or external call on hold LNR SPD To terminate established call and re seize internal dial tone RECALL To active Last Number Call and Speed Calling SPKR To control the built in speaker which can be used for Hands Free dial ing monitoring TRF To transfer established calls to another station without attendant assistance NEAX2000 IVS2 Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 341 APPENDIX 2 LCD D DISPLAY APPENDIX 2 LCD Dte DISPLAY Description Clock Calendar Display Series E 10 06 PM MON 21 APR 1999 Series Ill 10 06 PM TUE 14 Description
256. estination can be designated per tenant by system data programming However one of these must be a station and the another must be a voice mail station If the call cannot be transferred to the destination station due to the busy or restriction of the destination CID and CRD mode is cancelled When the following terminating system is assigned to the trunk the call which is terminated to the trunk access key can be transferred by the CRD key e Trunk Direct Appearances e Trunk Direct Appearances TAS NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 100 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL REDIRECT 6 On the following conditions the call cannot be transferred by the CRD key because the destination is re garded as busy state e When the call is a Camp On call and the destination is a UCD queue e When the call is held on an extension line trunk access key and the destination is a UCD queue e When the call is terminating to or held on a trunk access key and the destination is setting Call For warding All Calls Outside Busy Line Outside A call which is set Exclusive Hold by the other station cannot be transferred by the CRD key 8 A voice call and a call from an Attendant Console cannot be transferred by the CRD key The system regards the Call Redirect operation as a Call Forwarding No Answer Information of the CRD setting station is sent to the destination station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Feat
257. expansion memory standard up to 240 setting e MP with expansion memory optional up to 496 setting Call Forwarding No Answer General Description This feature reroutes calls to extensions which do not answer to another station an Attendant Console or voice mail equipment Call Forwarding No Answer can be set by the individual station user an Attendant Console or by a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal with LCD To set Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired target station number and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET XXXX Target Station To set Call Forwarding No Answer Outside 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding No Answer feature access key and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number 4 Wait until service set tone is received NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 79 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding No Answer 5 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer 1 2
258. ey associated with the participant to be released The participant is released from the CFT trunk and is connected to the leader 3 Go on hook and the participant is released Go off hook and press the Conference feature key The Conference feature key lights green 5 The leader returns to the CFT trunk To end a Conference call release CFT trunk CFT trunk is automatically released when only one participant remains connected Service Conditions 1 Access codes A B and C must be different numbers A is used to reserve the Conference board B is used to add Conference member C is used to force release a member from the Conference Up to four CFT trunks can be accommodated in the system 3 The maximum number of participants which can be connected in a Conference call is e Six participants inclusive of the leader when one CFT trunk is used e Ten participants inclusive of the leader when two CFT trunks are used 4 The maximum number of Conference groups per system when using four CFT trunks maximum is e Four 6 party Conference groups e Two 10 party Conference groups e Two 6 party Conference groups and one 10 party Conference group 5 A CFT trunk is used for either a 6 party or 10 party Conference Dialed access codes determine which CFT trunk is used for a Conference If the leader dials the access code for a 10 party Conference when only one CFT trunk is idle the leader is restricted and hear reorder tone NEAX2000 IVS
259. f special dial tone Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Announcement for the result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature 1 The announcement is provided when the following service features are set or canceled e Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer e Split Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer Do Not Disturb e UCD Busy Out Note e Station Message Schedule Display e Call Back Note When UCD Busy Out is set or canceled by the function key of a Multiline Terminal the announcement is not provided 2 Digital Announcement Trunk DAT circuits of MP card or a 2DAT 4DAT card are required MP card includes two DAT circuits and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4 DAT circuits 3 After the announcement is provided the station user will hear reorder tone The duration of announcement is specified by the system data programming 4 This service is effective on the system wide basis Announcement for the status of a station set Call Forwarding All Calls Do Not Disturb Message Waiting 1 There are two separate programmable station status announcements that can be provided to a station User after going off hook Features are related as below e Station has set Call Forwarding All Calls Split Call Forwarding All Calls or is in Do Not Disturb e Station has received a Message Wait or
260. f the trunks provides a release sig nal If neither trunk provides a release signal the trunks will be dropped Reentry into this tandem connec tion is not possible When a Multiline Terminal user presses the Conf key prior to going on hook during a three party Confer ence with two outside parties a tandem connection will be established Hold indication is provided Reen try into this tandem connection is accomplished by pressing the held line button An internal party must be off hook using the handset or in speakerphone mode in order to be included in a Conference NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 119 CONFERENCE SIX TEN PARTY CONFERENCE SIX TEN PARTY General Description This feature permits a station user or Attendant conference leader to establish a Conference among as many as six or ten parties including the Conference leader Station Application All stations and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure Using the access code To make a Conference Call The Conference leader goes off hook or an Attendant presses a loop key 2 Dial the access code A for a 6 or 10 party Conference and receive special dial tone If the CFT trunks are all busy or the leader is not assigned as the Conference leader with service feature class reorder tone is heard If a participant s line station or C O Tie line is busy repeat Step 2 after going on hook onc
261. ferent access codes stations can access other tenants TAS service A 8LC or PN DKO0 or built in DKOO in MP board is required to interface with the TAS equipment TAS Call termination to the Answer key on Multiline Terminals can be programmed on a per system basis SION Oe ES NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 239 OFF HOOK ALARM OFF HOOK ALARM General Description This feature allows a station user to call the Attendant or a predesignated station by simply staying off hook for a preprogrammed period of time The calling number is automatically displayed at the Attendant Console or the predesignated station if equipped with an LCD Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 Lift the handset and stay off hook After a predetermined time elapses 30 seconds as set in default the call will terminate at the Attendant Console or a predesignated station The calling station number will be displayed at the Attendant Console when answered Service Conditions 1 The predetermined timing interval of 4 32 seconds in 4 second increments is programmable through the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT The station assigned as a terminating station of each Off hook Alarm group can be a member of a hunting group This feature is assigned on a station basis for origination of Off hook Alarm and on a tenan
262. ff busy out an ACD station 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the log off busy out set feature access code or press the LOG OFF key 3 Restore the handset To log on cancel busy out an ACD station 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the log on busy out cancel feature access code or press the LOG ON key 3 Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 Any agent may log on off When an agent has activated log off any call targeted at the ACD group will bypass that agent Calls directed to the specific station number will ring at the agent position The agent may originate calls while in log off mode 3 The agent can log off their station while idle or while on an incoming outside call When that call is com pleted the station is logged off 4 The agent can log on off from the secondary extension by dialing the log on off feature access code The LOG ON LOG OFF key is not available for the secondary extension NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 50 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Call Waiting Indication ACD Call Waiting Indication ACD General Description This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed in queue due to an all agents busy condition On external relay controlled indicator or an LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiti
263. g NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 285 SINGLE DIGIT DIALING SINGLE DIGIT DIALING General Description This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain features while still allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of guest room station numbers Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Normal call processing procedures apply Service Conditions 1 This feature is available on a numbering plan basis Up to 4 different numbering plans are available per sys tem For multiple tenant applications each tenant can be assigned to one of these four numbering plans 2 When this feature is assigned digits in the numbering plan can overlap and Single Digit Dialing is based on a timeout after dialing the first digit The timing duration before the system stops looking for a second digit is programmable from 2 8 seconds The default setting is 4 5 seconds 3 Digits 0 9 and can be assigned within each numbering plan for Single Digit Dialing Single digit codes can be dialed with Consultation Hold 5 Only the following features can be activated using Single Digit Dialing e Trunk Answer Any Station e Trunk Access e Single Digit Station Numbering e Operator calls Dial 0 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 286 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE
264. ge Waiting lamp of the station can be turned on automatically by the VMS Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To originate a voice mail message From a Single Line Telephone 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the voice mail extension number and receive ringback tone 3 Follow the instructions given by the VMS From a Multiline Terminal with One Touch keys Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Press the One Touch key to send Voice Mail extension number DTMF signal after the Voice Mail Sys tem answered such as mail box number or password 3 Follow the instructions given by the VMS To set call forwarding to a voice mail system e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the call forwarding feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the voice mail extension number and receive service set tone 4 The LCD displays SET xxxx VMS Voice mail extension number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 331 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION Connection when an extension line number whose call forwarding is set to a voice mail system is called from another station 1 2 3 Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone The LCD displays CF ALL xxx VMS Voice mail extension nu
265. gits indicate the Office Location Figure 1 Numbering Plan Station Numbers NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 324 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA NEAX2000 IVS Main office Public Network NEAX2000 IVS2 Satellite office E NEAX2000 IVS Tributary office Public Network Office code Figure 2 Numbering Plan Office Code and Station Numbers Service Conditions 1 One to eight digits can be assigned as Station Number 2 Incase of Numbering Plan Station Numbers the location of the PBX is identified by either the first digit first 2 digits or first 3 digits of the Station Number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA 3 Incase of Numbering Plan Office Code and Station Numbers the total number of digits of the Access Code plus the Office Code can be a maximum of 4 which must be assigned within the network However assign ment of station numbers of different lengths is allowed as shown below 8 XXX XXXX Station number 1 to n digits n max 8 Office code Access code Up to 4 digits total Example 8 222 4XXX 8 222 3XX 8 244 4XXX 8 244 2XX 8 233 3XXX 8 233 4XX 4 In case of Numbering Plan Office Code and Station Numbers within the same PBX a station to station call ca
266. going or both way access to a trunk route Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To originate a call on Pooled Lines 1 Go off hook and select the Pooled Line key The Virtual Line key is seized if it is available If the Virtual Line key is not available the Primary Extension is seized If neither line is available Pooled Line Access is impossible Receive dial tone from a trunk in that Pooled Line s assigned trunk route 3 Dial desired number To answer a call on Pooled Lines 1 Gooff hook and select the ringing line key 2 Converse Service Conditions 1 When all trunks in the Pooled Line group are busy no visual indication is provided on the associated line key LED However a different line key can be assigned for this purpose when required 2 A user on a Pooled Line can access Call Park Call Transfer Conference and Station Speed Dialing Station Message Detail Recording will provide a record of calls made on a Pooled Line 3 When all trunks in the Pooled Line are busy and access is attempted busy tone is received 4 If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available 5 When originating a call on Pooled Lines the Virtual Line key that is seized is the first idle extension found by the key scanning program starting at button number 1 one and counting up to the last line button as signed Care should be taken in determining the line button assignme
267. he Call Back the sta tion returns to receiving ringback tone When the called party is an Attendant Console Call Back can not be set When the setting station is called back Station Hunting and Call Pickup will not apply When the call is placed in UCD queue Call Back can not be set A maximum of 128 stations can access this feature simultaneously Do AA a This feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 71 CALL FORWARDING CALL FORWARDING General Description Call Forwarding allows calls directed to a station to be routed to another station an Attendant an outside num ber or voice mail equipment The types of Call Forwarding provided are e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line e Call Forwarding No Answer e Call Forwarding Destination e Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls e Multiple Call Forwarding Busy Line e Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer e Split Call Forwarding All Calls e Split Call Forwarding Busy Line e Split Call Forwarding No Answer Additional Call Forwarding features include e Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel e Call Forwarding Override e Group Diversion These features can be set canceled from each station The features marked by can be set canceled from a MAT CAT When the features marked by
268. he Call Hold feature access code The new call is now held and the original call is automatically re turned Note Byrepeating the above steps the station users may alternately converse with two parties Broker s Call From a Multiline Terminal with a call in Call Hold and a call in progress on an extension line key 1 2 Replacing the handset will release the call in progress and initiate an immediate recall of the Call Hold call Pressing the Recall key will cause release of the call in progress and immediate connection to new Dial Tone unless the call in progress on the extension line key is via a trunk programmed as Centrex in which case the Recall key will generate a hookflash to the distant exchange for feature access there Service Conditions 1 Lines freed through use of this feature may also be used for answering incoming calls using the Call Pickup Group or Trunk Answer any Station features If the controlling station user does not dial any further digits after the Hold feature access code the station will enter the Line Lockout mode after a preset time out period Calls will remain on Hold until the controlling station user either replaces the handset causing the held call to ring back or provides a hookflash and redials the Hold feature access code to return to the original call Only one call at a time may be held per station line and the held call cannot be added to another call as in three party Conference
269. he LCD press the or key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 288 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STACK DIAL Example Operation LCD Display 3 21 PM WED 21 APR 1999 Press the Redial key e key pressed Go to Step 4 REDIAL SPEED _ _ 1 e RST Timeout Go to Step 6 82625563 Press the Redial key again e key pressed Go to Step 4 REDIAL SPEED _ _ 2 e RST Timeout Go to Step 6 00471857712 Press the key 00471857712 3 21 PM WED 21 APR 1999 Press the Redial key 6 times The display returns to the last number dialed e Go to Step 2 RST Timeout REDIAL SPEED _ _ 1 3 22 PM WED 21 APR 1999 Service Conditions 1 The Stack Dial feature memorizes the numbers dialed for the last five calls unless the same number is dialed twice inclusive of the last number and allows redial using the memorized numbers 2 For Stack Dial station numbers and C O line numbers inclusive of trunk access codes routes route ad vance and Least Cost Routing are memorized but feature access codes and unused numbers are not mem orized 3 On the display for Stack Dial a number representing the number of times of dialing is displayed in the upper line and the dial number is displayed in the lower line REDIAL SPEED _ _ 1 Upper 00238241554 Lower 4 When displaying the fifth number that was dialed pressing the Redial key causes the display to return t
270. he call is transferred to group B When all the stations are busy in group B the call queues onto UCD group A 4 One overflow group can be provided for each UCD group 5 Overflow is performed only once NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 320 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Priority Queuing UCD Priority Queuing UCD General Description This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per station basis when the call enters a UCD queue When a call is a considered as priority it is placed at the beginning of the queue Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Priority queuing is available on incoming trunk calls Queue priority is determined on a trunk route or for DID Calls on a station number basis 2 Iftwo or more priority type calls occur at the same time the system will place them in queue in a first in first out order Queue Size Control UCD General Description On incoming DID Tie Line calls the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the number of calls in queue When the queue size threshold is exceeded incoming callers are connected to busy tone Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Pag
271. he called station and incoming caller are connected The called station hangs up The Serial Call Termination SRL LED on the Attendant Console flashes at 60 IPM If the Attendant is available an audible indication is provided qu 0 21 6 The Attendant presses the Answer or SRL key to return to the original incoming calling party Service Conditions 1 Serial Calling is not provided for Station to Station calling 2 Serial Calling can be enabled or disabled on a per console basis NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 39 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Time Display 3 This feature is not available for tandem connections 4 Serial Calling is allowed when a station is involved in an Attendant Conference 5 No features are denied toward a line or trunk involved in a Serial Call Time Display General Description This feature provides a digital time display on the Attendant Console SN610 ATTCON LCD Operating Procedure Time is constantly displayed on the Attendant Console LCD Service Conditions The clock display of the Attendant Console is synchronized with the clock in the system Trunk Group Busy Display General Description A visual indication is supplied to the Attendant when all trunks in a particular trunk group are busy Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The Attendant Console must be programmed to have a designated Trunk
272. ication All stations Operating Procedure Normal call handling procedures apply Service Conditions Trunks are assigned for DP and or DTMF on a trunk route basis 2 Single Line Telephone circuits are assigned for DP and or DTMF through station Class of Service for the station number assigned to the circuit The Single Line Telephone circuits can accept 10 or 20 PPS 3 The system will automatically provide Dial Conversion when the station is a DTMF Single Line Telephone and dialing is being done on a DP trunk 4 The system can be assigned to provide DTMF dialing on trunks for Attendant Consoles only while gener ating rotary dial pulsing for station dialing 5 For an outgoing call on a trunk once the outgoing register times out 6 seconds after the last digit is dialed further digits dialed out by a Multiline Terminal will be DTMF and the duration of the tones will be the same as the length of time the dial pad key is pressed This feature allows Multiline Terminals to send DTMF signals to external equipment such as computers and other dial up services 6 The dial pulse make ratio is programmable for 33 or 39 default is 39 The dial pulse interdigit pause can be set from 300 ms to 900 ms in increments of 100 ms or 1100 ms default is 800 ms 7 The DTMF signal width is programmable for 64 ms or 128 ms default is 64 ms The DTMF interdigit pause can be set for 32 64 80 96 160 192 or 240 ms default is 96 ms NEAX2
273. ided on a trunk route basis The maximum amount of characters in the trunk name display is four The maximum number of trunk names assignable is 63 Only the MAT or CAT can be used to record or change a trunk name 4 There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed Overwriting with a new name or erasing it by inserting a blank space as the first character 5 The Attendant Console cannot be assigned a name This feature applies only to Multiline Terminals Single Line Telephones and trunk routes 6 Station and trunk name assignment data is retained in case of a system reset or power failure Refer to the Alphanumeric Display Features and Specifications for the details of programming a name from a Multiline Terminal Attendant Called Calling Number General Description This feature provides a display of the station number and station name on the Attendant Console during an At tendant to Station connection During an Attendant to Trunk connection the same display shows the trunk route designation and a trunk identification code 4 digits Operating Procedure Display is automatically provided during Attendant to Station connections and Attendant to trunk connections Service Conditions 1 The station number is displayed on the top line of the console s digital display during an Attendant to station connection 2 When Call Forwarding has rerouted an Attendant to Station call the number of the station where the call h
274. ifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 173 GROUP CALL Automatic Conference 6 10 Party GROUP CALL Automatic Conference 6 10 Party General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user or single line telephone user within the system to establish a con ference among as many as six or ten parties From a Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone a maximum of 9 stations can be paged simultaneously plus the originator The stations are assigned to the simultaneous paging groups as a participants by the system data beforehand Station Application All Stations Operating Procedure To make a conference call 1 Press the speaker key or go off hook and receive a dial tone 2 Dial the access code or press feature access key Multiline Terminal only for a desired paging group and receiver a ringback tone To answer the paging 1 The called terminals receive ringing The LCD of the Multiline Terminal shows Paging plus the station number of the originator 2 Answer the ringing page from the originator 3 You can converse with the originator and other participants To participate in the middle of the conference 1 Press the speaker key or go off hook and receive a dial tone 2 Dial the access code or press feature access key Multiline Terminal only for re participation to the paging group Service Conditions 1 A maximum of nine stations are paged simultaneously including the originator Even if more
275. ights The relay will close and remain closed To turn the relay off e Press the line key programmed to perform the relay function The associated line key LED will go off The contact will open and remain open Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 128 contacts per system can be controlled 2 One PN DKOO0 or built in DKOO in MP is required for every four external items to be controlled 3 The relay control key functions regardless of the Multiline Terminal condition busy or idle 4 The contact returns to the previous status after a momentary open for a maximum of ten seconds when the system is reset mn The same relay control function key should not be assigned to more than one Multiline Terminals 6 The relay control function key can also be assigned to Attendant Console NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 262 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Ring Frequency Control Ring Frequency Control General Description The ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal can be controlled on a station basis in system programming four frequencies are available or by use of a function key on the Multiline Terminal Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To change Ring Frequency 1 Press the Feature key followed by 3 receive the new selected tone from the built in speaker 2 Press the Feature key to return to idle 3 Repeat this procedure
276. ill be displayed In addition to the right of the display the Room Status number is displayed Press the RLS key to exit feature activation To activate Print Out 1 2 Press the Print Out function button Press the applicable function button for which a Print Out is desired If Room Status is selected a code must be dialed to select which room condition is to be printed If a code is not entered all room conditions will be printed Press the SET key Press the RLS key to exit feature activation Service Conditions 1 The following Hotel Motel functions can be accessed from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument e Do Not Disturb e Room Cutoff e Message Waiting e Print Out e Check In Check Out e Automatic Wake up e Room Status Do Not Disturb Override For each feature desired a dedicated line key on the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument must be assigned The Room Cutoff and Do Not Disturb features are applicable to a group of stations and individual stations There is one group available for each feature and the stations in the groups are programmed on a per station basis in system data An Application Processor card APOO is required for this feature The Print Out function provides a hard copy on the status of the following features when the feature is set or reset e Do Not Disturb e Room Cutoff e Message Waiting e Automatic Wake up e Room Status e Check In Check Out Successful and unsucces
277. ilure Transfer connec tion When using the PZ 8PFT card each Port Interface Module PIM can contain one PZ 8PFT card which sup plies 8 Power Failure Transfer circuits This card is mounted on the front bracket of the PIM A maximum of 32 Power Failure Transfer connections are available per PIM When the Power Failure Transfer feature is activated telephone service is limited to incoming calls and or outgoing calls through the serving C O The Power Failure Single Line Telephone must be compatible with the dialing scheme on the trunks i e rotary dial or Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF dialing When the system is in power failure operation Direct Inward Dialing DID CCSA Tie Line and DISA calls cannot be received Multiline Terminals cannot be used as power failure stations All calls in progress and or established calls are lost when a power failure occurs When commercial power is restored the system automatically reinitializes dropping all calls in progress Back up battery is provid ed to the system data memory to retain the data for the following features e Call Forwarding e Speed Calling Station e Speed Calling System e Message Waiting e Return Schedule Message Display e Do Not Disturb When a COT card is used as a ground start trunk the Power Failure Single Line Telephone must be provid ed with a ground sending button for trunk access NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications
278. in Line Lockout the associated LED on the DSS Console flashes red at 30 ipm NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 230 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MUSIC ON HOLD MUSIC ON HOLD General Description This feature plays music when a line is placed on hold Music is provided by a circuit board memory chip or a local music source such as a CD player or a radio Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Music may be played in three different cases C O lines Tie Lines and internal Station to Station calls The same source can be used for all three If an external music source is desired it must be locally provided Refer to the Installation Procedure Man ual for installation instructions Any of the following can be selected as the Music On Hold source e MP card provides the following two synthesized melodies Nocturne or Menuett e Hold tone e External source tuner tape deck CD player etc connecting via COT or TNT or MP card e Internal Recorded Message Attendant operations resulting in Music On Hold being played include the following e When incoming calls to the Attendant are answered and the Attendant presses the HOLD key or dials an extension number the held party receives Music On Hold e When the Attendant camps on a call to a busy station the calling party is connected to Music On Hold until the called party
279. in off hook After a transfer Camp On has remained Camped On for a programmable period of time 8 to 128 seconds 30 seconds as set in default the station that set the Camp On will be recalled The ability to activate this feature can be allowed or denied in the Station s Class of Service A maximum of 28 stations can set call waiting Camp On simultaneously A maximum of 128 stations can set transfer Camp On simultaneously A party camped on for a transfer will hear Music On Hold when provided while on Consultation Hold NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 109 CAMP ON 10 11 12 13 14 15 Periodic Camp On tone can be provided every 4 seconds This can be allowed or denied in system program ming on a per system basis When denied a single Camp On signal is received Camp On can only be set if the called station is on a two party call Camp On is denied if the busy station is dialing or in Line Lockout receiving a system generated tone protected against any override by DND key a Data Station currently has a Camped On call or if any of the following features are activated on the busy station e Attendant Override e Conference e Executive Override e Attendant Camp On e Consultation Hold e Privacy e Call Hold by key e Data Line Security e Voice Call e Call Transfer When Camp On is denied the caller will receive reorder tone and can return to the origina
280. inal user reenters a held or transferred call the recall timing is reset If the call is returned to a Hold or Transfer condition the recall timer restarts When an Attendant reenters a held or Camped On trunk the recall timing is reset If the trunk is returned to a Hold or Transfer condition the recall timer restarts When a held call recalls to a Multiline Terminal a continuous ring of 0 5 seconds on 0 5 seconds off and an LED flash of 240 IPM occurs until the call is answered The signal occurs whether the Multiline Terminal is on hook or off hook and regardless of whether the Multiline Terminal is ring assigned on that line key Before an unattended transfer recalls to the originating station of the transfer the called station will ring nor mally for a programmable period of 4 to 120 seconds When the Automatic Recall begins the LCD of the originating station displays RECALL XXXX XXXX The station or trunk being transferred The transferred destination When a recall occurs on the Attendant Console a buzzer sounds provided no other calls are being pro cessed in addition to the LED indication The called station continues to ring If the called party answers after the Attendant reseizes the line a three party conference is established Page 60 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC RECALL 7 This feature is not activated when a Multiline Terminal holds the
281. ination cancellation code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the user s station number forwarded station and receive service set tone To cancel Call Forwarding Destination from Call Forwarded station 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Forwarding All Calls cancellation code and receive service set tone Service Conditions There is no limit to the number of stations which can set Call Forwarding Destination Stations can be allowed or denied this feature by Class Of Service in system programming 3 There is no limit to the number of Call Forwarding Destinations which can be set to forward to a station simultaneously Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls General Description When a forwarded call is rerouted to a station which has also set a Call Forward the call can be forwarded to another station A call can be forwarded up to a maximum of five times as specified in system programming Station Application All stations Operating Procedure The same operating procedures for Call Forwarding All Calls apply NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 82 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls Service Conditions 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls can forward a maximum of five times when the called station sets Call Forwarding All Calls to a st
282. incoming Listed Directory Number LDN received from a DID line can be displayed on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console This system data is assigned on a trunk route basis 11 The DID incoming LDN display is one digit to four digits NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 141 DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID DID Call Waiting DID Call Waiting General Description This feature allows an incoming call on a DID trunk or a tie line to automatically be Camped On to the desti nation station if the destination station is busy Station Application All stations Operating Procedure The camp on occurs automatically once this feature is assigned For details on how to respond to the camp on refer to the Camp On Features and Specifications Service Conditions 1 This feature is assigned on a per trunk route basis and on the basis of which number is dialed into the DID tie trunk The outside party receives ringback tone while waiting for the station to answer the Camp On 3 Refer to the Camp On Features and Specifications for more information and service conditions related to Camp On DID Digit Conversion General Description This feature allows the system to convert the digits received from the serving C O to valid station numbers when the C O numbering plan differs from the desired station numbering plan Station Application Not Applicable Operating P
283. ine Ter minal or an Attendant Console Up to 16 digits of the calling subscriber s number can be recorded on the SMDR Up to 24 digits of the calling subscriber s number can be sent to the OAI computer The 4RSTC card and the 4COTG 8COTQ card are required for receiving the Caller ID signals In case of receiving the subscriber s name while another name is being assigned by system programming it can be set which one has priority The kind of the ringing tone can be assigned to each calling subscriber s number respectively The destination station in the Day Mode Night Mode can be specified for each calling subscriber s number The priority for queuing when the destination station belongs to an UCD group and all the stations are busy can be set by each calling subscriber s number It can be specified whether Call Waiting will be set or not by each calling subscriber s number Table 0 in CMDC YY 00 63 is reserved for incoming numbers not programmed in the system When the system is in Mode A or B caller ID follows night termination of caller ID Development Data Assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 105 CALLER ID DISPLAY CALLER ID DISPLAY General Description Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminates to the line keys of a Multiline Terminal the calling party s information can be confirmed by the indications on the LC
284. ing NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 260 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Recall Key Service Conditions 1 One Prime Line per station is allowed Prime Line is assigned on a per station basis by the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT Only extensions or Direct Trunk Appearances can be assigned as Prime Lines 3 The default setting for Prime Line is the station s primary extension Recall Key General Description Each Multiline Terminal is equipped with a Recall Key that is used to generate a hookflash to access features provided by the outside exchange or to abandon a call while retaining the line for origination of another call Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure With an outside or Tie Line call in progress using extension appearance 1 Press the Recall key 2 Receive internal dial tone and trunk is released With an outside or Tie Line call in progress using direct appearance 1 Press the Recall key 2 Key operation is not affected The call is still in progress With a CENTREX call in progress using an extension or a Trunk Direct Appearance 1 Press the Recall key 2 Receive CENTREX feature dial tone With an internal call 1 Press the Recall key 2 Receive internal dial tone With a Conference in progress 1 Press the Recall key The station is removed fr
285. ing or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sound activities whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be il legal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws Legal advice should be sought prior to imple menting any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation prior to mon itoring or recording a telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties Service Conditions 1 Service feature class is used to control which stations are agents and which are supervisors The default setting in system programming is that one tone is sent to both parties when the monitoring fea ture is used As an option this tone may be disabled on a per system basis The Silent Monitor feature uses a 3 party conference circuit Therefore a maximum of 16 monitors can oc cur simultaneously in conjunction with any normal Conference Three Four party in progress NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 322 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA General Description In the numbering plan for a network to be
286. ion is provided However the call park location will appear in the display 12 No LED indication for the Call Park System key on an Attendant Console is provided Call Park Tenant General Description When a call is parked by Call Park Tenant the call can be retrieved from Call Park Tenant by any station within the tenant from which the call was originally parked Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To place a call into Call Park Tenant From a Single Line Telephone Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone Call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold Dial the Call Park Tenant feature access code Pe SNe Dial the Call Park Tenant location number 1 8 and receive service set tone If Call Park number is busy dial another location number using the Step Call feature until idle Call Park location is accessed mn Receive service set tone 6 Restore the handset From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone 2 Call in progress is placed on Consultation Hold 3 Dial Call Park Tenant feature access code 4 Dial Call Park Tenant location number 1 8 and receive service set tone If Call Park number is busy dial another location number using the Step Call feature until idle Call Park location is accessed 5 Receive service set tone 6 Restore handset OR Press the Hold key if Call Park Tenant feat
287. ion number and receive service set tone Restore the handset To cancel Message Waiting ee AS Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial Message Waiting reset access code Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone Restore the handset Note Property Management System PMS procedures will vary depending on the locally provided PMS Voice Message Waiting System To record dE O ES Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Message System record access code Dial the message number 0 9 and receive service set tone for 3 seconds Record the message Restore the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 219 MESSAGE WAITING To check Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Message Waiting System replay access code 1 2 3 Dial the message number 0 9 and receive service set tone for 3 seconds 4 Listen to the message 5 Restore the handset e To set Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Messaging Waiting System set access code Dial the message number 0 9 and receive feature dial tone 1 2 3 4 Dial the desired station number and receive feature dial tone 5 Repeat Step 4 for additional stations 6 Restore the handset e To cancel Voice Message Waiting System to all stations 1 Lif the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting Sys
288. itial installation or after a system initialization reset each agent must lift and restore handset of their station to begin receiving calls for the UCD group Busy In Busy Out UCD General Description This feature allows an agent in a UCD group to log their station onto or off of the group This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the UCD group goes to that station or not This prevents incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available Station Application Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Operating Procedure To log off busy out of a UCD station 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the log off busy out set feature access code or press the LOG OFF key 3 Restore the handset To log on cancel busy out to a UCD station 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the log on busy out cancel feature access code or press the LOG ON key 3 Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 Any agent may log off busy out or log on cancel busy out When an agent has activated log off busy out any call targeted at the UCD group will bypass that agent Calls directed to the specific station number will ring at the agent position The agent may originate calls while in log off busy out mode 3 The agent can log off busy out their station while idle or while on an incoming outside call When
289. iting Indication to the boss station Station Application Any type of station as boss extension and Multiline Terminal with appearance of boss extension at Secretary position Operating Procedure For a Boss Secretary transfer of an incoming call to the boss Multiline Terminal 1 Secretary answers the incoming call by pressing boss line key appearance and lifting the handset Secretary converses with the calling party Boss line key appearance is steady green on secretary s station and steady red at other appearances Secretary presses boss line key appearance again Incoming call is placed on Consultation Hold and re ceives Music On Hold if provided Boss line key appearance is steady green at secretary s station steady green at boss Multiline Terminal and steady red elsewhere At boss Multiline Terminal a tone burst is heard followed by a voice call from the secretary using the boss primary extension over the speaker Secretary announces the call The secretary can now go on hook The boss primary extension hears a chime tone and flashes on hold red the secretary s appearance of the Boss extension flashes on hold green and all other line key appearances of the boss extension provide busy indication The boss lifts the handset or presses the primary extension line button and is connected to the calling party OR The boss can lift the handset to answer the voice call and talk to the secretary privately using the handset
290. ive ringback tone The other party receives ringing indication Converse when the other party answers Service Conditions 1 There is a maximum of 100 assignments for Hotline destination If internal bidirectional Hotline calling is required two assignments one for each direction must be made A maximum of 50 pairs of bidirectional Hotlines can be assigned Hotline assignments are programmed into system data using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT A Hotline call can be transferred to another station using the Call Transfer feature On an internal Hotline call the calling party hears reorder tone when the called station is in one of the fol lowing conditions e Busy e In Line Lockout In make busy through software programming Call Forwarding is applied whenever the destination station of the Hotline call has set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer Hotline calls can be directed to the outside exchange network by assignment of the destination as a system speed dial memory location When this Hotline is used the system will access a trunk in the trunk route associated with the trunk access code assigned in the system speed dial memory location and then will dial out the assigned outside number See System Speed Dialing for the methods to reprogram the outside num ber On Hotline Outside calls when all trunks in the trunk route are busy reorder tone is heard b
291. ividual system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 270 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM General Description This feature provides the installers a simple procedure to have the system generate system data according to the system hardware configuration thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time When activated the system scans hardware configuration such as line trunk card slot location and assigns system data such as extension numbers trunk numbers etc according to a predetermined generic program assignment Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure Refer to the Command Manual for activation procedures Service Conditions This feature is only applicable for equipment installed in Port Interface Module PIM 0 to 3 System data is not assigned to any vacant slot Virtual extensions are not assigned The Resident System Program scans the hardware configuration MAS O aie Details of Resident System Program a Extension Numbers Extension Numbers 200 through 455 are assigned according to sequential slot location number of the associated circuit boards b SN610 ATTCON Numbers Attendant Console Numbers E004 through E007 are assigned according to sequential slot location numbers of the associated circuit card c Trunk Numbers Trunk Numbers 000 through 255 are assigned according to sequential slot locatio
292. l DSS mode To set cancel Do Not Disturb 1 Press the DND key on the DSS BLF console to enter the Do Not Disturb mode 2 Press the applicable DSS key for the desired station The associated LED lights steady green when Do Not Disturb is set and extinguishes when Do Not Disturb is canceled NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 229 MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION 3 Press the DND key to return to the normal DSS mode To set cancel Night Service 1 Press the NT key on the DSS BLF Console OR Dial the Night Service set cancel code when off hook on the primary extension Answering an Operator call 1 Ze Press the OPE key The associated LED lights steady green and the LCD will display either the trunk name and number or station name and number Converse Service Conditions 1 10 11 12 13 Transfer of calls is possible with the Transfer key Answering of calls is possible using the Answer key or by direct line key selection Normal internal call operation is available using the station s primary extension a secondary extension or a software line appearance A DSS BLF Console can be associated with the Attendant Multiline Terminal and its keys can be assigned as Direct Station Selection DSS keys and used in conjunction with the RLS key When the DSS BLF Console is assigned for use with the Multiline Terminal the unit can be provid
293. l Park location number 00 19 and receive service set tone If Call Park System number is busy dial another location number using the Step Call feature until an idle park location is accessed Restore the handset From an Attendant Console 1 2 Dial Call Park System feature access code The first available Call Park location is selected by the system and displayed in the LCD Receive service set tone Press the RELEASE Key To retrieve a call from Call Park System From a Single Line Telephone L 2 3 4 From any station go off hook and receive internal dial tone Dial the Call Park System retrieval access code Dial the Call Park System location number 00 19 Converse From a Multiline Terminal with a Trunk Direct Appearance 1 2 Go off hook and receive dial tone Press Trunk Direct Appearance feature key flashing From an Attendant Console 1 2 3 4 Press LOOP key Dial the Call Park System feature access code or press the Call Park System feature key Dial the Call Park System location number 00 19 Converse Service Conditions A station user can originate and receive calls while having a call in Call Park System A maximum of 20 simultaneous calls can be parked within a system A station user can place multiple calls into Call Park System provided the maximum number is not exceeded Any internal or external call can be placed into Call Park System Any call left on
294. l party in the case of a Camp On transfer When single digit access codes are enabled Multline Terminal users can set a Camp On without using the Transfer key twice Camp On call waiting for outside calls DID CCIS incoming calls can be allowed or denied on a per trunk route basis or per DID number basis When the called station is a pilot station in a Hunt group or UCD group Hunting or UCD queuing is fol lowed If all stations in the Hunt group are busy the called station is camped on When the called station has set Call Forwarding All Calls and the forwarding destination is busy the for warding destination is camped on When the called station has set Call Forwarding Busy Line and the forwarding destination is busy the orig inally called station is camped on NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 110 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY CENTREX COMPATIBILITY General Description A combination of features allows full integration of the NEAX2000 IVS with Centrex service Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Refer to associated features Service Conditions 1 Flexible Configuration e Universal Ports to meet high Trunk to Station ratio e Building block approach for modular growth e Flexible Line Assignment e Wide variety of terminals 2 Terminal Flexibility e Choice of terminals to meet multiple applications e Answering Positions 16 line M
295. lay dial or wink start sig naling is available 5 When a trunk route access code is dialed by a station user the tie line route is used to index a trunk route restriction table to determine if the call attempt is allowed If access is restricted reorder tone is provided 6 The system can be programmed to supply second dial tone on incoming E amp M Tie Lines Both 2 and 4 wire Type I and Type V E amp M Tie Lines can be connected 8 When 4 wire E amp M Tie Lines are connected the following pad control can be assigned e Station to Tie Line 0 to 12 db e C O to Tie Line 0 to 4 db e Tie Line to Tie Line 0 to 4 db 9 An ODT card is required for 2 or 4 wire E amp M Tie Line interface NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 305 TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING General Description This feature allows Trunk to Trunk connections through the system without the need for any Attendant assis tance or control The major use of this feature is in association with a dial tandem tie line network to allow Tie Line connections and incoming Tie Line calls automatic access to and completion of local C O calls Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure 1 E amp M Tie Line is seized by distant end system 2 Distant end system dials applicable trunk access code and desired number Service Conditions When using a 2 wire application ODT card
296. le Line Telephones except that the message waiting LED remains on when the terminal is off hook To set Message Reminder service for Multiple Stations set Message Reminder for the first station wait for feature dial tone and then set the reminder for the next station The number of messages is displayed while the Multiline Terminal is in an idle state The number of messages displayed includes the setting of Message Waiting NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 217 MESSAGE WAITING MESSAGE WAITING General Description This feature allows the Attendant Console Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument administrative station or Property Management System PMS terminal to light a lamp on an uninterrupted or interrupted basis on a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting In addition to the lamp indication control this feature also provides the Voice Message Waiting service that an originating station user can set the Message Waiting with a prerecorded message by using the Digital Announce ment Trunk DAT circuit e Voice Message Waiting System An originating station user can choose the prerecorded message to be set by dialing the message number associated The messages are recorded by the predetermined station e Voice Message Waiting Individual When setting Message Waiting an originating station user announces the message to be
297. lent Monitor UCD Uniform Numbering Plan UNP Voice and Data x lt m Variable Timing Parameters Voice Guide Voice Mail Integration Voice Mail Private Password Voice Mail Transfer X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X JiJiJdimimi Jimi Lidii lil mpm Whisper Page Note This feature is not available in NEAX EXPRESS NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page xvi NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ACCOUNT CODE ACCOUNT CODE General Description This feature when used with Station Message Detail Recording SMDR allows station users and Attendants to enter a cost accounting or client billing code up to 16 digits into the system Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To enter an Account Code from a station before accessing an outside line 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Enter the Account Code feature access code or press the Account Code feature access key 3 Enter the Account Code 4 Receive dial tone and dial the desired number including outside line access code To enter an Account Code while connected to an outside line From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Account Code feature access key and conversation continues 2 Enter the Account Code From the Attendant Console 1 While connected to an outside line press the START key only if an outgoing call 2 Enter the Account Code feature
298. line Terminals can be assigned as the stations within the group call groups Virtual line cannot be assigned A station can belong to multiple groups Up to eight groups can be assigned as the call group by system data including voice paging and Group Call Automatin Conference A Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal can be an originator and page a group even if the originator does not belong to the group The originator cannot page two or more groups simultaneously A group cannot be paged simultaneously by the plural group call leaders If all stations within the paged group are busy the originator hears a reorder tone The Group Call leader will continue to hear ringback tone until the page is answered If does not time out A station can be paged in the idle state When the station is busy at the time of paging the station will not be paged even if the station returns to idle afterward Even if a station sets Call Forwarding the originator can page the station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 176 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 GROUP LISTENING GROUP LISTENING General Description When a Multiline Terminal user makes a call using the handset pressing the Speaker key will allow others to listen through the built in speaker of the Multiline Terminal The user may continue talking on the handset at the same time Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To mo
299. ll automatically replace the first 4 Ifnecessary dialing can be added after pressing the Save and Repeat key 5 When a call is originated using the Save and Repeat feature the LED associated with the Save and Repeat key goes out However the memory is retained and that number can be accessed again 6 To monitor the saved digits press the Save and Repeat key while the station is idle The saved digits will be displayed if the Multiline Terminal is equipped with an LCD 7 The trunk access code is saved along with the dialed number on a Trunk Direct Appearance This allows use of the Save and Repeat key on an extension 8 The maximum number of digits that can be stored is 26 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 282 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 SECURITY ALARM SECURITY ALARM General Description This feature provides an indication on the Attendant Console when a contact closure occurs Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 The contact to be monitored is connected across Tip T and Ring R of one circuit on a 4LC 8LC card The contact installed must be a normally open contact 3 The contact generated signal is non latching therefore if the contact opens again the signal to the Atten dant Console stops 4 The station number assigned to the single line circuit associated with the contact closure is displayed whe
300. ll is connected Service Conditions 1 Attendant Camp On can be set when the busy station is connected to another station or trunk in a two party connection 2 Attendant Camp On is denied if the busy station is dialing in Line Lockout receiving a system generated tone a Data Station protected against any override by DND key currently has a Camped On call or any of the following features are activated on the busy station e Attendant Override e Consultation Hold e Call Transfer e Data Line Security Camp On e Executive Override e Conference e Hold e Privacy e Paging e Voice Call When Camp On is denied the Attendant will receive reorder tone 3 The maximum number of simultaneous Camp Ons per Attendant without loop release is the same as the number of loop keys assigned SN610 ATTCON SN716 DESKCON When Attendant loop release is pro vided the maximum number is 12 4 The station receiving the Camp On can answer using the Call Hold feature or Answer Key feature Repeated use of these features allows the station to alternate between the calls Broker s Call 5 Calls that remain Camped On for longer than a predetermined time will initiate an Automatic Recall to the Attendant that set the Camp On NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 19 ATTENDANT CONSOLE SN610 ATTCON ATTENDANT CONSOLE SN610 ATTCON General Description The Attendant Console SN610 ATTCON operates
301. lled on a per station basis 5 The interruption rate of the external relay control is programmable on a per system basis as follows e 30IPM e 60IPM e 120 IPM e Steady This interruption rate is the same as the rate used for TAS Trunk Answer Any Station Delay Announcement UCD General Description This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to a UCD group A single announcement or two separate announcements can be provided Station Application None Operating Procedure Operation is automatic once system programming is assigned NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 318 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Hunt Past No Answer UCD Service Conditions 1 A Delay Announcement service can be provided for DIT DID or a trunk call transferred by a station user or the Attendant to a UCD Group Internal calls or Station to Station transferred calls to the UCD Group can go into the UCD queue but do not receive the Delay Announcement 2 The following configurations are available when using Delay Announcement a After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided until an agent is available or the caller hangs up b After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if
302. lling Equipment must be locally provided Loop Start or Ground Start trunks may be used to interface Code Calling Equipment to the system 3 An external equipment control relay board PN DKO0 or built in DKOO in MP can be used when external equipment low power control is required up to 125 mA For higher power control a locally provided ex ternal relay can be driven by the PN DKOO or built in DKOO in MP 4 Access to this feature can be allowed or denied in Class of Service assignment Dictation Equipment Access General Description This feature permits dial access to customer provided Dictation Equipment and in some instances allows them to maintain telephone dial control of normal dictation system features Station Application All stations NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 225 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS Foreign Exchange FX Access Operating Procedure To access the Dictation Equipment from any station 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Dictation Equipment feature access code 3 Proceed according to operation procedures of the Dictation Equipment Service Conditions 1 One trunk circuit is required for each piece of dictation interface equipment accessed 2 Dictation Equipment must be able to receive DTMF signals if dial control is desired however access is also available with rotary dial signals 3 Dictation Equipment must be locally
303. lls or toll calls only depending on the customers re quirements When customer provided computer equipment is connected using the RS 232C interface SMDR informa tion will be transmitted directly to the equipment as each call record is completed One RS 232C interface port is provided The following specifications apply to this port e Synchronization Asynchronous e Data Speed 9600 bps maximum e Code ASCII 7 or 8 bit parity bit If the distance between the system and the processing computer exceeds 50 feet an asynchronous modem should be used If the outgoing call is directed to a trunk which does not supply answer supervision SMDR will start re cording the call approximately 10 seconds after the last digit has been dialed Supervision of the status of the external RS 232C terminal is not supplied There are two kinds of SMDR features as follows a Built in SMDR The MP card has one of RS 232C ports for SMDR This card provides memory for a maximum of 256 calls and provides a record of a maximum of 64 trunk calls simultaneously for a maximum of 6 digit extension number e MP without expansion memory standard up to 256 calls 64 trunks MP with expansion memory optional up to 1280 calls 256 trunks b SMDR with APOO e APOO without expansion memory standard up to 1600 calls if central office feature is used up to 800 calls e APOO with expansion memory optional up to 27000 calls if central office feature
304. local voice paging equipment and connects both parties automatically after the paged party has answered the page by dialing an access code Station Application All stations and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure To page From any station 1 The calling station dials External Paging feature access code and receives continuous ringback tone for 1 second The calling station pages desired party 3 The calling station remains off hook or hangs up e From an Attendant Console Place the incoming call on hold by pressing Hold key Seize an idle LOOP key Dial the External Paging feature access code and receive continuous ringback tone for 1 second Page the desired party Press the RELEASE key SE A Na To answer From any station Non delay operation 1 The paged party dials the Meet Me access code 2 The paged party is immediately connected to the calling party From any station Delay operation 1 The paged party dials Meet Me access code 2 The party paged receives ringback tone 3 The calling station rings 4 The calling station goes off hook and is immediately connected to the paged party To cancel the page from an Attendant Console 1 Press the External Paging feature key while paging 2 The page is canceled NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 166 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET ME Service Conditions Amplifiers and speakers must b
305. lti Function keys indicates the status of the functions displayed on the Liq uid Crystal Display LCD The Incoming Call Identification ICI and LOOP keys should not be assigned as Multi Function keys Multiple Console Operation General Description This feature allows more than one Attendant Console to operate within the same system Operating Procedure Normal operating procedures are applied for each console installed Service Conditions The maximum number of consoles per Firmware Processor FP is 16 The maximum number of consoles allowable per system is 16 Each incoming call is displayed on all consoles within a tenant group whether idle or busy If all Attendants are involved in processing calls when another C O call arrives the Call Waiting CW will show on all con sole LCDs A station can be connected to only one Attendant loop at a time Any attempt at establishing multiple con nections will result in reorder tone being sent to the party attempting multiple loop connection Attendant Interposition Transfer is used to transfer calls between Attendant Consoles Page 38 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only 6 The system operates only on a switched loop basis Fixed loop operation is not available 7 To place a multiple console system or a multiple console tenant group into Night Service a prepro gram
306. m Attendant Console Station C does not set Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line or Call Forwarding No An swer to the VMS Station A or outside party calls Attendant Console Attendant Console dials Station C a Station C is busy Attendant Console hears Busy Tone BUSY appears in display and then presses VM transfer button e Station A or outside party hears Music on Hold source NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 336 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VOICE MAIL TRANSFER Attendant Console does not see CF BUSY in display as if it would if a VM port were available If Attendant presses RLS key the call will Camp on to Station C If it is allowed in system program ming CM08 428 and a VM port becomes available the Calling Party will automatically transfer to the VMS when the Attendant Camp on Recall timer occurs If no VM port is available or if VMS Transfer with Camp on is not allowed the Calling Party will recall the Attendant Console when the Attendant Recall timer occurs b Station C is idle Attendant Console hears Ringback Tone and presses VM transfer button Station A or outside party hears Music on Hold until Attendant Console presses RLS key When Attendant Console presses RLS key Station A or outside party hears Ringback Tone Attendant Console does not see CF NANS in display as if it would if a VM port were available but Attendant Console sees Station C number in dis
307. m a guest room station or station or administrative station 1 2 3 4 Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the Automatic Wake Up cancellation code Receive service set tone Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 Setting and canceling can be initiated from the following e Attendant Console e Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument e Guest Station e Administrative Station e Property Management System PMS terminal A maximum of 32 stations can be set for the same Automatic Wake Up time When the setting exceeds 32 the excess stations will be set to an earlier time in 5 minute intervals Wake Up attempts whether successful or not can be printed out at a locally provided printer The results of execution of Automatic Wake Up set and cancel are also printed The ringing signal is the same as station to station calls and its time can be assigned from 4 sec to 32 sec programmable on a system basis The Automatic Wake Up call will ring a station in Do Not Disturb When setting or canceling has been completed service set tone is heard as confirmation NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 63 AUTOMATIC WAKE UP 10 11 12 13 When Automatic Wake Up call is received the station receives music or an announcement A DAT circuits of MP card or a 2DAT 4DAT card or COT card with locally provided music or announcement source is required As an option
308. mber Follow the instructions given by the VMS To retrieve a voice mail message from the voice mail system 1 2 Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the voice mail extension number or the Message Waiting Message Reminder retrieve code and receive ringback tone The LCD displays xxx VMS Voice mail extension number Follow the instructions given by the VMS Service Conditions 1 The VMS is interfaced to the system through the 4LCD 8LC card The 4LCD 8LC card provides discon nect supervision in the form of a momentary loop open The NEAXmail AD 16 is interfaced to the system through the DLC card The NEAXmail ADS requires no interface card The system transfers only DTMF signals to the connected VMS It cannot transfer dial pulses to the system Messages can be retrieved from any Multiline Terminal DTMF telephone or the Attendant Console but not from DP telephones When the calling party is connected to the Voice Mail System only DTMF signals can be sent to the VMS for registering a message DP telephones cannot be used Stations can set Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer and Call Forwarding Busy Line to the VMS The system sends out a mail box number to the VMS Calling a station which has Call For warding set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS The DTMF signal prepause Inter Digit Pause and DTMF signal width of the station number automatically sent out to the VMS from the syst
309. mber of that device From the MAT or CAT a maintenance person can read the slot number of any device which does not respond to the Main Processor or provides an illegal status to the Main Processor NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 129 DIAL BY NAME DIAL BY NAME General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to search for a desired number by name The number and name are registered in the system and they are shown on Multiline Terminal LCD The Multiline Terminal user can search for the desired number by name using up or down soft keys When the Multiline Terminal user finds the desired number the call can be originated by pressing the Line Trunk key or going off hook Station Application Multiline Terminal with LCD and Soft Key Operating Procedure To search calling number by name and originate a call by Speed Dialing System 1 2 From the idle state press the SYS soft key on the Multiline Terminal To search by name enter up to the first four characters of a name using the keypad Refer to Service Con dition 2 Press the UP or DOWN soft key to start the search The name and the number are shown on the LCD If more than one name matches the letters entered scroll through the matches with the UP or DOWN soft key If no matches are found the first System Speed Dial buffer will be displayed To search for a different name repeat Step 2 Man
310. med master console must press the MODE NITE and Answer key press Night key for SN716 DESKCON If one of the other consoles enters Night Service all calls addressed to that console will be directed to the other console s 8 When a console has entered Night Service all calls already connected to its loop must be processed from that console Recalls and serial recalls are routed to the night transfer station if assigned Pushbutton Calling Attendant Only General Description This feature permits an operator to place all calls over Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF lines from the push button keypad on the Attendant Console Operating Procedure The operator presses the push button keypad to dial Service Conditions 1 This feature requires that all Central Office trunks or tie trunks accept push button signaling DTMF 2 Push button Calling Attendant Only may be added to the system without providing push button calling ca pability to other stations Serial Call General Description This feature is activated by the Attendant when an incoming calling party wishes to speak with more than one internal party When the internal station subsequently disconnects from the C O line call the C O party auto matically rings back to the same Attendant Operating Procedure 1 The Attendant answers an incoming C O call The Attendant extends the call to the desired station The Attendant presses the SERIAL CALL SET SC key T
311. mple 3 Dial 222 22 then press ABC soft key CB is recorded and input mode is changed from alphabet to number d The DEL key is not available in both alphabet and number mode Page 132 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIAL BY NAME 3 Number and Name Registration a Inthe alphabet and number input mode when the Feature key is pressed the Feature key lamp is flashed and Speaker key lamp is lit b Up to 16 characters can be recorded as a name c Up to four digits of trunk access code and up to 26 digits of station number can be recorded When the new name and number is recorded the system automatically search the vacant memory block after pressing Feature key e In the name and number registration operation if both name and number are not registered in speed calling memory block the Multiline Terminal LCD shows as follows 35 11 22 PM MON 12 MAR 1999 ABC UP DOWN 4 Search a Up to four characters are used as a key word when the number is searched by name b Ifthe Multiline Terminal user enters character exceeding four it is invalid c When the same name has been registered in the system the LCD shows the name and number which are assigned the lowest memory block number d When searching is performed without entering a key word the LCD shows the lowest memory block number available for the Multiline Terminal e When no key word for sear
312. must be assigned on Trunk Direct Appearances on the Multiline Terminal 16 When Distinctive Ringing in behind system is activated Delayed Ringing is not available for the related C O trunk NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 154 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DO NOT DISTURB DO NOT DISTURB General Description This feature restricts incoming calls to a station and can be set by an individual station or from the Attendant Console Placing a station in Do Not Disturb DND does not prevent a station from originating a voice or data call or from receiving a data call This feature also allows a station to ensure privacy from telephone interrup tions while on an outgoing call Additionally the Attendant Console can place a group of stations in the Do Not Disturb condition Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Single Line Telephone To set 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Do Not Disturb feature access code and receive service set tone 3 Restore the handset To cancel 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Do Not Disturb cancel code and receive service set tone 3 Restore the handset From a Multiline Terminal To set Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the DND function key and the associated LED lights If equipped with an LCD the display will indi cate SET 3 Press the Speaker key e To can
313. n Isa match found LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT Isa digit code development pattern as signed Check new digit code development pattern table Isa day of week pattern as signed Check day of week assignment Isa route tenant or time pattern assigned Reorder tone What pattern is assigned Tenant NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 203 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT Isa time of day pattern Check time of day What pattern is Reorder tone pattern as signed assigned assignment assigned Isa satan Yes Y Get route pattern assigned to be used Isar Get first priority pate Yes gt route and go to fa i assigne assignee LCR TR table No e Reorder tone Isa trunk restriction Check trunk Get next priority route and go to assigned LCR TR restriction table No Allowed Is trunk route Yes table A Denied Allowed or denied Is this the last priority No busy Isa route Reorder tone 6 digit
314. n the Attendant presses the ATND key or Answer key 5 Assignment of this feature is accomplished using Hotline assignment of a single line extension to the At tendant Console Refer to the Hotline Inside Outside Features and Specifications for more information NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 283 SET RELOCATION SET RELOCATION General Description This feature enables two stations to be moved from one location to another without reprogramming station data at MAT Station Application From Multiline Terminal to Multiline Terminal From Single Line Terminal to Single Line Terminal Operating Procedure To move Station A to Station B 1 AS Lift handset at Station A receive Dial Tone Dial Authorization Code access code receive Special Dial Tone Dial Authorization Code for changing station class temporarily receive Dial Tone Dial Set Relocation access code receive Special Dial Tone Dial Station B number receive Service Set Tone and LCD displays SWAP OK xxxx where xxxx is Station B number Restore the handset After four seconds data between Station A and Station B will be exchanged Service Conditions 1 This feature can move Multiline Terminal to Multiline Terminal or Single Line Terminal to Single Line Terminal The following cases are not available e Single Line Terminal gt Multiline Terminal e PS PS Single Line Terminal Mul
315. n Do Not Disturb will receive reorder tone or on a tenant basis can be assigned to transfer to the Attendant or a predesignated station The station in Do Not Disturb can originate calls in the normal manner Call Forwarding can be set to a station in Do Not Disturb A Do Not Disturb station will be omitted from the Station Hunting chain If a DIT call is directed to a pilot of a hunt group hunting will be provided Internal calls will receive a fast busy tone The Do Not Disturb station can cancel DND even though the condition was set by the Attendant Verification of stations in Do Not Disturb is only possible from the Attendant Console Multiline Terminals with LCD and a DND key assigned can verify their own DND setting The ability to set DND can be controlled on a per station via Class of Service or a per system basis This feature can only be set or canceled by the station while the station is receiving internal dial tone When a Multiline Terminal is set in DND calls to the primary extension and secondary extensions will not ring Trunks programmed to ring will not do so while DND is set but flashing LED indications are still provided DND will not deny an Executive Override Only the Attendant has the ability to place a group of stations in Do Not Disturb There is only one group available and the stations within the group are programmed in system data There is no limitation on the number of stations in the group NEAX2000 IVS B
316. n Hunting Circular groups can be rerouted to a single extension within the Station Hunting Secretarial group Multiple entry points can be used by assigning different Station Hunting Ter minal pilot extensions and different Station Hunting Circular member extensions to different Station Hunt ing Secretarial extensions 5 Unlike the normal Circular Hunt group where a call to a member extension which has Call Forwarding All Calls or Call Forwarding Busy Line set will result in Call Forwarding occurring a rerouted Station Hunt group will not follow call forward setting but will bypass the forwarded station and continue the Secretarial Hunt 6 One Station Hunting Secretarial group is available per system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 294 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR General Description This feature provides a call record for outgoing Station to Trunk calls and incoming Trunk to Station calls in cluding Data Call This facilitates cost control by identifying trunk use and misuse by individual stations Sta tion Message Detail Recording SMDR enables call billing to customers and clients and provides a means for checking local telephone bills Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 SMDR can be programmed to record all outgoing ca
317. n Hunting for Non DIT Calls Provided Not Provided Station Hunting for DIT calls Provided Not Provided VIP Class Provided Not Provided FAX Station FAX Station Ordinary Station 6 Authorization Codes can be used to temporarily change the trunk route restriction class incoming outgo ing and code restrictions and the feature service class A B C when a station is used Refer to the Autho rization Code feature 7 Two assignments one for day mode and one for night mode are provided for trunk route restriction incom ing outgoing and code restrictions for each station When the system is placed in night mode the trunk route restriction classes assigned for night mode are used for incoming and outgoing calls for all stations 8 Non restricted stations can transfer outgoing calls after dialing to stations that are outgoing restricted Only the Attendant Console can permit restricted stations to place outgoing calls by the Attendant Assisted Calling feature 10 If arestricted station is connected to an unrestricted station the unrestricted station cannot add on an outside party using a trunk route to which the restricted station is denied dial access Attempts to do so result in im mediate ringback to the station attempting the add on The outside call must be made first before attempting to add on the restricted station NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 116 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0
318. n be performed only by dialing the Station Number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 326 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS General Description This feature gives the system the versatility to change timing duration using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT All timing parameters are set initially in the Resident System Program These timing parameters can be changed according to the customer s requirements Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure Refer to the Feature Programming Manual for programming instructions Service Conditions The Feature Programming Manual contains instructions on how to change the following timing durations Parameter Automatic Recall of Attendant transferred Camp On and unanswered calls Duration in sec unless otherwise marked Standard Timing 31 2 33 6 Variable Timing 0 0 124 8 2 4 sec increments in 2 4 33 6 sec 9 6 sec increments in 28 8 124 8 sec Elapsed time before Call Forwarding No Answer for incoming trunk calls or Attendant Overflow acti vation 32 36 0 120 4 sec increments Station Message Detail Recording SMDR valid call timer 20 24 8 40 Disconnect recognition time for trunks 0 96 1 44 0 6 72 0 48 sec increments Recall timing for Exclusive Hold 236
319. n number of the associated circuit boards d Multifrequency Receivers 8RSTA External Equipment and Key Interface DKO00 Extension Memory for APOO Digital Announcement Trunk 2DAT Consecutive circuit numbers beginning at 00 are assigned according to sequential slot location number of the associated circuit boards e Extension data Following data is assigned on a per extension basis e Type of dial signal Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF for Single Line Telephones f Trunk data Following data is assigned on a per trunk basis Trunk Route Numbers 00 for C O Lines 01 for 2 Wire E amp M Tie Lines NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 271 RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM 02 for 4 Wire E amp M Tie Lines 03 for Direct Inward Dial lines e Incoming call indication Provided at trunk line appearance LED g Trunk Route Data Following data is assigned on a trunk route basis e Type of trunk RT00 Direct Distance Dialing RTO1 RTO2 gt E amp M Tie Lines 2W 4W RT03 Direct Inward Dialing e Type of address signaling for all trunk routes is DTMF for incoming and outgoing calls Tie Lines are assigned for wink start operation h System Speed Dialing memory block data 100 Memory blocks are allocated to tenant 00 i Multiline Terminal line key data The following data is assigned according to the type of the terminal e 8 button terminal Line key 08 Primary ext
320. nal Privacy Release Dual Hold Inhibit Override by DND Group Listening 6 10 Party Conference Trunk Leader Voice Call Answer Hold Multiline Terminal Attendant Position e Service Class C Ringing Line Pickup Tone Ring Selection on Multiline Terminal Hookswitch Flash during internal call Hookswitch Flash during outside C O call Multiline Terminal type with or without LCD Off Hook Alarm overflow service in case of busy terminating station a Automatic Uniform Call Distribution queuing with Camp On Call Waiting b Automatic Uniform Call Distribution queuing NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 115 CLASS OF SERVICE c Camp On Call Waiting d Hunting 5 Separately from the above each station can be assigned to have the following options Feature Option Do Not Disturb Group Provided Not Provided Room Cut Off Group Provided Not Provided Message Waiting Service Provided Not Provided Howler Tone Provided Not Provided Station Message Detail Recording Provided Not Provided Data Line Security Provided Not Provided Feature Option Ringing to a Single Line Telephone when the exten sion also appears on a Multiline Terminal Provided Not Provided Secretary Station Secretary Station Ordinary Boss Station Automatic Message Waiting Cancel upon answering call from Message Waiting Set Station Automatic Cancel No Automatic Cancel Statio
321. nal digit This feature will operate only if the number of the idle station is identical to that of the busy station in all respects except the last digit Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 The dialed station 220 is busy 2 Dial 5 3 If station 225 is idle the call will be connected there Service Conditions 1 Ifthe second selected station is also busy Step Call can continue until an idle station is reached When Call Forwarding All Calls is set and a station called during Step Call meets the Call Forwarding condition Call Forwarding will occur Step Call can be activated when busy tone is returned on a Consultation Hold or Call Park attempt 3 When a call is rerouted by Call Forwarding and the station to which the call was forwarded is busy Step Call will occur within the forwarded to station s tens group of stations and not the initially dialed station s tens group of stations 4 Step Call can not be initiated on Direct Inward Dial and Direct Inward Termination calls but can be initiated on Direct Inward System Access DISA calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 300 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT General Description When various types of peripheral equipment such as facsimiles dictation equipment Voice Mail etc are con nected to the line circuits of the system
322. ncoming only trunks are recommended This minimizes DIT calls meeting busy conditions If there is no answer at a station the calling party will continuously receive ringback tone Call Fowarding No Answer will occur if set or the calling party will be transferred to the Attendant or Trunk Answer any Station by system programming if enabled Once a call is answered it can be processed by the called station in the same way as any normal trunk call If the DIT is assigned to a pilot number of a Station Hunting group or Automatic Uniform Call Distribution ACD UCD group the incoming call will follow the hunt group station assignment If the station is Call Forwarded the incoming call is connected to the Call Forward target station according to the types of Call Forwarding set and the condition of the DIT station This feature is normally utilized where direct in service is required on a limited basis The number of sta tions thus serviced is limited to the number of trunks available for Direct Inward Termination Multiple trunks can be assigned to Direct Inward Terminate to an extension but a trunk cannot be assigned to Direct Inward Terminate to multiple extensions When the Direct Inward Termination station is busy the call can be preprogrammed to either go to the At tendant Trunk Answer any Station or Camp On During night mode the call can be pre programmed to Camp On or go directly to Trunk Answer any Station NEAX2000 IVS B
323. ncoming voice an nouncements ringing and recalls override Background Music Up to 10 music programs can be offered Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To set Background Music 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial the Background Music feature access code 3 Dial the Background Music program number 0 9 4 Press the Speaker key To cancel 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial the Background Music feature access code 3 Press the key 4 Press the Speaker key Service Conditions Up to 10 music programs can be offered Only one per station can be selected at a time This feature is allowed or denied in Class Of Service A COT or TNT circuit is required for each music program The music source s must be locally provided The input source is 10 to 0 dBm 600 ohms COT or 8dBm or less 10K ohms TNT 5 When a terminal goes off hook the music is automatically stopped When the terminal goes on hook the music starts again until the feature is canceled Peter hoe NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 65 BOSS SECRETARY CALLING BOSS SECRETARY CALLING General Description A secretary with a Multiline Terminal can use an appearance of the boss extension to screen calls for that ex tension and announce and or transfer calls to that extension Additionally the secretary can call the boss during a busy condition and can send a Message Wa
324. nd continue in the order of hunting The maximum number of stations per hunt group is 60 There is no limit to the number of Station Hunting Circular groups within the system In a Station Hunting Circular group any number of stations can be designated as secretarial stations When all stations in the Station Hunting Circular group are busy the system will reroute a call initiated to the secretarial station to a preassigned Station Hunting Secretarial group All stations within the Station Hunt ing Circular group can be assigned the same station as an entry to the Station Hunting Secretarial group Call Forwarding All Calls has priority over Station Hunting if the dialed station has this feature set Call Forwarding Busy if set at the called station can occur if all stations in the hunting group are busy Recalls Call Back Call Park Camp On Call Transfer etc return to the originating station and do not hunt 10 Each station can belong to only one hunt group NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 291 STATION HUNTING Station Hunting Terminal 11 This feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialed or terminated under the following condi tions e Dialed from station e Dialed from Attendant Console e Dialed from Direct Inward Dialing DID e Dialed from Tie Line e Terminated by Direct In Termination DIT e Terminated by Hotline Inside
325. nditions 1 The following lines can be assigned to appear on the line keys of Multiline Terminals e Primary Extension This line is associated with the extension number assigned to the circuit on the DLC card e Secondary Extension This line is a secondary appearance of a primary extension appearing on another Multiline Terminal a Single Line Telephone extension or a Software Line Appearance e Trunk Direct Appearances Refer to the Miscellaneous Trunk Access feature for available trunks e Intercom Three types are available refer to the Intercom feature for detailed information e Hotlines Refer to the Hotline feature for detailed information e Pooled Lines Refer to the Pooled Lines Access feature for detailed information NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 258 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Mute Key Mute Key General Description This feature allows the distant extension user of a station user that presses a mute key during conversation not to hear the station user s voice though the station user can hear the distant extension user s voice By pressing the mute key again the mute status returns to original conversation Station Application Multiline Terminals D Series E Operating Procedure To activate muting 1 While a station is in conversation the station presses a mute key e The other side party cannot hear the voice of the station
326. ne button associated with the secondary appearance of the single line extension on the Multiline Terminal 3 On the PC execute the command sequence to tell the modem to go on hook 4 Converse with called party when they answer Service Conditions This feature can be allowed denied to a Multiline Terminal via Class of Service assignment 2 This feature is allowed only when the extension to be accessed is in conversation with another extension or trunk This feature is denied when the extension to be accessed is listening to a system tone busy tone ser vice set tone internal ringback tone etc 3 Access is denied to an extension that has a camp on set to it or has been overridden via Executive Override or Attendant Override NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 249 PRIVACY Manual Privacy Release The ability to access a busy extension that is making an outside trunk call prior to being answered is de pendent on proper setting of the maximum digit dialed assignment Command 85 This feature is denied on an extension that has been placed on Call Hold by another extension or has placed another party on Call Hold Manual Privacy Release General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to enter a conversation on a busy line button if the Multiline Ter minal user already in the conversation allows them by releasing Privacy Station Application
327. nected to a Multiline Terminal providing a maximum of up to 41 line trunk keys 16 line trunk keys on D Series IMI Series E and 25 line trunk keys on Add On Module A Multiline Terminal and an associated Add On Module unit must be contained in the same PIM The total of Multiline Terminals and Add On Module units used as Add On Modules e MP without expansion memory standard 256 per system MP with expansion memory optional 512 per system Trunks and lines Prime Lines of other Multiline Terminals virtual lines and single lines can be assigned to the Add On Module unit lines and keys The following can also be set for line trunk keys other than those mentioned in 5 above house phones Hot lines Manual Intercoms Automatic Intercoms and Dial Intercoms Lamp indication on the Add On Module unit is the same as that of Multiline Terminals Boss Secretary Transfer and override functions are available for line keys on the Add On Module If a line trunk on the Add On Module unit is called the ringer of the connected Multiline Terminal rings The Multiline Terminal volume is used to control the ringer volume Data lines cannot be set to any line trunk keys on the Add On Module If the resident system program is used to set system data the Add On Module unit will be assigned as 16 lines on the Multiline Terminal For details on any keys usable for the station speed dialing function refer to the Station Speed Dialing fea ture
328. nformation of the incoming held call for six seconds Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 8 Multiline Terminals can come into CID mode simultaneously per system including the terminal which is on Call Redirect operation 2 CID mode is continued for 6 seconds after the CID key is pressed After 6 seconds the CID key lamp goes out automatically and CID mode is cancelled NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 106 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALLER ID DISPLAY 3 If there is no incoming held call on the line key and there is no Camp On call the Multiline Terminal does not come into CID mode even if the CID key is pressed 4 If there are plural incoming held calls Camp On calls the following priority for displaying is applied a Camp On call information set to the call in progress on the Multiline Terminal b Incoming held call information in order of the line key number lowest to highest number 5 When a call is transferred by Consultation Hold the display shows the following information Before the transfer operation finishes the LCD displays the information of the station which holds the call After the transfer operation finishes the LCD displays the information of the held station trunk 6 When a call is set Executive Hold the call information cannot be displayed on the other Multiline Terminal The information of voice call cannot be displayed 8 When the following terminating system is assigned to
329. ng Indication Station Application Multiline Terminals assigned with a Call Waiting CW Lamp Operating Procedure No operating procedure is necessary Indication is automatic once it is assigned Service Conditions 1 A PN DKOO or built in DKOO in MP is required to provide the external relay control when an external indicator is used 2 There is no limit to the number of appearances of a CW lamp assigned to Multiline Terminals One CW lamp per group is available 3 Onaper system basis the option is available to select how many calls in queue causes the CW lamp to flash Default setting is one The LED lights steady until the set threshold count is reached at which time it begins to flash 4 Provision of ringing on a CW key is controlled on a per station basis 5 The interruption rate of the external relay control is programmable on a per system basis as follows e 30IPM e 60IPM e 120 IPM e Steady This interruption rate is the same as the rate used for Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Delay Announcement ACD General Description This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller placed in queue to an ACD group A single announcement or two separate announcements can be provided Station Application None Operating Procedure Operation is automatic once system programming is assigned NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 I
330. ng direct trunk appearance Multiline terminals only NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 112 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CHECK IN CHECK OUT CHECK IN CHECK OUT General Description When this feature is activated the following operations occur Check In Room Cutoff is cleared Check Out Room Status printout is supplied Do Not Disturb is reset Room Cutoff is set Message Waiting is reset Automatic Wake Up is cleared Station Application Multiline Terminals with LCD assigned as Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments Operating Procedure To activate Check In Check Out for an individual guest room 1 9 3 4 Press the Check In Check Out feature key Dial the desired station number Press the SET key to set Check In Press the RESET key to set Check Out Service Conditions 1 This feature can only be activated from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument or the PMS Property Man agement System A line key on the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument must be assigned as a Check In Check Out function button This feature only applies to guest room stations Refer to the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument and Property Management System Features and Specifica tions for more information on Check In Check Out NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 113 CLASS OF SERVICE CLASS OF SERVICE General Description This feature
331. ng features to the PMS upon request from the PMS e Do Not Disturb e Room Cut off 3 An Application Processor card APOO is required for this feature NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 253 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Automatic Idle Return PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL General Description There are four Multiline Terminals available which can be used with the system Series E Series III e Electra Professional The following features apply to these Multiline Terminals Automatic Idle Return General Description This feature returns a station to the idle state after 3 seconds of reorder tone is received due to the distant end disconnecting Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Automatic Idle Return only applies when the call was made using the Speaker key 2 The call can be either an internal or external call If it is an external call a remote disconnect signal from the C O must be supplied 3 Automatic Idle Return can be allowed or denied on a system basis NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 254 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Called Station Status Display Called Station Status Display General Description This feature provides a display on the status of a called station on the LCD of the calling Mul
332. ng services can be provided in conjunction with this feature 1 Common station voice service e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line e Call Forwarding No Answer e Call Transfer All Calls e Hot Line e Calling Number Display 2 Network features e Trunk to Trunk Connection e Tie Lines NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 267 REMOTE HOLD REMOTE HOLD General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to hold it on the line button of transferred terminal by pressing the Hold key Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure Multiline Terminal A is talking with station trunk party 2 Press the Transfer key and dial the station number of Multiline Terminal B a Station trunk party hears music on hold b Multiline Terminal B is rung or notified call transfer by Voice Call c The line button of Multiline Terminal B is flashing to indicate incoming transferred call 3 Multiline Terminal A presses the Hold key a The ringing of Multiline Terminal B is stopped b The line button of Multiline Terminal B is flashing to indicate call in hold To answer Press the line button on Multiline Terminal B or other terminals that have line button of Multiline Terminal B OR From other stations dial access code for Direct Call Pick up and the station number of Multiline Terminal B Service Conditions This feat
333. nitor a call 1 Talk with a station trunk by handset 2 Press the Speaker key and the associated LED lights 3 Continue the conversation on the handset 4 To return to private conversation press the Speaker key again Service Conditions 1 This feature applies to both internal and external calls 2 Volume may be adjusted using the Multiline Terminal s volume control 3 Group Listening is assigned in Class of Service on a per station basis NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 177 HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK General Description This feature allows the station user to answer a voice call without lifting the handset Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To answer a voice call 1 Make sure the MIC Microphone is active and the associated LED is lit 2 Respond to call handsfree Service Conditions 1 Handsfree Answerback may only be used when responding to calls on the primary extension 2 The MIC LED on the Multiline Terminal must be lit before Handsfree Answerback can begin 3 The MIC is turned on and off by pressing the Feature key followed by the digit 1 one NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 178 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING General Description This feature allows the station user to dial or monitor a call
334. nk access code This can be set on a system wide basis In the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record the station that set Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside will appear as the originator of the call SMDR only records if the Tandem Connection receives answer supervision Page 78 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding No Answer 14 The setting station s trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For warding Busy Line Outside 15 Checking of the setting station s trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system wide basis 16 A Direct Inward System Access DISA call to a station set for Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside will be allowed or denied based on the forwarded station s trunk restriction class 17 An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside will follow the restriction class of the station set Call Forwarding When Call Forwarding to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station Set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Station set Call Forwarding Multiline Terminal Virtual station Originating station trunk 18 A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system including Call For warding All Calls Busy Line No Answer MP without
335. nnot be connected to the beginning of the message NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 308 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TIMED REMINDER 8 The number of Timed Reminder attempts is programmable in system data from 1 to 5 times when the called station does not answer 9 Ifthe station does not answer is busy in Line Lockout or ringing recalling is initiated 1 minute later When each call results in failure it is printed out at the printer Additionally when the final attempt results in fail ure a buzzer is sounded at the printer 10 An APOO card is required for connection to a printer 11 After a Timed Reminder is set the setting cannot be verified A simple procedure is to reset the Timed Re minder Only one Timed Reminder is available per station 12 Timed Reminder calls will not be rerouted by Call Forwarding or other features NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 309 TRUNK DIRECT APPEARANCES TRUNK DIRECT APPEARANCES General Description This feature allows Multiline Terminal users the ability to access a C O line or E amp M Tie Line without dialing an access code For this feature trunks must be assigned to the line keys on the Multiline Terminal Incoming calls on C O lines can be answered on the appropriate trunk line appearance Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To make an outgoing call
336. ns Page 56 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM General Description The Automatic Call Distribution ACD with Management Information System MIS feature provides a man agement information system to be used in conjunction with the built in ACD features of the system The MIS incorporates a supervisor s terminal for real time monitoring of agent activity amber and red alarms and hard copy summary reports Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure Refer to the CallCenterWorX System Manual Service Conditions 1 ACD MIS requires the ACD MIS software application processor personal computer and a parallel printer The personal computer and parallel printer are user provided 2 Only one supervisor terminal is normally allowed per ACD system The use of an external 1 to 8 RS 232 Expansion unit can allow up to 8 supervisor terminals Refer to the CallCenterWorX System Manual for details on the external expansion unit 3 The tenant number for the ACD MIS pilot and agent stations must always be 0 in both the ACD Group set in the system and the PC MIS Agent assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 57 AUTOMATIC CAMP ON AUTOMATIC CAMP ON General Description An incoming Direct Inward Termination DIT call which has been terminated to a busy
337. ns are given to all members of the Manual Intercom group except the originator of the call 5 Each Manual Intercom from 2 to 6 appearances uses a single extension which can be a software extension no supporting hardware is required 6 Transfer Call Park and other extension line features are not available on Manual Intercom Dual Hold and Hold Recall are available on Manual Intercom 7 More than one Manual Intercom can appear on a Multiline Terminal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 194 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 INTERCOM Automatic Intercom Automatic Intercom General Description Automatic Intercom provides a path for Voice Announcement Calls with Handsfree Answerback between two Multiline Terminals using a line key Private conversations can be held by using the Multiline Terminal hand sets The Busy Idle status of the associated Multiline Terminal is displayed on the Automatic Intercom line key LED Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 2 The caller lifts the handset and presses the Automatic Intercom key The called terminal receives a tone burst followed by Voice Announcement and can answer using Handsfree Answerback OR The caller can change the call to a ringing call by dialing 1 The called terminal must press Automatic Intercom key and lift the handset to answer ringing call Service Conditions Gin AO Only two Multiline Terminals c
338. ns can set a Return Schedule however only Multiline Terminals with an LCD can display the sched ule Operating Procedure To set Return Schedule from any station 1 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Return Schedule feature access code 3 Dial the number corresponding to the desired message IN BACK HH MM OUT BACK HH MM AWAY BACK MM DD If 0 or 1 is selected dial the desired time 5 If 2 or3 is selected dial the month and date example for June 8 enter 0608 6 Restore the handset and the Return Schedule is registered To cancel Return Schedule from the station that set Return Schedule 1 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Return Schedule cancel code 3 Restore the handset and the Return Schedule is cancelled Service Conditions 1 Registration of a Return Schedule is possible from any type of station either Single Line Telephone or Mul tiline Terminal 2 A Multiline Terminal user can register Return Schedule not only on its primary extension but also on sec ondary extension appearances for the associated extension user Calls to the primary extension will result in receipt of the Return Schedule message 3 The Call Forwarding All Calls feature has priority over the Return Schedule feature When a call is rerouted to another station by Call Forwarding All Calls and if that station has registered a Return Schedule that Return Schedule is displayed to th
339. nswer Meet Me from a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the Meet Me Answer feature access code 3 Converse Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of internal paging zones is 8 zone O through zone 7 Up to 8 Internal zones can be accessed simultaneously by different stations 2 The paging station can only page to one zone at a time For all zone paging the paging station can page Zone O through Zone 5 simultaneously The maximum number of Multiline Terminals within one zone is 16 A busy Multiline Terminal will not be paged during an Internal Zone Page Multiline Terminals can be assigned to more than one zone Meet Me Answer cannot be done after performing a consultation hold Any station can page any zone The paging station will not receive busy tone when all stations in the paged zone are busy SO OOS ON IU eS 8 For the following paging a paged station must dial paging station number or attendant access code to an swer without Meet Me Answer e Zone Paging by Attendant Console e All Zone Paging by any station or attendant NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 199 LAST NUMBER REDIAL LAST NUMBER REDIAL General Description This feature allows users to redial the last station to station or outside number they dialed using a feature access key or a feature access code This is useful when
340. nts on Multiline Terminals with Pooled Lines to prevent inadvertent or undesired selection of someone else s extension s NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 246 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER POWER FAILURE TRANSFER General Description This feature provides for specified trunks to be automatically connected to designated Single Line Telephones in the event of AC power loss It is normally utilized when the system is not equipped with reserve power Station Application Single Line Telephones Operating Procedure Operation is automatic upon loss of input power to the system Service Conditions L 10 11 If the Central Office provides ground start trunks Single Line Telephones must be equipped with ground buttons to complete calls over the exchange network Power Failure Transfer PFT lines should not be wired to common bells since these require outside power sources and therefore will not operate Both the PN AUC card and the PZ 8PFT card can be used as the Power Failure Transfer PFT circuit When using the PN AUC card the Power Failure Single Line Telephones must be interfaced with a PN AUC card This card provides 2 Power Failure Transfer circuits when the AUC card is used in the Long Line Circuit LLC Mode The connection between the AUC card and the 4COT 8COT card is made via a flat cable No 0 and No 1 circuit of the 4COT SCOT can be used for the Power Fa
341. ny other station in the system by dialing a specific Call Pickup feature access code and the number of the called extension Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Single Line Telephone 1 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Call Pickup Direct feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the extension number of ringing station 4 Converse From a Multiline Terminal 1 Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Call Pickup Direct feature access code or press Call Pickup Direct function key and receive fea ture dial tone 3 Dial the extension number of the ringing station 4 Converse From an Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key Dial the Call Pickup Direct feature access code Dial the extension number of the ringing station A oes Converse NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 97 CALL PICKUP Call Pickup Group Service Conditions 1 All ringing calls directed to an extension including voice calls can be picked up by this feature except for Trunk Queuing Outgoing and Call Back This feature can be activated from feature dial tone This feature may be allowed or denied based on station Class of Service A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C O call A eae be An Attendant console can only use Call Pickup Direct for call
342. o off hook and dial the Station Speed Dialing programming code Dial the abbreviated code to be assigned Dial the trunk access code and the desired telephone number Restore the handset Service Conditions 1 10 11 Each Station Speed Dialing buffer can store a maximum of 26 digits including pauses The trunk access code maximum 4 digits must be dialed to be stored however the trunk access code is not counted in the 26 digits There are 1000 Speed Dialing buffers in a memory block and there are 10 memory blocks for a total of 10 000 Speed Dialing buffers per system MP without expansion memory standard up to 4 000 buffers MP with expansion memory optional up to 10 000 buffers Single Line Telephones and the Multiline Terminals can be assigned up to 10 memory blocks 10000 buffers each When Station Speed Dialing is assigned the minimum assignment is one memory block 10 buffers The same memory blocks can be shared by multiple stations When the same memory blocks are shared there is an assignment that allows selected stations to be able to reprogram the buffer on a per station basis Only the feature keys on Multiline Terminals can be programmed for internal or external calls All other Speed Dialing buffers are for trunk calls only Code Restriction can be allowed or denied with Station Speed Dialing on a system basis The numbers stored in each Speed Dialing buffer will be retained in the event of system
343. o the last number dialed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 289 STACK DIAL 5 When the lower line of the LCD is being used by Data Communication OAI Stack Dial is not available 6 The maximum number of digits that can be memorized by Stack Dial is 32 The number of digits to be dis played on the LCD ranges from 1 to 16 7 When only one number is registered by Stack Dial blank is displayed on the lower line of the LCD when the Redial key is pressed If redial is attempted by pressing the key while blank is being displayed the station user hears reorder tone 8 While a number is being displayed by Stack Dial it cannot be saved for Save and Repeat After the call has been redialed by Stack Dial the number can be saved 9 The Stack Dial feature access key Redial can be used for both Last Number Redial and Station Speed Di aling 10 When a digit key is pressed instead of the key while Stack Dial is being displayed a station speed dial call is originated In this case current clock is displayed in the lower line of the LCD 11 The Stack Dial stored numbers will not be saved in the event of a system reset 12 The following is displayed on the Attendant Console RDL 1 10 23 AM 00238241554 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 290 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STATION HUNTING Station Hunting Circular STATION
344. ode Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer ey ante Press the Conf key A Conference is now in progress OR Restore the handset The original caller and second party are now connected To establish a Trunk to Trunk Connection from an Attendant Console 1 Attendant answers an incoming call 2 Dial the applicable trunk access code The original party is placed on Consultation Hold 3 Dial the desired number 4 Press the RLS key The original caller and second party are now connected Service Conditions The initiating station may hang up at any time The additional two parties will not be disconnected 2 Atleast one of the two trunks must provide a release signal some loop start trunks do not provide any signal after the distant party abandons the call 3 This feature may be restricted to individual stations in system data programming If an originating Single Line Telephone encounters a busy or no answer condition after dialing out to Con ference a third party the originating party can be reconnected to held caller by providing a hookflash or by pressing the FLASH key to establish a Conference and a second hookflash to release the last party called NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 314 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION If an originating Single Line Telephone encounters a busy condition because all trunks are busy
345. odular plug while pressing 0 on the dial of the Attendant Console 4 The following message is displayed on the LCD of the Attendant Console and the console is placed into the Lamp Check Mode DIAL 0 ATT SELF TEST MODE To check the status of all the keys the buzzer sound and the LEDs press each key in turn to check the key itself as well as to check the corresponding LED buzzer sound and LCD on the console For details on the procedures refer to the Maintenance Manual To return the SN610 ATTCON to the normal state 1 Press both the and keys together 2 The Check Mode displayed on the LCD will be changed to the Menu Screen 3 Press the NIGHT key to release the Night Mode of the console and return to the Day Mode To set the SN716 DESKCON into Lamp Check Mode 1 Press L5 L6 and SRC key together all red lamps will be lit Press key the red lamps will go off and all green lamps will be lit Press key the green lamps will go off and LCD display will become all black Press key the LCD display will be cleared and Tone Ringer will ring A 3 tS Press key Tone Ringer will stop When a button is pressed in this state the associated lamp will be lit and the name of the button will be displayed on the LCD To return the SN716 DESKCON to normal state 1 Press key Service Conditions If the Attendant Console is placed into Lamp Check Mode without entering the Night Mode all received calls will ha
346. oes not belong to the group 6 A Single Line Telephone Multiline Terminal which does not belong to the group can be a participant of a conference by dialing the re participation access code or by pressing the feature access key Multiline Ter minal only when the CFT trunk has an idle circuit 7 An originator cannot page two or more groups simultaneously A group cannot be paged simultaneously by the multiple originators A group cannot be paged while a conference of the group is in progress 8 If all stations within the paged group are busy the originator hears the reorder tone If a station does not answer the paging by certain time whichi is determined by the system data the orig inator leader hears the busy tone 9 When a station cannot answer the paging by paging time out or busy state the station can participate the conference by dialing the re participation access code or by pressing the feature access key while the con ference is in progress 10 If the originator leaves the conference the originator can re participate by dialing the re participation access code or by pressing the feature access key while the conference is in progress 11 A station can be paged in the idle state When the station is busy at the time of paging the station cannot be paged even if the station returns to idle afterward 12 Even if a station sets Call Forwarding the originator can page the station 2 Way Calling General Description
347. of the station that set the feature will be recalled If Trunk Queuing Outgoing is already set on the primary extension it cannot be set on the secondary extension 3 When an incoming call rings on the Call Pickup Group to which the secondary extension belongs the in coming call can be picked up NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 169 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT General Description Multiline Terminals can have any desired line key assignment This feature permits assignments to be tailored to each individual s needs The terminal s primary extension line appearance is the only line key which cannot be reassigned Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Each line key can be assigned as one of the following e Trunk Access e Extension e Save and Repeat e Do Not Disturb e Data e Intercom e Hotline e Feature Access Refer to the applicable Features and Specifications for more information on that feature Line key assignment is made in system programming using the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Administration Terminal CAT The Multiline Terminal with 16 buttons has 15 programmable line keys One line key is reserved for that station s primary extension The Multiline Terminal with 8 buttons has 7 programmable line
348. om the Conference 2 Receive internal dial tone Service Conditions 1 The default duration of the timed disconnect signal or hookflash signal is 600 msec and is programmable on a per system basis 2 The Recall key functions differently depending on the type of line key appearance and type of outgoing trunk NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 261 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Relay Control Function Key 3 On trunk routes programmed as CENTREX regardless of whether they are accessed using an extension or Trunk Direct Appearance a timed disconnect corresponding to a hookflash is sent to the distant exchange The duration of the hookflash is programmable on a system basis 4 On Trunk Direct Appearances a timed disconnect of the same duration as that for CENTREX is sent to the C O The same trunk is reserved and new C O dial tone is received 5 Ifacall was placed through Least Cost Routing the Recall key releases the C O call and new extension dial tone is received 6 The Recall key does not function on Intercom calls Relay Control Function Key General Description This feature provides a Multiline Terminal with the ability to activate deactivate relays on a PN DKO00 or built in DKOO in MP to control external devices Operating Procedure To turn the relay on e Press the line key programmed to perform the relay function The associated line key LED l
349. on The password can not be CCCCCCCC or FFFFFFFF Caution should be exercised when assigning Passwords to command authorization levels If a password is forgotten access to system programming will be limited and a system initialization with subsequent pro gramming may be required Refer also to the MAT feature for information on Peg Count Remove and Restore Service and Fault Mes sage 10 When the CAT is off line for programming it cannot access normal terminal functions NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 126 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DATA LINE SECURITY DATA LINE SECURITY General Description This feature allows line circuits which are used for data transmission to be protected from interruptions such as Attendant Camp On Executive Override and Attendant Override Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions This feature is assigned in system programming on a per station basis Data Line Security functions on all calls 3 Data Line Security cannot prevent disruptions from interfering with data transmission when the disruption occurs outside the system 4 The following connections are restricted when Data Line Security is allowed since transmitted tones are in volved in their operation All interrupt attempts directed towards stations with a Data Line Security call in progress result in reorder tone Attendan
350. on data to the MCI 3 The system upon receiving this control data from the MCI illuminates the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station 4 The VMS upon receiving retrieved message information will send the Message Waiting lamp control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the corresponding station Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To originate a voice mail message 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the voice mail pilot number and receive ringback tone 3 Follow the instructions given by the VMS To set call forwarding to a VMS e Call Forwarding All Calls e Split Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy Line e Split Call Forwarding Busy Line e Call Forwarding No Answer e Split Call Forwarding No Answer Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the voice mail extension number and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET xxxx VMS Voice mail extension number Connection when an extension line number whose call forwarding is set to a VMS is called from another station 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired station number and receive ringback tone The LCD displays CF ALL xxxx VMS Voice mail extension number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 P
351. one The LCD displays SET LKOUT The mode of the console is changed from the normal to the lockout condition Press the RELEASE key To cancel Attendant Console Lockout Press the MODE key The associated red LED lights Dial a predetermined password number Press the ACTIVE key The associated green LED lights The LCD display changes from LKOUT to ACTIVE Press the Answer key and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET ACTIVE The mode of the con sole is now changed from the lockout to the normal condition Press the RELEASE key Service Conditions 1 The length of the password can be up to 8 digits The password is assigned by the MAT or CAT When the console is set to the lockout condition one of the following two types of indications can be se lected on a system basis by system data a Audible ringing applied at any time b No audible indications except recall are produced When the console is set to lockout condition only the following operation can be executed a Cancellation of lockout condition b These types of remaining calls on the loop keys can be handled e Unanswered calls e Camped on calls e Automatic Recalls e Held Call on LOOP key If there is a call park which has been set by the attendant the console cannot be set to lockout condition In this case the operator hears ROT and the LCD shows CALL PARK When the console is put into the lockout condition if there are any uncompleted calls in lo
352. one groups are available Each house phone group can be assigned to automatically call the Attendant Console or a predesignated sta tion NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 191 INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS General Description This feature permits a user to call a specific Attendant by dialing an Attendant call code Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To originate a call to the Attendant 1 Go off hook and dial the Individual Attendant Access code 2 Dial the individual Attendant number 0 7 3 The desired Attendant receives Incoming Call Identification and answers using normal call handling proce dures Service Conditions All stations including fully restricted stations can call an Attendant 2 If Tenant Service is provided each tenant can call his own Attendant via the same code When this feature is assigned Attendant Night Transfers will not function for these calls 3 Interposition Transfer uses the same Attendant call codes as Individual Attendant Access NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 192 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT General Description This feature provides the automatic interception of Direct Inward Dialing DID and Tie Line calls which cannot be completed due to unassigned station or level The caller hears a
353. ont Desk Instrument To set Do Not Disturb ts Rs ES Press the DD key Dial the desired station number Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations Press the RLS key To cancel Do Not Disturb 1 2 Press the DD key Dial the desired station number NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 157 DO NOT DISTURB Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel 3 Press the RESET key 4 The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations 5 Press the RLS key To set Do Not Disturb to the station currently connected 1 Press the DD key 2 Press the SET key 3 Press the RLS key To cancel Do Not Disturb to the station currently connected 1 Press the DD key 2 Press the RESET key 3 Press the RLS key From a guest station or administrative station To set Do Not Disturb 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Do Not Disturb setting code 3 Receive service set tone and restore the handset To cancel Do Not Disturb 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Do Not Disturb cancellation code 3 Receive service set tone and restore the handset Service Conditions Automatic Wake Up and Timed Reminder will override Do Not Disturb A station in Do Not Disturb can be called from the Attendant Console or the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instru ment using the DNDOVR ke
354. ops with the At tendant Loop Release feature those uncompleted calls can appear on loops as automatic recalls Page 24 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel General Description The Attendant has the ability to enter and remove individual stations from Do Not Disturb DND Additionally the Attendant can set one preassigned group of stations into or out of Do Not Disturb Operating Procedure To set an individual station in DND 1 Dial the station number without pressing the LOOP key 2 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes 3 Press the Answer key or START key The DD LED lights steady and service set tone is received 4 Press the RELEASE key To cancel an individual station in DND 1 Dial the station number without pressing the LOOP key 2 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes 3 Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out To set the group of stations in DND 1 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes 2 Press the Answer key or START key and the DD LED lights steady 3 The designated group is now in DND To cancel DND set to the group of stations 1 Press the DD key and the associated LED flashes 2 Press the RESET key and the DD LED goes out 3 The designated group is no longer in DND To call a station that set DND 1
355. or combined LCR toll restriction capability Refer to the Code Restriction Features and Specifications Tenant Pattern Table Up to 16 tables are used to select a route pattern table The programmer can make the system select a route pattern table based on which tenant the caller is associated This allows sharing of LCR and toll restriction capability among multiple tenants while providing for the individual needs of each tenant Each of the 64 tables can be assigned a route pattern table for each of the 64 tenants In addition the special Digit Code Table is used for assigning the same digits as leading one two or three digits of area code assigned to the Digit Code Tables above e g OOXX X International Call 0 Operator Call OXXX Toll Operator Call use the special Digit Code Table The system examines the special Digit Code Table when an ORT timeout has occurred after dialing leading digits Date Pattern Table Up to 4 day of week tables determine whether a route pattern table tenant pattern table or a time pattern table is used next in the routing procedure Time Pattern Table Up to 8 time of day tables determine whether a route pattern or tenant pattern table is used next in the routing procedure The time is military time and can be input in half hour increments 00 00 23 30 Office Code Pattern Tables Up to 50 tables contain office codes to be checked to see if a prefix digit 1 must be added and to see if the office code
356. ormally irre spective of this feature An Account Code may be entered using a function key programmed for Account Code entry or Account Code can be dialed on second dial tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 252 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE General Description The NEAX2000 IVS provides a data interface to a locally provided Property Management System PMS This enables communication between the NEAX2000 IVS and the PMS in order to provide computer control of Ho tel Motel features Major functions and their interactions are indicated below Automatic Wake up NEAX2000 IVS Message Waiting NEAX2000 IVS Automatic MW Lamp off NEAX2000 IVS Check In Check Out NEAX2000 IVS Direct Data Entry NEAX2000 IVS Maid Status NEAX2000 IVS Do Not Disturb NEAX2000 IVS Room Cut off NEAX2000 IVS Room Status NEAX2000 IVS Room Change Room Swap NEAX2000 IVS SMDR NEAX2000 IVS Guest Name Display NEAX2000 IVS lt n z n z n lt n Z n z n Z n z n Z n lt n z n Ul UO UU Ul UM Ul Uy ey U U z n Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure Operating procedures will vary with the locally provided PMS Service Conditions One Interface Port is provided for PMS 2 The NEAX2000 IVS sends information relating to the followi
357. pecific features Each service feature class can be assigned to allow or deny each feature shown below e Service Class A Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Destination Call Hold Trunk Queuing Outgoing Call Back Executive Override Originate Executive Override Receive Speed Calling System NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 114 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CLASS OF SERVICE Speed Calling Station External Paging Automatic Wake up Timed Reminder self Automatic Wake up Timed Reminder for others Call Pickup Direct Camp On Transfer Camp On Call Waiting Originate Receive Do Not Disturb from Station Return Schedule Message Display Priority Call Trunk to Trunk Transfer Message Wait Set Reset Timed Queue Account Code Entry Authorization Code Forced Account Code Background Music on Multiline Terminals Voice Recording Card Access Record Reply Delete Announcement Service Replay By Group Number Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Back Multiple Assignment Message Reminder Originate Message Reminder Receive Internal Zone Paging Access e Service Class B Trunk Answer Any Station TAS Service Individual Trunk Access from Station Customer Administration Terminal CAT Access Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing Periodic Time Indication Tone Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Multiline Termi
358. peed Dialing cannot be used on Trunk Direct Appearances NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 302 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 SYSTEM TRAFFIC SYSTEM TRAFFIC General Description The NEAX2000 IVS is the stored program controlled digital electronic PABX employing PCM time division switching technique Single stage time division switching is employed for all configurations of NEAX2000 IVs up to its maximum line and trunk configuration Traffic capacity is expressed in Busy Hour Call Attempts BHCA This value is the number of call attempts that can be generated in the busiest hour of the day Service Conditions Maximum BHCA s per system Number of Firmware Processors FP s No FP 2 FP s 3 FP s 4 FP s Business with OAI ACD Business NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 303 TENANT SERVICE TENANT SERVICE General Description This feature provides for more than one organization tenant to share the same system Through system pro gramming each organization may be restricted to its own C O trunks Attendant Consoles and extension group In addition incoming calls are directed to the specific tenant Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 ES a SE 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 An Attendant Console can be provided for ea
359. permits all stations to be assigned a Class of Service in accordance with the degree of system use desired The Class of Service is used to assign restrictions for trunk access and feature access Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Normal operating procedures apply Restrictions are automatically applied by the system based on the Class of Service assignments in system data for each station Service Conditions 1 Every extension is assigned as one of the following by Class of Service e House phone e Hotline e Automatic Intercom e Dial Intercom e Manual Intercom e Multiline Terminal e Single Line Telephone 2 A trunk route restriction class from 1 to 8 is assigned for each station This assignment is used to determine whether a station is allowed or denied outgoing or incoming access to trunk routes All eight route restriction classes are assigned to allow or deny each trunk route This allows the system to compare the station assign ment with the trunk route assignment and determine whether access is denied or allowed The default setting allows all stations access to all trunk routes 3 The trunk restriction class is also used to provide flexibility in Code Restriction Refer to the Code Restric tion feature for details 4 Sixteen combinations for each of three service classes A B C are available for assignment to stations Based on the service feature class the station is allowed or denied access to s
360. pervision 12 The setting station s trunk restriction class is used to allow or deny the tandem connection on a Call For warding No Answer Outside 13 Checking of the setting station s trunk restriction class can be allowed or denied on a system wide basis 14 A Direct Inward System Access DISA call to a station set for Call Forwarding No Answer Outside will be allowed or denied based on the forwarded station s trunk restriction class 15 An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding No Answer Outside will follow the restriction class of the station set Call Forwarding When Call Forwarding to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station Set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Station set Call Forwarding Multiline Terminal Virtual station Originating station trunk 16 A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system including Call For warding All Calls Busy Line No Answer MP without expansion memory standard up to 240 setting e MP with expansion memory optional up to 496 setting Call Forwarding Destination General Description This feature allows a station A user to set Call Forwarding All Calls from another station B within the sys tem to the user s station A Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal with LCD To set Call Forwa
361. play instead If Attendant Console presses RLS key the call from Station A or outside party is transferred to Station C and continues to ring at Station C until Attendant Transfer Recall occurs The call will return to Attendant Console 3 Transferring Camp on calls to VMS is available only from Attendant Consoles NEAX2000 IVS2 Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 337 WHISPER PAGE WHISPER PAGE General Description This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the boss in a private way By pressing a feature key or dialing an Access Code the secretary station can voice override the conversation between the boss and another party sta tion or trunk When the conversation is interrupted the boss can hear the secretary but the other party is un aware of the Voice Override Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To activate the Whisper Page 1 2 3 Lift the handset and receive a dial tone Press the Whisper Page feature access key or dial the access code for the Whisper Page Dial the desired station number A service set tone is transmitted and three party Conference is established You can hear the conversation and speak to the station that you called To answer the Whisper Page 1 The called party the boss presses the Answer key or presses the hook switch while the whisper page is in progress the original call is put on hold A holding tone is
362. ps can be repeated for other stations Press the RLS key To set Maid Status from a guest room station by maid or repair person 1 2 3 4 5 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Maid Status feature access code and receive special dial tone Dial the Maid ID code Dial the desired function status number code Receive service set tone then restore the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 208 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MAID STATUS Service Conditions 1 There are a maximum of 8 types of room conditions as follows Status Number Room Condition Check In Check Out Under Cleaning Cleaning Finished Check Finished Out of Service Needs Maintenance Maintenance Complete 2 Although the system provides for a maximum of 8 types of room conditions the 8 codes 1 8 provided are not fixed for a given condition This provides the end user with the flexibility to select any code 1 8 to serve as the Maid Status code for any condition When Maid Status is displayed or printed out the digit s dialed as the code when the Maid Status was last changed are displayed or printed 3 When dialing from a guest station a Maid Identification code Maid ID code can be provided up to 2 dig its This is allowed or denied in system programming NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 209 MAINTENANCE
363. r START key The Attendant dials the station user s number The station user answers the call The Attendant presses the RELEASE key 13 The parties are connected Passing dial tone RA The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key The caller provides a call request The Attendant dials the trunk access code The Attendant presses the RELEASE key Dial tone is supplied to the caller Page 16 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING Service Conditions 1 During delay operation the Attendant may release the connection either before or after the called station answers If the call was processed using non delay or passing dial tone operation there will not be an Automatic Re call for Station to Trunk calls when the called party does not answer If the call was processed using non delay or passing dial tone operation an Automatic Recall will be initi ated for Station to Tie line and Trunk to Tie line calls when answer supervision is provided on the tie line and the called party does not answer Fully restricted station users cannot be connected by the Attendant to an outside line using this feature At tempts are routed to reorder tone Non delay operation allows the Attendant to place an outgoing call for a station user who reached the At tendant by dialing 0 without requiring the station user to hang up
364. r can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination DIT or as a designated Night Service station An ACD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off Hook Alarms Priority Calls and Attendant Night Transfer ACD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups The Station Hunting feature would take priority over the ACD function 10 Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for ACD a ACD group Peg Count e Count of incoming calls Count of answered calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 49 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Busy In Busy Out ACD e Count of abandoned calls e Count of waiting calls e Count of all busy calls b ACD station Peg count e Count of answered calls 11 Upon initial installation or after a system initialization reset each agent must lift and restore handset of their station to begin receiving calls for the ACD group Busy In Busy Out ACD General Description This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station onto or off of the group This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD group goes to that station or not This prevents incoming calls from being directed to stations at which no agent is available Station Application Multiline Terminals and Single Line Stations Operating Procedure To log o
365. r join the conversation OR Press the RELEASE key to disengage Service Conditions This feature may be used to enter trunk to trunk station to station or station to trunk connections Each tone burst is 0 08 seconds in duration and is provided to both parties connected 3 Attendant Override of a busy station is denied if the busy station is dialing talking to another Attendant receiving a system generated tone protected against any override by DND key or if any of the following features are in progress e Attendant Camp On e Call Forwarding e Call Transfer e Conference e Data Communications e Data Line Security e Executive Override e Hold e Paging e Privacy e Station Hunting e Voice Call 4 The Attendant can override a station that is part of an Automatic Uniform Call Distribution group NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 45 AUTHORIZATION CODE AUTHORIZATION CODE General Description An Authorization Code is a numerical code which will temporarily change a stations Class of Service to a Class of Service assigned to that Authorization Code This new Class of Service allows access to trunks dialing pat terns and or features which would otherwise be restricted Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Lift handset and receive dial tone Enter the feature access code for Authorization Code Enter the Authoriz
366. ration 60 seconds Restore handset To replay a message Bo ne ae Go off hook and receive Dial Tone Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk replay access code and Digital Announcement card number Receive a message Restore handset To delete a message a a Go off hook and receive Dial Tone Dial the Digital Announcement Trunk delete access code and Digital Announcement card number Receive Service Set Tone Restore handset Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 5 different access codes can be assigned There is a limit of 10 announcement cards for each of the 5 different access codes When recording an announcement each announcement card must be record ed individually This feature is supported by internal announcement circuits of MP card and an announcement card s PN 2DAT 4DAT installed in the system Either single or multiple connection to each announcement can be made on a system programming basis and in the case of multiple connections the secondary station cannot be connected to the top of the message Tie Lines can access the Announcement Service Each time a station is connected to an announcement card the message will be from 60 to 64 seconds The station will then be disconnected The duration of an announcement is limited to 60 seconds The system can be equipped with up to 128 Digital Announcement Trunk circuits for all announcement fea tures There are 2 circuits on MP Card 2 circuits on
367. ration is required Service Conditions 1 Priority queuing is available on incoming trunk calls Queue priority is determined on a trunk route or for DID Calls on a station number basis 2 Iftwo or more priority type calls occur at the same time the system will place them in queue in a First In First out order Queue Size Control ACD General Description On incoming DID Tie line calls the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the number of calls in queue When the queue size threshold is exceeded incoming callers are connected to busy tone Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation is required NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 54 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Silent Monitor ACD Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of queuing in each ACD group hereinafter called Queue Size can be specified by the system data When the number of queuing calls reaches the preassigned queue size new calls receive Busy Tone Depending on the queue size the Overflowed ACD call indication on a Multiline Terminal or on the external indicator is provided as shown below Queue Size assigned by system data S Number of queuing calls N LAMP INDICATION CONDITIONS Multiline Terminal External Indicator Steady on red Steady on red Flashing red Silent Monitor ACD General Description
368. rd can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when connected to the Voice Mail System Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure Normal password entry to VMS Service Conditions 1 When any connection to Voice Mail VM is established each press of the Dial Key pad will display of the LCD of Multiline Terminal 2 This feature is assigned on a per tenant basis for VMS ports only NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 334 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 VOICE MAIL TRANSFER VOICE MAIL TRANSFER General Description This feature has two functions that provide streamlined transfer access to voice mail 1 One touch access to VMS When an Attendant transfers an external call to a station and if the station is busy or unanswered the Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS by dialing 9 or by pressing a function key provided for this feature 2 Transferring Camp On call to VMS When an Attendant sets Camp On to a busy destination station for an external call and if the destination station does not answer by predetermined time the call can be automatically transferred to a VMS Station Application All stations and Attendant Console Operating Procedure To transfer a call to a VMS with one touch access from a Single Line Telephone 1 While answering an external call press FLASH key or momentarily press the hook switch and receive a feature
369. rding Destination from destination station Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Destination set key or dial the Call Forwarding Destination feature access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the station number to be forwarded and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET XXXX Forwarded Station 4 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 81 CALL FORWARDING Multiple Call Forwarding All Calls To cancel Call Forwarding Destination from destination station Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Call Forwarding Destination Cancel key or dial the Call Forwarding Destination Cancellation code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the user s station number forwarded station and receive set tone Replace the handset or press the Speaker key From a Single Line Telephone To set Call Forwarding Destination from destination station 1 Luft the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the specific Call Forwarding Destination feature access code and receive dial tone 3 Dial the station number to be forwarded and receive service set tone To cancel Call Forwarding Destination from destination station 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Dest
370. re as follows e Set status of Do Not Disturb e Set status of Message Waiting e Set status of Room Cutoff e Automatic Wake Up Time if set e Check In Check Out status e Maid Status 2 The status of the function is indicated by a green LED associated with each function key e Check In Check Out set e Do Not Disturb set e Message Waiting set e Room Cutoff set e Automatic Wake Up set LCD displays time set 3 The Room Status of stations can be printed at the Hotel Motel printer if available by pressing the print PR key on the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument prior to pressing the STS key 4 An Application Processor card APOO is required for printer connection 5 Refer to the Installation Procedure Manual Feature Programming Manual for more information NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 280 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ROUTE ADVANCE ROUTE ADVANCE General Description This feature automatically routes outgoing calls over alternate facilities when the first choice trunk group is busy Users select the first choice route by dialing the corresponding access code and the equipment then ad vances through alternate trunk groups only if the first choice is busy Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 COP ON SN 10 11 12 13 14 There is no indication provided to the station user as to whether the call is
371. rebrrasiee 301 SYSTEM SPEED DIALING couscirerrsar ar CES Ne Re dGte bh abriera 302 SOTEN TRAFFIC aera ee AAA ee ee ee eee err tas 303 TENANT SERVICE perrieri IT r EREEREER ORRIAN RRA REFERRE rS ECIS 304 TELNE eee eee eee psi tatea enee ree eee ee ee Aa ee ee eee 305 TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING cs ca binge be a A buns usenet etese 306 ao a ee ce cat GL A E A ese ler 307 TUG REMINDER ont Gobi circa ee tabs cai rein e a a 308 TRUNK DIRECT APPEARANCES sis 0 0408 s0d089 AAA 310 TRUNK QUEUING OUTGOING dorsal rica AAA AA 312 TRUNKTO TRUNK CONNECTION corirerrrpricrie rin FARINA 314 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD ccosxossroriar rie perra 316 Busy Busy AT LOA ose rbd aid ab be A 317 Gall Waiting ndication cee retest eed A hu venke gop ei 318 Delay Announcement UCD sica dar RAN oor ese RCA 318 Fiat Fast No Answer UCO 33 1 404 394 2008 AAA Odeo AA 319 duo ua UGD AAA A 320 Ponty AUS UCD a rr si is da 321 Queue Size Control UCD cnc cccceceoeges ria AAA AA 321 SIM UCD ses pr bei di eet E 322 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN UNP VOICE AND DATA 0 0000 eee eee ees 323 VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS cssoreireriisiont erer EN ENESA IREE DE REENE ERENER 327 VOCE GULE A aa a Sow ed a e a 329 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page vi NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page VOICE MAIL a ns recibir ERIA E Eh OER EE ARR RE Ra RE ROR EWES 331 VOICE MAIL PRIVATE PASSWORD carece AA PAREREA 334 VOICE MAIL TRANSFER
372. recorded after di aling the station number Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument e To set Message Waiting Press the MW key Dial the desired station number Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations Press the RELEASE RLS key P a a a e To cancel Message Waiting Press the MW key Dial the desired station number Press the RESET key The above two steps can be repeated for additional stations Press the RELEASE key UE ah Es To set Message Waiting while receiving ringback tone or busy tone 1 Press the MW key 2 Press the SET key 3 Press the RELEASE key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 218 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE WAITING To cancel Message Waiting while receiving ringback tone or busy tone 1 2 3 Press the MW key Press the RESET key Press the RELEASE key From the Attendant Console To set Message Waiting 1 2 Sy 4 Dial the desired station number Press the MW key Press the START key Press the RELEASE key To cancel Message Waiting E aS Dial the desired station number Press the MW key Press the RESET key Press the RELEASE key From an administrative station To set Message Waiting 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Message Waiting set access code Dial the desired stat
373. red after a pre deter mined time 6 Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer will not be activated if the calling party encounters a busy station that has activated Call Forwarding Busy Line 7 Ifa station sets Call Forwarding No Answer to another station in a different tenant and that station is set to Call Forwarding No Answer to the Attendant the calling station will be connected to the calling sta tion s Attendant Console 8 For Multiple Call Forwarding No Answer the display of a Multiline Terminal with LCD will show the final forwarded to station number for the calling party If the final forwarded to station is a multiline termi nal with LCD the forwarded from station number and the calling party number station on trunk will be displayed Split Call Forwarding All Calls General Description This feature allows all internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to different destinations in dividually regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To activate Split Call Forwarding both Split Call Forwarding and Call Forwarding settings are required For Call Forwarding settings refer to the description of Call Forwarding All Calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 85 CALL FORWARDING Split Call Forwarding All Calls From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
374. reinitialization or power failure A pause may be programmed by using the or key If is used the pause duration is 1 5 seconds If is used a system programmable pause 1 5 12 seconds default is 3 seconds is provided Refer to the Consecutive Speed Dialing feature for additional information If the system is designated as KF registration this feature will not be available except for the following operation e Press a Trunk TRK key trunk service e Press a One Touch key station speed dialing The following numbers can be stored in a One Touch key of a Multiline Terminal a Access code for Hooking signal to a Centrex maximum 2 digits desired number maximum 26 digits This One Touch key is effective when the station user is connected to a Centrex line The Recall key is used to return to the original line Call information can be recorded in SMDR b Station number DTMF signal after the called station answered maximum 26 digits in total This One Touch key is effective when the station user is in idle or busy or seizing a trunk c Trunk access code maximum 4 digit outside number DTMF signal after the called station answered maximum 26 digits in total except trunk access code Note is programmed as a delimiter between outside number and DTMF signal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 298 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 STATION SPEED DIALING This One Touch ke
375. ress pressing the Answer key splits the Conference and establishes a Broker s Call The Answer key has no effect on a 4 party conference 6 Camped on calls are answered by the Answer key prior to incoming ringing calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 15 ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING General Description This feature allows a station user to ask an Attendant for assistance in originating a call Three methods are available non delay delay and passing dial tone Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Non delay operation 1 DAD a S The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key The caller provides a call request The Attendant dials the trunk access code The Attendant dials the desired telephone number The Attendant presses the RELEASE or START key The parties are connected Delay operation ER OS MN ds 0 PD et na N The Attendant answers an operator call by pressing the Answer or ATND key The caller provides a call request The Attendant presses the RELEASE key The station user receives reorder tone The station user then restores the handset and waits for a recall from the Attendant The Attendant presses the LOOP key The Attendant dials the trunk access code The Attendant dials the desired telephone number The Attendant presses the Answer o
376. ring the Boss Secretary transfer or Boss Secretary Override operation the secretary can press the Transfer key to return to the calling party and the voice call is aban doned During a Boss Secretary transfer operation once the boss has answered and is conversing with the secretary Privacy Release is not available and use of the Hold button will be disregarded at this time Setting or canceling of Message Waiting can be executed by the secretary regardless of the boss extension status busy or idle After the boss and secretary converse during a Boss Secretary transfer or Boss Secretary Override operation using the handsets the secretary can use the Answer key to alternate conversations between the original call ing party and the boss Brokers Call The secretary can also press the Transfer key sending the secretary back to the original calling party and the boss back to the party on Consultation Hold During a Boss Secretary Override operation the boss can use the Answer key to answer the Override Call The boss can then use the Answer key to alternate between the secretary and the party on Consultation Hold During a Boss Secretary Override operation once the boss has answered and the secretary has gone on hook the boss can use the Answer key to alternate between the two parties The boss can also use the Trans fer key to receive Special Dial Tone Page 68 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 242
377. rinted out but is sent out to the PMS In this case the input data including shall be up to 30 digits Example Access code 001 002 12345 3 Reorder tone will be received instead of service set tone if the PMS does not respond within 15 seconds or sends a negative answer to the system NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 136 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT DATA ENTRY 8 There are two types of printout format for the Hotel Motel Printer The printout format can be selected by the system data programming The following figure shows examples of the printout format 1 and 2 Example Input data 001 002 12345 3 is used to separate the input data is not printed out but sent out to the PMS Printout format 1 Printout format 2 1995 04 10 17 20 MON 1995 04 10 17 20 MON NO 220 NO 220 CODE1 001 CODE1 001 CODE2 002 QUANTITY 002 CODE3 12345 CODE2 12345 CODE4 3 QUANTITY 3 TEA l a The maximum number of characters per line is 20 The maximum number of input data per line is 10 When the number of input data is 11 or more the data over 10 characters are printed out on the next lines Example Input data 1 123456789012 12 2 1 Printout format 1 1995 04 10 17 20 MON NO 220 CODE1 1 CODE2 1234567890 12 CODE4 2 CODE4 1 Printout format 2 1995 04 10 17 20 MON E O NO 220 CODE1 1 QUANTITY 1234567890 12 CODE2 2
378. rocedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Addition and deletion of digits can be implemented to coincide with the existing numbering plan 2 When digit conversion of DID incoming LDN has been activated the number received from the C O before conversion is displayed 3 A DID incoming LDN can be converted to a PBX station number by analyzing the upper two four digits of DID incoming LDN A maximum of 10 000 DID incoming LDN can be converted to a maximum of 1 000 PBX station numbers MP without expansion memory standard up to 500 station numbers MP with expansion memory optional up to 1 000 station numbers NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 142 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA General Description This feature allows an outside caller to access the system using an exchange network connection without Atten dant or station assistance The outside user may originate calls over any or all of the system s facilities such as WATS FX Tie Line or CCSA The outside user can also directly call stations and access miscellaneous trunks for such features as dictation access Station Application Not Applicable Operating Procedure 1 2 3 Dial the number to connect to the system After ringback tone service set tone is received Dial the DISA identification code If accepted system dial tone will be
379. routed over the first choice or subsequent choice facilities Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will generate call records in conjunction with this feature Route Advance is trunk route based Careful consideration should be given to the use of FX trunks as an alternate facility since in many instances these lines require outpulsing of digits for long distance which the user may not dial because he will not know he is connected to an FX trunk Use of the Least Cost Routing LCR feature overcomes this diffi culty The maximum number of trunk routes to be included in a single Route Advance group is 7 The total number of routes that can be contained in all Route Advance groups is 64 The same route can be included in two or more different groups Route Advance occurs only when the dialed code accesses the first choice trunk route in the Route Advance table No code conversion capability is provided with Route Advance The digits the user dials after the trunk access code will be sent over the selected trunk regardless of the trunk route used The user will not know which trunk route is selected therefore only those trunk routes that accept the same dialing format may be assigned to a given Route Advance group If digit conversation is needed the LCR feature should be used FX trunk routes to a foreign number plan area FNPA do not require the dialing of that FNPA area code Therefore these FX trunks may not be used in the same Route
380. rriving at the console will show CW on the LCD display Additionally the CW will flash when a predetermined number of calls are in queue This number is programmable from 1 to 48 on a system basis the default is 6 When an incoming call lights an Incoming Call Identification LDN ATND RCL WATS FX CCSA etc LED the Attendant may answer it out of the queuing sequence by pressing the indicated key Automatic Call Distribution is not used in Multiple Console Operation All incoming call indications appear at each console within the same tenant group so that the call can be answered by any console Each console shares the same queue An incoming call cannot be answered simultaneously by more than one Attendant Only the Attendant that pressed the Answer key first is connected to the call The other Attendant s Answer key will pick up the next call or be ineffective no queue when pressed If a power failure occurs calls in queue which have the power failure transfer feature associated with their trunk will be connected to power failure stations Other calls in queue will not be connected to power failure stations When the system is changed from day to night mode calls already waiting in the queue will remain in the same queue and can be answered by the Attendant Console Calls in queue can overflow to Night Service Refer to Attendant Overflow Features and Specifications for more information NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Feat
381. rt Busy Lamp Field on the keypad The system does not support REC EMG TKSL SVC MODE key on the console The following key assignments are fixed and cannot be changed by system programming PAGE BV CALL PARK SC START MUTE Attendant Called Calling Name Display General Description This feature provides a display of the calling called party s name on the Attendant Console LCD for Attendant Called Calling Name Display On attendant to station calls the LCD display the name assigned to the primary extension of the station On attendant to trunk calls the LCD displays the name assigned to the trunk route of the trunk Station Application Attendant Console Operating Procedure Displays are automatically provided by the system once programmed Service Conditions 1 A maximum of 512 stations can be provided with a user s name display The maximum number of characters per name is 16 including spaces The Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or Customer Admin istration Terminal CAT can be used to register or change a name Multiline Terminal users can record or change the name assignment for their own individual Multiline Terminal 2 User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD display including Single Line Stations NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 21 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Called Calling Number 3 The trunk name display is prov
382. s A 263 SO as hears eee CORO eee LED AENA eR Vee be Dee aes 264 Volume CONT serrridardrrr ir AAA DAES ON EERE PESOS 266 CESIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL ETSI VERSION cosomcorrosscrre rre es 267 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page v TABLE OF CONTENTS Page RENKTE ROLD rra eect Goa ee ecr eh 106s EAS AA PRETESI EERS 268 REMOTE PIK aces ia A AAA A A rr 269 RESERVE POWER oe hin eco es Aid O a Ba pes a 270 RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM cizon dep raid 271 RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY se crcssss ribana ak ma aia arras 275 ROOMCUTOF ee eee er ee eee ee ee ee rer RAR Ad ee ee eee 277 ROOM STATUS ea ee kicst ee rere eee Erk ee re eee eee eee ee 280 ROUTE ADVANCE operi re ee er eae ee ere re eer ee ree EEE wee me ee eee 281 SAVE AND REPEAT 22 36 a Geek Gs ee ee A te ri 282 SECURIT ALA arar rias 283 SET RELOCATION AA A A AREEN RRA ARENES PREE NERE 284 SINGLE DIGIT DIALING si3c0ciee cs wdacencieds EEEL ANENE EENIA EN ORE h ARENE 286 SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS 00000 00 e eee eee eee 287 STACK EIA ee ee ee NE AAA AAA eee ee ee DIA 288 STANON HUNTING AAA E ES SSG E reeset eee bade Scetees 291 A A ERENS ERA 291 SIN AUN TAMNA sg ura ias ear iaa rue 292 Slaton H ning AA IN 293 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR ccsooccciccras sanan erase 295 STANON SPEED 101871114 297 a A A A AO UE OA 300 SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 250 ooicgcrcioroinsvvs
383. s and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 133 DIAL BY NAME 5 Originating a Call a To originate calls after searching press either TRK key Line key My Line Sub Line or Speaker key or off hook When the user originates call pressing TRK key registered trunk access code is ignored When the user originates call pressing Line key or Speaker key or going off hook trunk access code registered can be processed and appropriate trunk is selected When the user originates call after searching the number is registered into the stack dial and Save amp Repeat 6 Name Indication a A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when a call is originated by Speed Calling System with the following operation e Speed Calling System originated with Access code and Speed Calling number e Speed Calling System originated with off hook press System Speed Dialing button and Speed Calling number A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when a call is originated by Speed Calling Station with the following operation e Speed Calling Station originated with Access code and Speed Calling number e Speed Calling Station originated with off hook press Station Speed Dialing button F0064 and Speed Calling number e Speed Calling Station originated with Station Speed Dialing button F11XX e Speed Calling Station originated with Redial key and Speed Calling number A name is displayed on Multiline Terminal when Multiline Terminal
384. s and ringback tone is supplied to the station the station user should immedi ately lift the handset when the called party answers This operation cancels the Timed Queue therefore the period of ringback tone will not time out The combined maximum number of Timed Queues set and Trunk Queuing Outgoing set cannot exceed 32 When the maximum is reached and an attempt to access Timed Queue is made Multiline Terminals with an LCD will receive a visual and audible indication If all trunks are busy when reseizure is attempted the system waits for a trunk in the same trunk route to become idle NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 307 TIMED REMINDER TIMED REMINDER General Description This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call stations at specified times Upon answer ing the station is connected to a recorded announcement or music source Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Timed Reminder I 2 Go off hook and receive dial tone from the primary extension Dial the Timed Reminder feature access code or press the Timed Reminder feature access key and receive feature dial tone Dial the desired reminder time in military format Receive service set tone Restore the handset To cancel Timed Reminder 1 2 3 4 Go off hook and receive dial tone Dial the Timed Reminder cancellation code or press the Timed
385. s available the caller is immediately connected to the station even if the re corded announcement is in progress Incoming call billing to the outside party starts when the first recorded announcement begins Hunt Past No Answer ACD General Description This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agents station after a no answer condition if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable or not available to answer the call Page 52 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Immediate Overflow ACD Station Application Multiline Terminals and Single Line Stations Operating Procedure Refer to the Call Forwarding No Answer Features and Specifications for details on setting the No Answer for warding condition Service Conditions 1 This feature uses Call Forwarding No Answer to another ACD member to enable a call to an agent that fails to answer to hunt past that agent to the next agent 2 Calls directed to the agents primary extension number will also forward on a no answer condition to the next agent 3 It is recommended when this feature is used that the Call Forward No Answer and the Call Forward Busy features be separately assigned use different access codes and keys Immediate Overflow ACD General Description This feature allows a call directed to an
386. s that have been transferred by another At tendant console Call Pickup Group General Description This method permits a station user to answer any calls directed to other extensions in their preset pickup group by dialing a Call Pickup Group feature access code Station Application All stations Operating Procedure Ringing telephone in your Call Pickup Group 1 Go off hook on an extension line and receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Call Pickup Group feature access code 3 Converse Service Conditions 1 All ringing calls directed to extensions in the same Call Pickup Group can be picked up by this feature ex cept for Trunk Queuing Outgoing and Call Back This feature can be activated from feature dial tone There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup Groups A fully restricted station cannot pickup an incoming C O call An individual station may be assigned to only one Call Pickup Group The maximum number of telephones within a group is 60 Ty A A O If more than one station within the group is ringing the system will connect the calls in the order in which the system data for the group is stored NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 98 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL PICKUP Call Pickup Designated Group Call Pickup Designated Group General Description This method permits a station user to answer an incoming call directed to another group by dialing the Call Pi
387. s trunk restriction class An internal station call to a station set for Call Forwarding All Calls Outside will follow the restriction class of the station set Call Forwarding When Call Forwarding to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station Set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Station set Call Forwarding Multiline Terminal Virtual station Originating station trunk When the station user that has set Call Forwarding lifts the handset the station can receive special dial tone by system programming A maximum of 496 Call Forwarding setting to outside number is allowed per system including Call For warding All Calls Busy Line No Answer MP without expansion memory standard up to 240 setting MP with expansion memory optional up to 496 setting Page 76 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding Busy Line General Description This feature permits a call to a busy extension to be routed to a predesignated station Attendant Console or voice mail equipment Call Forwarding Busy Line can be set or cancelled by an Attendant Console the indi vidual station user or a Multiline Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station s extension Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal with LCD
388. sful Wake Up attempts are printed out A printer must be provided locally NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 188 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT 8 The Print Out function allows selection of output based on individual station numbers except for Room Sta tus 9 When Check Out is done the following functions are set or cleared e DND cleared e Message Wait cleared e Room Cutoff set e Automatic Wake Up cleared 10 Room Status Codes are totally flexible and the user determines the meaning for each code The system will print the maid ID or station number if other than guest room that set the specific code Up to eight codes 1 8 are available NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 189 HOTLINE INSIDE OUTSIDE HOTLINE INSIDE OUTSIDE General Description This feature causes the terminal to place a call to another station or to an outside party automatically when the user selects the Hotline extension Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To place a Hotline call from a Single Line Telephone 1 2 Lift the handset and receive ringback tone The other party receives ringing indication Converse when the other party answers To place a Hotline call from a Multiline Terminal 1 2 3 Lift the handset Press the Hotline extension button if not Prime Line Rece
389. specific trunk can be selected out of them for seizure 8 The following are valid methods for making an outgoing call from a Private Line e Dialing the C O trunk access code e Station System Speed Dialing e Least Cost Routing e Trunk Direct Appearance on a Multiline Terminal Last Number Redial 9 Private Lines are not available when using Trunk Queuing Outgoing and Timed Queue NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 251 PRIVATE LINES 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 If a station uses a direct trunk line appearance on a Multiline Terminal for an OG calling the call is origi nated from the C O trunk corresponding to the key pressed Only C O loop start and ground start trunks and Tie Line trunks can be assigned as private lines If the designated trunk is busy the system is able to hunt to the next trunk following increasing trunk num ber order When the route number of the trunk differs from the route number of the original designated trunk hunting stops and the caller receives busy tone If a station uses a secondary extension on a Multiline Terminal for an OG calling the designated trunk for the primary extension of that station is seized A designated trunk can not be seized unless the route of the trunk access code is the same as the route of that trunk In the case of an outgoing call from an Attendant Console or a tandem call a trunk is seized n
390. ss code and receive dial tone 3 The call in progress is held and the station may make a new call From a Multiline Terminal with a Call Hold key assigned 1 Press the CALL HOLD key and receive dial tone 2 The call in progress is held and the user may make a new call From a Multiline Terminal without a Call Hold key 1 Press the Transfer key and receive special dial tone 2 Dial the Call Hold feature access code and receive dial tone 3 The call in progress is held and the user may make a new call To release a call and return to the original call From a Single Line Telephone 1 Hang up to release the call in progress 2 The original call rings back to station 3 Lift the handset and continue with the original call e From a Multiline Terminal 1 Go on hook to release the call in progress NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 180 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 2 3 HOLD Dual Hold The original call rings back to Multiline Terminal Lift the handset and continue with the original call To Hold a call and return to original call From a Single Line Telephone 1 2 3 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive special dial tone Dial the Call Hold feature access code The call is now on Hold The original call is automatically returned From a Multiline Terminal 1 2 Press the Transfer key and receive special dial tone Dial t
391. ssue 1 0 Page 51 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Hunt Past No Answer ACD Service Conditions 1 A Delay Announcement service can be provided for DIT DID or a trunk call transferred by a station user or the Attendant to an ACD Group Internal calls or station to station transferred calls to the ACD Group can go into the ACD queue but do not receive the Delay Announcement The following configurations are available when using Delay Announcement a After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided until an agent is available or the caller hangs up b After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided for a programmed interval then followed by repetition of the Delay Announcement This process repeats until an agent in the ACD group is available on the caller hangs up c After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a first Delay Announcement followed by Music on Hold if provided After a preprogrammed interval the caller then hears a second Delay Announcement followed again by Music on Hold The second Delay Announcement and Music on Hold are then repeated at the preprogrammed interval time until an agent becomes available or the caller hangs up d After being in queue for a predetermined time the caller receives a first Delay Announcement followed
392. st two steps as necessary Service Conditions 1 A three way call may be established any time during a Broker s Call by pressing the CONF key on a Mul tiline Terminal Once a Single Line Telephone has set up a Broker s Call a Conference cannot be established 3 The party on hold during a Broker s Call will receive Music on Hold if provided If the Recall key is pressed with a Broker s Call in progress the currently connected party is dropped The party on Consultation Hold remains on Consultation Hold and new feature dial tone is provided Restoring the handset allows the Consultation Hold call to recall 5 A Broker s call can also be initiated after receiving a Camp On call See Camp on 6 When a Multiline Terminal has a Broker s Call in progress the Answer key alternates between the calls and will not answer additional incoming calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 69 CALL BACK CALL BACK General Description This feature allows a calling party to set an automatic Call Back when a busy or no answer condition is encoun tered When the busy station becomes idle the station that set the Call Back will be called In case of Call Back no answer the Call Back to the setting station is initiated immediately after the called station goes on hook after making a call or accessing a feature Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To set Call Back from a
393. station can be Camped On automatically When the busy station becomes idle the station is automatically called and connected to the camped on incoming trunk call Station Application All stations Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Two Camp On tone patterns are available one to send a repeated tone at intervals of 4 seconds and the other 1s to send the tone once at the time the call is Camped On Either one of these patterns can be selected on a system basis during initial programming The incoming trunk caller receives Ringback tone from the C O until answered by the station in the system Only a single Camp On from any source to a station is allowed at one time When Direct In Termination DIT calls are directed to a busy station they can be preprogrammed on a trunk basis to be sent to an Attendant Trunk Answer any Station TAS or automatically Camped On to the busy station Camp On can be set to a station which has set Call Back Call Back can be set to a party to which Camp On service has been set In both of the above cases Camp On has priority over Call Back Camp On can be set to a station which has set Trunk Queuing Outgoing Camp On has priority over Trunk Queuing Outgoing Camp On can be set to a station which has placed a call on Hold When the station becomes idle Camp On takes priority over the Hold Hold can be set to a party to which Camp On has been set Camp
394. station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 2 3 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 3 4 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 4 5 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 5 6 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 6 7 Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 7 8 Target station for Call Forwarding No Answer 9 Station Speed Dialing The LCD displays SET XXXX Target station 4 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key To cancel Split Call Forwarding No Answer Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the Split Call Forwarding No Answer feature access key and receive special dial tone Press the key and receive service set tone The LCD displays CANCEL and the associated LED goes off 3 Replace the handset or press the Speaker key From a Single Line Telephone e To set Split Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Split Call Forwarding No Answer feature access code and receive feature dial tone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 90 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding Override 3 Dial desired destination number 0 9 and receive service set tone Number Destination Target station for Split Call Forwarding No Answer Block 0
395. station name display has priority over the company name display Page 36 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Incoming Call Identification 8 Ifusing ANI or ISDN some of the characters of the name will be cut off depending on the number of digits of the ANI or ISDN calling party number 9 With ANI or CPN the LDN number will be overwritten by ANI or CPN Incoming Call Identification General Description Incoming calls are identified by various means Refer to Attendant Called Calling Number Attendant Call Se lection Attendant Source Key Attendant Listed Directory Number and Common Route Indial Features and Specifications Operating Procedure Normal operating procedures are applied for each feature Service Conditions Refer to the applicable Features and Specifications Individual Trunk Access General Description The Attendant Console is provided with the ability to access each individual trunk by dialing an associated iden tification code This allows detection of faulty trunks during regular testing or after complaints The Customer Administration Terminal CAT or Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT has the capability to then busy out the trunk until repair is effected Operating Procedure 1 The Attendant presses an idle LOOP key 2 The Attendant dials the Individual Trunk access code 3 The Attendant dials the Individual Trunk iden
396. sturb System Do Not Disturb Data Line Elapsed Call Timer Enhanced 911 Executive Calling LJ LIL ibiljlyljlyby sili ly mpm lye Executive Override External Paging with Meet Me Fax Arrival Indicator Feature Activation from Secondary Extension Flexible Line Key Assignment Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible Ringing Assignment Forced Account Code Group Call Automatic Conference 6 10 Party 2 Way Calling Group Listening Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring Hold Call Hold X X OK X X X OK OK X X X X X OK OK X OK OK X X OK OK X X X X OK OK OK OK x x X x x yy y y ddmde NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page xii NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 TABLE OF FEATURES FEATURE Dual Hold X available not available E enhanced or changed gt carried over to next level software NEAX2000 IVS 1900 Series R2 NEAX2000 IVS x y Exclusive Hold Non Exclusive Hold Hotel Motel Attendant Console Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Hotline Inside Outside House Phone Individual Attendant Access Intercept Announcement Intercom Manual Intercom Automatic Intercom Dial Intercom Internal Tone Voice Signalling Internal Zone Paging with Meet Me yb id did y mili is ju Keyboar
397. t Camp On Attendant Override Boss Secretary Override Executive Override Camp On 5 The ringing interval provided to a station assigned for Data Line Security is fixed at 1 second ON 2 sec onds OFF NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 127 DELAYED RINGING DELAYED RINGING General Description This feature enables trunks and station lines to ring immediately at the terminating station but also after a pro grammable period of time has elapsed to ring at secondary Multiline Terminals with that trunk or line appear ance Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions Delayed Ringing is assigned in system programming on a per line key basis 2 The timing of call termination to the start of Delayed Ringing is programmable in system data in increments of 2 seconds to a maximum of 40 seconds default value 10 seconds 3 When Delayed Ringing and Call Forwarding No Answer are applied to the same call the feature which timeouts first will take priority NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 128 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS General Description To assist maintenance personnel the system provides diagnostic capabilities such as fault code generation de vice status information and alarm information recording which can be accessed from the M
398. t Console 1 Dial the MODE feature access code or press the MODE key and the associated red LED lights The LCD displays DAY for day mode and the LED of the DAY key lights green Press the NIGHT key and the associated LED lights red The LCD display changes from DAY to NIGHT 3 Press the ANS key and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET NIGHT The mode of the console is now changed from day to night mode 4 Press the RLS key To change Night to Day mode from SN610 Attendant Console 1 Press the MODE key and the associated red LED lights 2 Dial a predetermined password number which will display on the LCD 3 Press the DAY key and the associated green LED lights The LCD display changes from NIGHT to DAY 4 Press the ANS key and receive service set tone The LCD displays SET DAY The mode of the console is now changed from night to day 5 Press the RLS key To change Day to Night mode from SN716 DESKCON 1 Press Night key Night lamp will be lit To change Night to Day mode from SN716 DESKCON 1 Press Night key when Night lamp is lit Night lamp will be off Service Conditions 1 This feature can be activated only by a master Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Station Dialing General Description This feature allows selected stations to activate a change from day mode to night mode by dialing a special code NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page
399. t basis for the destination assignment The Attendant Console can answer by pressing the EMG key which must be assigned by the MAT or CAT Answering by the Answer key will not give priority to the Off hook Alarm The predesignated station 1f allowed can set Call Forward All Calls and Call Forward Busy The Off hook Alarm will follow the Call Forward setting NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 240 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 OFF PREMISES EXTENSIONS OFF PREMISES EXTENSIONS General Description This feature allows the connection of a single line telephone in an off premises location The connection to the Off Premises Extension can be through direct copper or through the local telephone company Station Application Single Line Stations Operating Procedure Normal operating procedures apply Service Conditions A PN AUCA is required for connection of Off Premises Extensions The PN AUCA is a 2 circuit card 2 The maximum loop resistance for an Off Premises Extension is 2500 ohms inclusive of the resistance of the telephone 3 Message Waiting is not available for Off Premises Extensions Disconnect supervision is not available on Off Premises Extensions NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 241 OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE OAI OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE OAI General Description Provides a computer to PBX interface allowing a
400. tation Status Display Busy BUSY BSY Station 3000 is busy Called Station Status Display Restricted RESTRICT RST Station 3000 is restricted Camp on Call Waiting Calling station CW SET CW SET Camp on was set to station 30000 Camp on Call Waiting Called station CALL WAITING CW Station 3010 set camp on Conference Station during 3 party confer ence CONF CNF 3010 Conference Station during 4 party confer ence Page 342 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 APPENDIX 2 LCD D M DISPLAY APPENDIX 2 LCD D M DISPLAY CONTINUED Description Day Night Mode Change by Sta tion Dialing Series E Series Ill SET DAY Description Confirmation of day mode set SET NIGHT Confirmation of day mode set Do Not Disturb Calling station DND 3000 Do not disturb is set to station 3000 Do Not Disturb Transferred destination DND 3000 3010 Station 3010 was forwarded from station 3000 in DND mode Elapsed Call Timer 0 01 36 DDD 0 01 36 DDD 1000 Hold Exclusive Hold E HOLD EHD 3000 Hold Non Exclusive Hold HOLD HLD 3000 Intercom Calling and called party ICM ICM 3000 Call on intercom Internal Zone Paging with Meet Me Originator PAGING PAGING Message Reminder MESSAGE MSG
401. tation will ring Note Multiple Call Backs can be set by repeating the procedure above To set Call Back from a Multiline Terminal 1 2 3 Dial desired station number and receive busy tone or ringback tone Press the CALL BACK key or dial 2 and receive service set tone Restore handset Page 70 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CALL BACK 4 When the busy station becomes idle or the station that did not answer first initiates or answers a call or ac cesses a feature and then becomes idle the station that set the Call Back will ring Note Multiple Call Backs can be set by repeating the procedure above To cancel Call Back from a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Call Back cancellation code and receive service set tone To cancel Call Back from a Multiline Terminal 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Press the CALL BACK key and receive service set tone Service Conditions If a Call Back is not answered by the originator within 30 seconds the Call Back is automatically cancelled A Call Back to a station in Line Lockout is denied 3 Dial pulse Single Line Telephones can omit pressing the FLASH key or momentarily pressing the hook switch to set call back while receiving ringback tone 4 Ifthe station presses the FLASH key while receiving feature dial tone before setting t
402. tem all stations cancel access code 3 Dial the message number 0 9 and receive service set tone 4 Restore the handset e To cancel Voice Message Waiting System to an individual station Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Message Waiting System cancel access code Dial the station number and receive service set tone Restore the handset ees ee To retrieve a message from a Single Line Telephone Lift the handset and receive dial tone Dial the Voice Message Waiting System retrieve access code Listen to the message Restore the handset fe to hs To retrieve a message from a Multiline Terminal Press the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive dial tone Press the MSG key Listen to the message A o Press the Speaker key or restore the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 220 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 MESSAGE WAITING Voice Message Waiting Individual e To set 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting Individual set access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone for 3 seconds 4 Record the message 5 Restore the handset To cancel 1 Lift the handset and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting Individual cancel access code and receive feature dial tone 3 Dial the desired station number and receive service set tone
403. ter a busy condition to be for warded to a predetermined location Attendant Console another station or voice mail equipment Individually set Call Forwarding Busy Line settings take precedence over system basis Call Forwarding Busy Line settings If the Call Forwarding Busy Line is rerouted to a hunt group and all members of the hunt group are busy the forwarded caller will receive busy tone When a call is directed to the pilot number of an ACD UCD group and that pilot station has set Call For warding Busy Line the call will be forwarded if all stations within the ACD UCD group are busy When a calling station or Attendant Console receives busy tone after being call forwarded because of Call Forwarding Busy Line the caller can activate Executive Override Camp On Attendant Override Call Back Message Reminder or other service features available on busy tone to the initially called station When a call is forwarded to a Multiline Terminal with LCD the display shows the original called station s number as well as the calling station s number Call Forwarding No Answer can be set simultaneously with this feature to result in Call Forwarding Busy Line No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Line and Call Forwarding No Answer can be set to the same or different extensions When Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside is set the system can be programmed to allow or deny the setting of the Call Forward with only a tru
404. the called station is busy or does not answer Station Application All stations and Attendant Consoles Operating Procedure From a Multiline Terminal 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Press the Redial key followed by or dial the Last Number Redial feature access code 3 The system will redial the last number dialed from that station From a Single Line Telephone 1 Go off hook and receive dial tone 2 Dial the Last Number Redial feature access code 3 The system will redial the last number dialed from that station From an Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Press the LNR key followed by 3 The system will redial the last number dialed from that attendant Service Conditions 1 The maximum number of digits that can be stored for Last Number Redial is 32 2 Dialing digits after going off hook replaces previously stored digits with the new digits 3 When the Step Call feature is used the final destination number is stored in memory 4 Pressing the Redial key when the Multiline Terminal is idle displays the stored number on the LCD and turns on the Speaker LED 5 This feature stores numbers dialed on the Multiline Terminal s primary or secondary extension or Direct Trunk Appearances This feature does not store Dial Intercom or data calls 6 If the system is designated as KF registration this feature is not available NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications
405. tification code 4 If the trunk was idle testing can follow Service Conditions The Attendant Console LCD display will show the individual trunk identification code If the trunk is busy the attendant receives busy tone If the trunk has been set to busy out status by the CAT or MAT the Attendant can still access the trunk Individual Trunk Access is not available for ISDN PRI lines NO T NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 37 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Multi Function Key Multi Function Key General Description This feature allows the top row of keys on the Attendant Console to perform and display multiple functions in accordance with the status of call processing Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Multi Function Keys can be assigned to key numbers 01 06 SN610 ATTCON 01 04 SN716 DESKCON located directly below the LCD The lowest line of the LCD displays the function of the associated Multi Function key under the following conditions e Idle state e When an attendant called station answers or the attendant seizes an originating trunk When the called station is busy When the called station is in Do Not Disturb e When dialing a station number without pressing the LOOP key Hotel Motel features will be activated A maximum of 5 status functions per Multi Function Key can be assigned The LEDs associated with the Mu
406. tiline Terminal Station Application All Multiline Terminals with LCD Operating Procedure 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the desired station 3 The status of the called station appears on the LCD Service Conditions 1 Ifthe called station is idle the called stations number will flash on the LCD until the call is answered When the call is answered the number and the name of the called party will be displayed in the LCD The called party s name can be assigned in system programming If the called station is busy the LCD will display BUSY and the called station s number If the called station is in Do Not Disturb the LCD will display DND and the called station s number If a restricted station is called the LCD will display RESTRICT and the called station s number If the called station has set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer the LCD will display CF ALL CF BUSY or CF NANS respectively the called station s number and the target station s number E OAS 6 If the called station is in a Call Pickup group and the call is picked up by another station the LCD will dis play PICK the called station s number and the number of the station that picked up the call 7 Refer to the Alphanumeric Display and Elapsed Call Timer features for additional information Calling Name and Number Display General Description This feature provides a display on the LCD of the
407. tiline Terminal However the following cases are available Note e Single Line Terminal DP Single Line Terminal PB e Between Multiline Terminals with different line button number Note In this case telephone sets also should be changed When the station has the following features it cannot be moved e Single Line Terminal equipped with DSSCON e Multiline Terminal equipped with Add On Module e Multiline Terminal equipped with APR e Multiline Terminal equipped with Dual Path In this case when dial Set Relocation access code receive restrict ROT The following services cannot be moved e Stack Dial e Last Number Redial e Save and Repeat NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 284 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 SET RELOCATION When the station is busy it cannot be moved This feature is selectable by service restriction class 6 When Multiline Terminal is moved to Multiline Terminal e The LED status of Multiline Trunk station cannot be moved e If Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer Do Not Disturb Message Waiting MW or Busy Out is setting the associated LED will be lit 7 When Single Line Terminal is moved to Single Line Terminal if MW is setting after moving MW lamp will be lit 8 During saving loading system data this feature is restricted Because system data is changed when this fea ture is activated the data is not matched with saving data before service settin
408. tiline Terminals provide a green LED lit steady at the line key currently being used by that Multiline Terminal Multiline Terminals provide a green flashing LED at the line key placed on Hold by that Multiline Terminal 3 The LED flash rate for calls placed on I Hold by that terminal is 125 seconds on 125 seconds off 125 seconds on 625 seconds off Microphone Control General Description All Multiline Terminals are equipped with a Microphone Control button with an associated LED Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure When the MIC LED is off press the Feature key followed by 1 to activate the microphone The associated LED will light Service Conditions 1 When the MIC LED is lit Intercom voice and extension voice calls to a Multiline Terminal can be answered using the microphone NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 257 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Multiple Line Operation 2 When the MIC LED is off Intercom voice signals will still be received but the user must activate the mi crophone in order to respond using Handsfree Answerback Multiple Line Operation General Description This feature allows for the appearance of multiple lines on the Flexible Line Keys and feature keys of all Mul tiline Terminals Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Co
409. tion from outgoing calls A station assigned this feature is denied the ability to access preselected trunk routes Attempts are routed to reorder tone e Code Restriction Levels of this feature restrict unauthorized stations the ability to complete outgoing C O or foreign exchange calls to a specified area or office codes within an area code Refer to the Least Cost Routing feature A station with Toll Denial is routed to reorder tone when a restricted number is dialed after the trunk access code has been dialed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 146 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD 6 Exchange network call completion using the Hotline Outside feature is permitted The originating station is automatically routed to the assigned trunk route and the digits are dialed automatically when the station goes off hook 7 This feature is disabled when the switch on the MP card is set to KF registration NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 147 DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF CONSOLE General Description This feature allows a Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Console to be associated with a Multiline Terminal When the buttons on the DSS BLF Console unit are programmed for Direct Station Selec tion DSS buttons up to 60 stations can be dire
410. to a Broker s Call A maximum of 16 simultaneous Conferences can be established in the system The Hold key on Multiline Terminals can be used during a Conference to place the other parties on Hold Exclusive or Nonexclusive The other parties can continue to converse Retrieval of the first party on Multiline Terminals after pressing the Transfer key dialing another party and receiving ringback with no answer or busy tone is accomplished by pressing the Transfer key Use of the Recall key instead will provide feature dial tone and allows calling another party Attendant Override and Executive Override cannot be used on stations currently in a four party Conference When attempting to call a second internal party after a hookflash and the Single Line Telephone user en counters internal busy tone or internal ringback with no answer the user can return to the first party by hook flashing again When a call is made to a second external party after a hookflash the next hookflash will result in a Confer ence By hookflashing again the last connection is released returning the Single Line Telephone user to the original party Call Back and Message Waiting can be set to stations involved in a three or four party Conference Amplification is not provided for Conferences When a Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal user goes on hook during a three party Conference with two outside parties a tandem connection will be established if one o
411. to the boss is now placed on Consultation Hold and the boss and secretary can converse 3 The secretary goes on hook The boss is connected to the caller originally connected to the secretary The caller originally connected to the boss is placed on Call Hold If the boss presses the Transfer key the boss receives Special Dial Tone allowing transfer of the new call 5 When the boss goes on hook the original call recalls to the boss station 6 The boss goes off hook and is connected to the original party For a Boss Secretary override when the boss is busy on a Single Line Telephone and the secretary has a call on the primary extension of the secretary s Multiline Terminal 1 The secretary presses the boss line key appearance on the secretary s Multiline Terminal The party that was connected to the secretary is placed on Hold and receives Music On Hold if provided Additionally the sec retary hears special ringback tone and the boss hears one burst of tone through the handset to indicate a call is waiting 2 The boss presses the FLASH key or momentarily presses the hookswitch At this time the secretary and boss are connected and the other two parties are on Hold 3 The secretary goes on hook The boss is connected to the caller originally connected to the secretary The boss original party remains on Call Hold 4 The boss may now alternate between callers Broker s Call using the FLASH key NEAX2000 IVS Business Hot
412. ual search is performed by pressing the UP or DOWN soft key until the desired name or buffer number is located In either case going off hook pressing the Speaker key or selecting a Line Trunk key will originate a call to the selected number To search calling number by name and originate a call by Speed Dialing Station 1 2 From the idle state press the STA soft key on the Multiline Terminal To search by name enter up to the first four characters of a name using the keypad Refer to Service Con dition 2 Press the UP or DOWN soft key to start the search The name and the number are shown on the LCD If more than one name matches the letters entered scroll through the matches with the UP or DOWN soft key If no matches are found the first Station Speed Dial buffer will be displayed To search for a different name repeat Step 2 Manual search is performed by pressing the UP or DOWN soft key until the desired name or buffer number is located In either case going off hook pressing the Speaker key or selecting a Line Trunk key will originate a call NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 130 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIAL BY NAME To register a name and number for call by Speed Calling Station 1 SOW a HO SS From the idle state press the STA soft key Using the UP or DOWN soft keys select the buffer number to be programmed Press the FEATURE key Using the Alphabet on ke
413. ultiline Terminal with Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field Console DSS BLF OR Attendant Console e Standard Positions 8 Line Multiline Terminal 16 Line Multiline Terminal with LCD Single Line Telephones 3 High trunk to station ratio 256 trunks Ground Loop Start Centrex line compatibility 5 Centrex line Direct In Termination DIT to individual Single Line Telephones with secondary answering at any Multiline Terminal Delayed Ringing for backup answer of Centrex incoming calls Hookflash to Centrex line from Multiline Terminal Single Line Telephone Automatic seizure using dial access of individual Centrex lines with outgoing restriction control up to 64 trunks 9 Code Restriction allows for inspection to follow the Centrex access code for Direct Outward Dialing 10 Flexible extension numbering to match Centrex numbering pattern 11 KF registration FCC Part 68 12 Trunk Direct Appearance for Centrex lines 13 Function keys at Multiline Terminals for easy access to Centrex features NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 111 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY 14 Automatic pause after Centrex access code 15 Listed directory numbers display at Attendant Console 16 Uniform Call Distribution UCD for quick and efficient handling of incoming calls 17 Recall key provides timed hookflash to Centrex for feature access 18 Prime line Assignment to Centrex line when usi
414. umber of the first party station or C O Tie line to be added to the conference NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 120 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 CONFERENCE SIX TEN PARTY 3 After the party answers press the Hold key 4 Call all desired parties station or C O Tie line sequentially using other line keys and placing each on hold after the party answers 5 After holding the last party press the Conference feature key The line key associated with the last party lights green The last party is connected to the CFT trunk 6 Sequentially press the holding line keys to connect the participants to the CFT trunk OR 1 Conference leader Press the line key and then press the Conference feature key The Conference feature key lights red Dial the number of the first party station or C O Tie line to be added to the conference 3 After the party answers press the Conference feature key The line key lights red and the Conference fea ture key lights green The first party is connected to the CFT trunk 4 Press the Hold key The Conference feature key flashes red 5 Sequentially call all desired parties station or C O Tie line by using other line keys and then connect them to the CFT trunk by pressing the Conference feature key after each party answers To release a participant Conference leader Go on hook The Conference feature key lights red 2 Go off hook and press the line k
415. umed after the password was entered NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 31 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Training Jacks Service Conditions A feature access code can be assigned and dialed instead of using the PROG key 2 The PROG key must be assigned to any of the upper 6 keys of the SN610 ATTCON upper 4 keys of the SN716 DESKCON 3 8 DISA Codes can be set up and changed by the Attendant Console 300 Speed Dial Codes can be set up and changed by the Attendant Console Attendant Training Jacks General Description SN610 ATTCON can be equipped with two headset handset jacks using an optional adaptor Two jacks are equipped on the adaptor and can be used for training new operators SN716 DESKCON provides two headset handset jacks on the console and does not require the optional adap tor Operating Procedure Normal call handling procedures apply Service Conditions When the jacks are used for training both handsets can be used for listening and talking Audible Indication Control General Description This feature allows the Attendant to adjust the volume of audible indications received at the Attendant Console Operating Procedure Adjusting the volume control allows control of audible signaling at the Attendant Console Service Conditions 1 The audible indication volume control does not affect the volume of the SN610 Attendants handset or head set
416. unk connection is maintained 5 After recall to the Attendant Console the called party may answer which would result in an initial three way conversation before the call is extended Alternately the Attendant can re extend the call from above to the same destination or extend it to another Service Conditions 1 The feature is dependent on trunk supervision and other conditions being met 2 The trunk associated with at least one side of the call must be programmed for answer and or release super vision to ensure that the trunks do not lock up or this feature will be disallowed NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 41 ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT General Description This feature provides an announcement via a Digital Announcement Trunk Card to external calls that are not answered by the attendant within a predetermined time Station Application Not applicable Operating Procedure No manual operation required Service Conditions Up to eight calls can be connected to one circuit of a Digital Announcement Trunk Card at one time This feature is provided on a trunk route basis C O TIE DID 3 A maximum of 128 Digital Announcement Trunk circuits can be assigned on a tenant system basis There are 2 circuits on MP card 2 circuits on each 2DAT card and 4 circuits on each 4DAT card 4 The announcement can be supplied to a call onc
417. until the desired tone is selected Service Conditions The ring frequency for both internal and external calls can be controlled by system programming For internal calls the frequency can be assigned on a per station basis by Class of Service assignment For external incoming calls the frequency can be assigned on a trunk route basis Ringing Line Pickup General Description This feature provides the ability to answer any call ringing into a Multiline Terminal by just lifting the handset Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure With an incoming call or recall in progress 1 Lift handset and the call is answered 2 Converse Service Conditions This feature is assigned in station Class of Service 2 The following priority applies for answering of multiple incoming calls a Voice Call b Incoming call on primary extension recalls on primary extension c Incoming call on trunk line key recalls on trunk line key d Incoming call on secondary extension recalls on secondary extension NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 263 PROPRIETARY MULTILINE TERMINAL Soft Keys 3 Ringing Line Pickup has priority over Prime Line Pickup in any case 4 The Prime Line Pickup feature takes priority over Ringing Line Pickup when the Speaker key is used to answer the call If necessary the Prime Line Pickup feature can be disabled on a per station
418. ure is provided according to Class of Service If the called terminal is single line telephone this feature is not activated 3 After setting Remote Hold if the call is not answered for pre assigned time the original Multiline Terminal is recalled even if the called Multiline Terminal is set Call Forwarding No Answer NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 268 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 REMOTE PIM REMOTE PIM General Description When the system has two or more PIMs the PIMs can be installed separately by T1 digital interface A maxi mum of 3 PIMs can be installed apart at the remote site Station Application All stations Operating Procedure The same operating procedure as the regular NEA X2000 IVs apply for each service feature Service Conditions The Main Site must be the NEAX2000 IVS The Small Platform System cannot be the Main Site Only one PIM is available at each Remote Site 3 The Remote PIM can be installed at a maximum of 1312 ft distance from the Main Site The distance can be extended by using line extension equipment repeater MUX etc 4 A maximum of 23 lines trunks can be accommodated in one Remote PIM Application processor cards can not be accommodated in Remote PIM 5 When the link between the Main Site and the Remote Site has been lost for a certain duration the system activates the PFT Power Failure Transfer automatically on the Remote Site if it is provided
419. ure key 2 5 dB receiving 3dB sending Feature key 4 5 dB receiving No gain sending LCD contrast e While in an on hook state press the i UP key to decrease the contrast or the l DOWN key to increase the contrast Service Conditions 1 The Speaker Handset volume control adjusts the volume of voice calls over the speaker handset receiver and any tone sent by the system when using the speaker or handset 2 The ring Volume Control adjusts the volume of all ring tones to the Multiline Terminal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 266 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Q SIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL ETSI VERSION Q SIG CIRCUIT SWITCHED BASIC CALL ETSI VERSION General Description This feature provides a tie line connection between NEAX2000 IVS and the other Q SIG PBX using the ISDN protocol in conformity with ETS 300 172 standardized by ETSI European Telecommunications Standards In stitute NEAX2000 IVS ISDN PBX PBX Q SIG Q SIG Another Office Another CCIS Office Note 1 Layer 2 interface should be inconformity with Q 921 Note 2 Connection to other vender s PBXs requires prior System Interworking Tests Operating Procedure No manual operation is required Service Conditions 1 Layer 2 and less should be activated normally 2 Redundancy structure One D channel can control maximum 30 B channels Interaction The followi
420. ure key is provided on the Multiline Terminal 2 Restore the handset NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 95 CALL PARK Call Park Tenant To retrieve a call from Call Park Tenant From a Single Line Telephone r Ze 3 4 Go off hook and receive internal dial tone Dial the Call Park Tenant retrieval access code Dial the Call Park Tenant location number 1 8 Converse From a Multiline Terminal with Call Park Tenant feature key A Go off hook and receive dial tone Press the Call Park Tenant feature key flashing Dial the Call Park Tenant location number 1 8 Converse From a Multiline Terminal with Trunk Direct Appearances 1 2 Go off hook and receive dial tone Press the Trunk Direct Appearances key flashing Service Conditions 1 9 A maximum of 8 simultaneous calls can be parked within a tenant A station user can place multiple calls into Call Park Tenant provided the maximum number is not exceeded A station user can originate and receive calls while having a call in Call Park Tenant Any internal or external can be placed into Call Park Tenant Any call left on Call Park Tenant for more than a preprogrammed time interval will recall to the primary extension of the station which originally parked the call If the call was parked using a Call Park Tenant key the call will recall to that key When Call Park System recalls
421. ures and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 101 CALL TRANSFER Call Transfer All Calls CALL TRANSFER General Description This feature permits a station user to transfer a call to another station in the system directly or with assistance from the attendant Call Transfer All Calls General Description This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing calls to another station within the system without attendant assistance Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To transfer a call in progress from a Single Line Telephone 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive feature dial tone 2 Dial the third party and receive ringback tone 3 Restore the handset before the third party answers The first and third parties will be connected when the third party answers OR Wait for the third party to answer and announce the transfer while keeping the first party on Consultation Hold When the station user hangs up the first and third parties are connected automatically To transfer a call in progress from a Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Transfer key and receive feature dial tone 2 Dial the third party and receive ringback tone 3 Restore the handset before the third party answers The first and third parties will be connected when the third party answers OR Wait for the third party to answer and announce the transfer while keeping the first p
422. ures and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 33 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Call Splitting Call Splitting General Description This feature allows the Attendant to confer privately with one party on an Attendant handled connection without the other party overhearing Operating Procedure To speak with the called party only 1 Dial the desired station number 2 The Station class number is displayed 3 Wait for the party to answer To speak with calling party only 1 Press the SRC key 2 The Trunk kind number displayed 3 Proceed with the conversation To return to called party 1 Press the DEST key 2 The Station class number displayed To speak with both parties Press the TALK key To release from the Attendant Console Press the RLS key To disconnect all parties involved in a three way Conference 1 Press the DEST key 2 Press the CANCL key twice Service Conditions 1 The Attendant may alternate between the called and calling station parties and three party Conference as desired The Call Splitting feature is a standard Attendant feature 3 Call Splitting is automatic when the Attendant begins call completion or answers a recall Call Splitting is manual when the SRC DEST or TALK key is pressed on the Attendant Console NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 34 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Call Waiting Display Call Waiting Display General Description
423. user verifies the registered Speed Calling number with the following operation e Dial Speed Calling Access code and Speed Calling number e Press Station Speed Dialing button FO065 and Speed Calling number e Press Feature key Station and Speed Dialing button F11XX e Press Feature key Recall Button and dial Speed Calling number A name is displayed when Multiline Terminal user originates a call by Speed Calling One Touch A name is displayed when Multiline Terminal user verifies the registered Speed Calling number with Feature key and One Touch Button When outgoing call encountered all trunk busy status and Route Advance CM71 72 is activated the name is displayed on Multiline Terminal LCD A name is displayed when Multiline terminal user originates a call with Hot Line The Name Display Guest Name are prior to name registered in a station to station call made by Speed Calling One Touch key A name is displayed for about 6 seconds on Multiline Terminal LCD when Multiline Terminal user originates a call by Speed Calling System Station One Touch key Page 134 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DIAL CONVERSION DIAL CONVERSION General Description The system can be assigned to use rotary Dial Pulse DP or Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF trunks and sta tions This feature provides for the repeating of digits dialed by the station user onto the C O trunks Station Appl
424. usiness Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 156 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 DO NOT DISTURB Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel A station included in a DND group retains the ability to place their particular station in DND When the Attendant places a group in DND an individual station within the group can cancel the DND set ting to their station A feature access line key can be assigned on Multiline Terminals for DND set and cancel If the DND key is pressed while connected to a trunk or station the following interruptions are denied until that call is completed e Attendant Camp On e Attendant Override e Boss Secretary Override e Camp On e Executive Override Refer also to the Data Do Not Disturb feature and the Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb feature DND is displayed on a Multiline Terminal with LCD when calling a station in DND The priority for service checks features activated on a station is as follows a Call Forwarding All Calls b Call Forwarding Busy Line c Station Hunting UCD d Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Hotel Motel General Description This feature allows the Attendant Console s Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument s guest stations or Property Management System PMS terminal s to place individual stations into Do Not Disturb Calls can be placed from stations set in DND Station Application All stations Operating Procedure From the Hotel Motel Fr
425. usiness Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 145 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD General Description This feature permits any station user the ability to gain access to the exchange network by dialing an access code and receiving new dial tone The user may then proceed to dial the desired exchange network number Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To place an outside call From any station 1 Go off hook and receive extension dial tone 2 Dial the trunk access code 3 Receive outside dial tone 4 Dial the desired outside number e From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Speaker key and receive extension dial tone 2 Press a trunk appearance line key 3 Receive outside dial tone 4 Dial the desired outside number Service Conditions Outgoing restriction can be assigned on an individual station basis Refer to Class of Service Code Restriction may be applied to Direct Outward Dialing DOD Various types of trunks FX WATS Tie DID etc can be accessed by stations using this feature The trunk route access code can be one to three digits NIE ea Use of the DOD feature can be denied on a per trunk route basis when one of the following restrictions is active on the originating station line e Fully restricted stations Direct Outward Dialing attempts are routed to reorder tone when the station is fully restricted e Restric
426. usive Hold exists and during recall An internal station on Exclusive Hold cannot receive the following e Camp On e Attendant Override Executive Override Non Exclusive Hold General Description This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold which may be retrieved by any station that has an appearance of the held line Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure 1 2 With a call in progress press the Hold key once To retrieve a held call press the held line key Service Conditions 1 2 3 4 Any Multiline Terminal displaying another appearance of the held line can seize the held call Automatic Recall is directed only to the station which placed the call on Hold The station initiating Hold will receive a distinctive I Hold indication Two Party Hold is available when a Multiline Terminal is engaged in a three party Conference with stations and or trunks When two parties are put on Hold service features such as Executive Override Attendant Override and Camp On cannot be activated to that busy line with the two parties on Hold The two held parties remain connected to each other and can talk to each other Music on Hold is not acti vated The two held parties cannot be placed on Exclusive Hold by the Multiline Terminal user If one of the two held parties is released from the connection Music On Hold will be activated on the re maining connection When th
427. uting table according to different types of calls Call Type Reroutes To Operator Call dial 0 call Predetermined station Refer to Attendant Night Transfer LDN Call TAS or night station Direct Inward Termination DIT Predetermined station or Announcement Service DIT when busy TAS or Automatic Camp On until the station becomes idle DIT when no answer TAS or ringback tone DID when busy or no answer Predetermined station or Announcement Service Note Tie Line when busy or no answer Predetermined station or Announcement Service Note Trunk Direct Appearance TAS night station or TAS and night station with Trunk Direct Appearance Note Jn the day mode the call also reroutes to the same service or Attendant 2 When an Attendant presses the NT key any calls existing in call queuing memory or loop memory on the Attendant Console should be completed first New incoming calls after hitting the NT key will reroute according to assigned Night Service programming NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 234 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 NIGHT SERVICE Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console Day Night Mode Change by Attendant Console General Description This feature provides activation of DAY NIGHT Mode Change by pressing a predetermined key from the At tendant Console Station Application Attendant Console Operating Procedure To change Day to Night mode from SN610 Attendan
428. ve RBT sent to them Attendant Listed Directory Number General Description This feature provides a display of the Listed Directory Number on the Attendant Console when the operator has answered a Listed Directory Number call NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 27 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Loop Release Operating Procedure 1 2 3 The operator at an Attendant Console answers an incoming call The DEST lamp lights The Listed Directory Number Trunk Number and Trunk Identification Code are displayed Service Conditions 1 This service is effective when the operator at an Attendant Console has answered a Listed Directory Number call terminated to the Attendant Console While the Listed Directory Number is displayed the operator can transfer the call to a desired station by keying the destination number on the key pad In this case the Listed Directory Number of the call cannot be displayed again While the Listed Directory Number is displayed the operator can place the present call on Hold by pressing the HOLD button In this case the Listed Directory Number cannot be displayed again when the operator returns to the call on Hold While the Listed Directory Number is displayed the operator can set Call Park In this case the Listed Di rectory Number of the call placed on Call Park cannot be displayed again If the call recalls from Call Park the trunk route
429. wer the incoming call This procedure is programmable in system programming on a system basis Service Conditions A line key whose associated LED is lit steady cannot be seized by pressing that key 2 When the desired line key is pressed line preselection will remain in effect for 6 seconds After 6 seconds line selection returns to the Prime Line if assigned 3 Line Preselection has priority over Ringing Line Pickup and Prime Line assignment NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 207 MAID STATUS MAID STATUS General Description This feature allows the Hotel Motel H M Front Desk Instrument Property Management System PMS termi nal or guest room station using special access code to register the condition of each guest room Station Application All stations except House Phones Operating Procedure To set Maid Status from the Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument 1 DADES AD DA hone Press the STS key Dial the desired function status code Press the STS key again Dial the guest room number Press the SET key The above two steps can be repeated for other stations Press the RLS key OR Press the STS key Dial the guest room number Press the SET key Room Status is displayed The above two steps can be repeated for other stations Press the STS key again Dial the desired function status number code Press the SET key The above two ste
430. with a call in progress 1 2 3 4 Attendant A dials the Interposition Calling Transfer access code and Attendant B s identification number The call is indicated at Console B on the Answer key or TF key Attendant B presses the Answer key Attendant A presses the RLS key to transfer or may consult before release Service Conditions coer eS Each console is assigned an identification number to allow Interposition Calling or Transfers An Attendant can receive one Interposition Call or Transfer at a time After receiving an Interposition Transfer the Attendant has full capabilities for redirecting the call When Night Service at the called console is in effect Interposition Calling and Transfers result in reorder tone Attendant Lamp Check General Description This function is used to check the status of keys lamps and LCDs mounted on the Attendant Console to verify that various operations of the Attendant Console are functioning normally The check is done by a preset pro cedure Station Application Not Applicable Page 26 NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 ATTENDANT CONSOLE Attendant Listed Directory Number Operating Procedure To set the SN610 ATTCON into the Lamp Check Mode 1 Press the NIGHT key to set the Attendant Console in Night Mode 2 Disconnect the line cord modular plug from jack in the bottom of the Attendant Console 3 Reconnect the m
431. without lifting the handset Station Application All Multiline Terminals Operating Procedure To initiate a call 1 Press the Speaker key and receive dial tone 2 Dial the desired number 3 When the called party answers lift the handset To monitor a call 1 Press the Speaker key and replace the handset 2 When the conversation resumes lift the handset Service Conditions 1 This feature may be used for both internal and external calls 2 Volume may be adjusted using the speaker volume control on the Multiline Terminal 3 To talk to the called party the user may use the handset or handsfree if the MIC is active NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 179 HOLD Call Hold HOLD General Description This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress After Hold has been set the station user can make or an swer new calls Call Hold General Description This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress by sending a hookflash and dialing the Call Hold feature access code or by pressing the Call Hold key This line can then be used for originating another call or returning to a previously held call Station Application All stations Operating Procedure To Hold a call in progress From a Single Line Telephone 1 Press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hookswitch and receive special dial tone 2 Dial the Call Hold feature acce
432. y Do Not Disturb is automatically cleared when Check Out is performed Depending on system programming an incoming call addressed to a station in DND condition is routed to one of the following on a per tenant basis e Reorder tone e Attendant Console e A predesignated station Refer to Attendant Console and Hotel Motel Front Desk Instrument Features and Specifications for addi tional information on Do Not Disturb When a member station within a Station Hunting group is in DND calls will bypass the member station and continue hunting A pilot station in DND places the Hunt group in DND Call Forwarding Busy settings by stations in DND will result in calls being forwarded even if the stations are idle Message Waiting and Message Reminder can not be set to stations in DND during conversation NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 158 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 DO NOT DISTURB Do Not Disturb System 9 Call Back cannot be set to stations in DND 10 Recalls will override the DND setting and ring back to a station in DND Do Not Disturb System General Description This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a preassigned group of stations by operation from the Ho tel Motel Front Desk Instrument s Attendant Console s and Hotel Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the DND OVR key to override this Do Not Disturb setting Station Application All stations Operating Procedure
433. y another station 3 Wait for the third party to answer 4 Press the Conf key A four party Conference is established CONF is shown in the LCD display Service Conditions A maximum of two trunks can be used in a Conference Single Line Telephones can add up to one additional party three party Conference Multiline Terminals can add up to two additional parties four party Conference MS A Single Line Telephone will disconnect the last party added to a Conference after the Conference 1 sta tion 2 trunk is established by providing a hookflash This allows breaking up the Conference and returning to a two party connection with the first party NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 118 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CONFERENCE THREE FOUR PARTY Multiline Terminals may allow other Multiline Terminals with the same line button appearance to enter the conversation and therefore establish a Conference by using the Privacy feature Refer to the Privacy Fea tures and Specifications for more information Once the second party answers and prior to pressing the Conf key Multiline Terminals may use the Trans fer or Answer key to alternate between the two parties Refer to the Broker s Call Features and Specifica tions for more information During a three party Conference use of the Answer key on the Multiline Terminal will split the Conference in
434. y Station Direct Inward Termi nation can be provided 2 If Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF digits have not arrived within a predetermined time interval 15 seconds after the message is supplied the system will transfer as per programming to an alternate call ter minating destination Attendant Console Trunk Answer Any Station Direct Inward Termination NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 47 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT 10 11 Call Forwarding Station Hunting Call Pickup and Automatic Uniform Call Distribution features are all ef fective after the call has been directed This feature uses the DTMF receivers of the system Therefore the total number of DTMF receivers avail able in the system is reduced proportionately by Automated Attendant usage There is a maximum of 16 DTMF receivers per Firmware Processor FP and a maximum of 32 DTMF receivers per system A DTMF receiver must be available before the Automated Attendant can answer When there is an incom ing call and all DTMF receivers are busy the connection to the Automated Attendant is attempted every 4 seconds until an idle DTMF receiver is found Ringback tone from the C O is supplied to the calling party until the Automated Attendant answers Automated Attendant is assigned to trunks on a per tenant and per trunk basis When the calling party cannot send DTMF digits any one of the following operations can be sel
435. y is effective when the station user is in idle or seizing a trunk When talking to the outside party the One Touch key sends only outside number as DTMF signal When pressing another One Touch key during the sending DTMF signal after a called station answered the stored number in the second One Touch key is sent out as DTMF signal continuously If the second One Touch key stores the station or outside number with DTMF signal the above b c only the station outside number is sent out and the DTMF signal is not sent out 12 By dialing the feature access code of Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line No Answer and pressing a One Touch key Call Forwarding can be set to a stored station outside number in the One Touch key The station which Call Forwarding Outside is restricted cannot use a One Touch key for Call Forwarding operation 13 When using the additional memory buffers for a Multiline Terminal the LEDs on the One Touch keys do not show the busy state of the station associated with the keys 14 When using the additional memory buffers for the Multiline Terminal Speed Dialing by a Programmable key is not available on the Multiline Terminal NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 Page 299 STEP CALL STEP CALL General Description This feature allows the Attendant or station user after calling a busy station to call an idle station by simply dialing an additio
436. y the calling party On Hotline Outside calls Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will register the primary extension of the station that used the Hotline and the system speed dial memory location code NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 190 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 HOUSE PHONE HOUSE PHONE General Description This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off hook Station Application All stations Operating Procedure 1 2 3 4 The House Phone user lifts handset The Attendant Console is called automatically The attendant answers The attendant connects user to another station or a trunk Service Conditions 1 Attendant Console indications will appear as follows e ATND lamp flashes e Console buzzer sounds House Phones locally provided may be equipped without dials House Phone assignments are programmed into system data from the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT or the Customer Administration Terminal CAT There is no limit to the number of House Phones permitted in the system provided the maximum amount of available ports is not exceeded The Attendant has the option to process the call using the delay or non delay operation or passing dial tone to House Phones with dials The system s response to a hookflash from a House Phone can be assigned to provide feature dial tone or recall the Attendant Four house ph
437. ys e Remain in queue until an agent becomes available Ringback Tone provided e Immediately overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant e Remain in queue until an agent becomes available Delay Announcement or Music on Hold provided e Remain in queue for a preset time Ringback Tone Delayed Announcement or Music on Hold provid ed then overflow to another group to a station or to the Attendant When the pilot station has set Call Forwarding All Calls incoming calls to the UCD group will be trans ferred to the destination of that Call Forwarding All Calls setting A UCD group number can be used as the destination station of Direct Inward Termination DIT or as a designated Night Service station A UCD group number can be assigned as the destination station of Off Hook Alarms Priority Calls and Attendant Night Transfer UCD group pilot numbers should not be placed in Station Hunting groups The Station Hunting feature would take priority over the UCD function 10 Two types of traffic measurements can be provided for UCD a UCD group Peg Count e Count of incoming calls e Count of answered calls Count of abandoned calls NEAX2000 IVS Business Hotel Data Features and Specifications Page 316 NDA 24271 Issue 1 0 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Busy In Busy Out UCD e Count of waiting calls e Count of all busy calls b UCD station Peg count e Count of answered calls 11 Upon in
438. ys 2 through 9 assign the name first Refer to Service Condition 2 Press the FEATURE key to program the number Dial the internal station number or the trunk access code i e 9 then dial the outside number Press the FEATURE key SET will appear on the display Service Conditions 1 Service a Up to 32 Multiline Terminals are available to use this feature at the same time b The Multiline Terminal returns to idle status after the ten seconds from pressing SYS STA key and no key operation is activated c If the speed calling memory block is not assigned to the Multiline Terminal the SYS STA key is not affected when the Multiline Terminal user presses these keys d This service feature is ended or interrupted by pressing the Hold key e When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature the incoming call to My Line is rejected f When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature the incoming call to Sub Line key or trunk line appearance can be terminated to the Multiline Terminal In this case the related line trunk lamp is flashed without ringing The Multiline Terminal can answer the incoming call by pressing the associated line trunk key or Answer key g When the Multiline Terminal uses this feature and the user dials the Line Trunk Answer key this feature is ended and Line Trunk Answer key is activated h When the Multiline Terminal is in this service pressing the Recall Transfer and Conf key are not affected i Up

NEC NEAX 2000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents